HP Z240 Maintenance And Service Manual
HP Z240 W orks tation Maint enanc e and Ser vic e Guide
Copyright Inf ormation é Cop yright 2015 HP Developmen t Company, L.P . First Edition: October 2015 Part number: 81947 5-001 Warran ty The information c ontained herein is subject to change without notic e. The only w arranties for HP products and services ar e set forth in the express w arranty statements ac companying such products and services. No thing herein should be c onstrued as constituting an additional warran ty . HP shall not be liabl e for technical or editorial err ors or omissions contained her ein. Not all f eatures ar e available in al l editions of Windows. This comput er may require upgr aded and/ or separa tely pur chased hardwar e, drivers, and/ or softwar e to tak e full advantage o f Windows functionality . See http://www .microsoft. com for details. Trademark Credits ENERG Y ST AR is a regis tered trademark o wned by the U .S. Environmental Pr otection Agency (EP A). Intel, C ore, Pentium, and X eon are trademarks are trademark s of Intel Corpor ation in the U.S. and other co untries. Windows is a U.S . register ed trademark of Microsoft C orporation. NVIDIA and the NVIDIA logo ar e trademarks and/ or regis tered trademark s of NVIDIA Corporation in the U .S. and other co untries.
About this guide This guide pro vides service and maintenanc e information, t echnical details, and conîÂÂguration guidance for your w orkstations. IMPORT ANT : Removal and replacemen t procedures are now av ailable in videos on the HP website. Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / sml . Guide topics Hardwar e overview on page 1 Syst em management on page 16 Component r eplacement information and guideline s on page 41 Diagnostics and tro ubleshooting on page 60 ConîÂÂguring passwor d security and resetting CMOS on page 82 ConîÂÂguring RAID devices on page 88 Syst em board designators on pag e 92 NO TE: View the HP Workst ation User Guide for y our worksta tion at http://www .hp. com/support/ worksta tion_manuals . iii
iv About this guide
T able o f con tents 1 Hardware overview ........................................................................................................................................ 1 HP Z240 SFF Work station components ................................................................................................................. 2 HP Z240 SFF Work station front panel ................................................................................................ 2 HP Z240 SFF Work station rear p anel .................................................................................................. 3 Chassis c omponents ............................................................................................................................ 4 Syst em board c omponents ................................................................................................................. 5 Syst em board ar chitecture .................................................................................................................. 6 Work station speciîÂÂcations .................................................................................................................. 7 HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents ............................................................................................................. 8 HP Z240 T ower W orkstation fr ont panel ............................................................................................ 8 HP Z240 T ower W orkstation r ear panel .............................................................................................. 9 Chassis c omponents .......................................................................................................................... 10 Syst em board c omponents ............................................................................................................... 11 Syst em board ar chitecture ................................................................................................................ 12 Work station speciîÂÂcations ................................................................................................................ 13 Product speciîÂÂcations ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Work station weights and dimensions .............................................................................................. 14 Environmen tal speciîÂÂcations ............................................................................................................ 14 Ensuring proper v entilation ................................................................................................................................. 15 2 System management ................................................................................................................................... 16 Pow er management and performance f eature s ................................................................................................. 16 ERP complianc e mode ....................................................................................................................... 16 Hyper - Threading T echnology (HTT) .................................................................................................. 17 SA T A Power Managemen t ................................................................................................................. 17 Intel T urbo Boost T echnology ........................................................................................................... 17 Non-Uniform Memory Acc ess (NUMA) .............................................................................................. 17 BIOS RO M ............................................................................................................................................................. 17 Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities ............................................................................................................................ 18 Using Comp uter Setup (F10) Utilities ................................................................................................ 18 Comput er SetupâÂÂMain ....................................................................................................................... 20 Comput er SetupâÂÂSecurity ............................................................................................................... 22 Comput er SetupâÂÂAdvanc ed ............................................................................................................. 24 Deskt op management ......................................................................................................................................... 29 Initial comput er conîÂÂguration and deplo yment ............................................................................... 30 Installing a r emote sys tem ............................................................................................................... 30 v
Cop ying a setup conîÂÂguration to another c omputer ....................................................................... 30 Updating and managing softwar e .................................................................................................... 31 HP Client Management Sol utions ..................................................................................................... 31 Al tiris Client Management Sol utions ................................................................................................. 31 HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager ........................................................................................................ 32 Syst em Software Man ager ................................................................................................................ 32 ROM Flash .......................................................................................................................................... 32 Remot e ROM Flash .......................................................................................................... 32 HPQFlash ......................................................................................................................... 32 F ailSafe Boot B lock ............................................................................................................................ 32 Rec overing the comp uter by using F ailSafe Boo t Block r ecov ery mode ........................ 33 Work station security ......................................................................................................................... 33 Asset tracking ................................................................................................................. 33 SA T A hard drive security ................................................................................................. 34 DriveLock ap plications ................................................................................. 34 Using DriveL ock ............................................................................................ 35 Passw ord security ........................................................................................................... 36 Establishing an administr ator passwor d using Comput er Setup (F10) Utility ............................................................................................................ 36 Establishing a power -on passw ord using Comput er Setup (F10) Utility ..... 37 Entering a po wer-on pas sword .................................................................... 37 Entering an adminis trator pas sword ........................................................... 38 National k eyboar d delimiter charact ers ...................................................... 38 Cle aring passwor ds ...................................................................................... 38 Chassis security .............................................................................................................. 39 Smart Cov er Sensor (option al) ..................................................................... 39 Side acc ess panel sol enoid lock ................................................................... 39 Cable l ock (op tional) ..................................................................................... 39 F ault notiîÂÂcation and r ecov ery ......................................................................................................... 39 EC C faul t prediction ......................................................................................................... 40 Thermal sensors ............................................................................................................. 40 Progr ammable pow er button (Windows onl y) .................................................................................. 40 Changing the power b utton conîÂÂguration (Windows onl y) ........................................... 40 3 Component replacemen t information and guidelines ...................................................................................... 41 Warnings and cautions ........................................................................................................................................ 42 Service consider ations ......................................................................................................................................... 42 T ools and softwar e requiremen ts ..................................................................................................... 42 El ectrostatic dischar ge (ESD) inf ormation ........................................................................................ 43 Product r ecycling ................................................................................................................................................. 44 Component r eplacement guidelines ................................................................................................................... 44 vi
Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 45 Cable manag ement ........................................................................................................................... 45 CPU (proc essor ) and CPU heatsink .................................................................................................... 46 Expansion slo ts ................................................................................................................................. 47 Card conîÂÂguration r estrictions for pow er supplies ........................................................ 47 Choosing an expansion card sl ot .................................................................................... 47 SFF worksta tion slot identiîÂÂcation and descrip tion ...................................................... 48 SFF worksta tion installation sequenc e recommendations ............................................ 49 T ower work station slo t identiîÂÂcation and description .................................................. 50 T ower work station install ation sequence rec ommendations ....................................... 51 Hard driv es and optical disc drive s ................................................................................................... 51 Handling hard driv es ....................................................................................................... 51 Remov al and replac ement tips ....................................................................................... 52 Drive instal lation and cabling scenarios ......................................................................... 52 SFF worksta tionsâÂÂSA T A cable c onnection guidelines ................................ 52 T ower work stationsâÂÂSA T A cable connection guidelines ............................ 52 Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 53 Supported DIMM conîÂÂgurations ..................................................................................... 53 BIOS errors and w arnings ............................................................................................... 53 DIMM install ation guidelines .......................................................................................... 53 SFF worksta tion DIMM installation or der ....................................................................... 54 T ower work station DIMM install ation order ................................................................... 55 Pow er supply ..................................................................................................................................... 56 Pow er supply speciîÂÂcations ........................................................................................... 56 Pow er consumption and hea t dissipation ...................................................................... 57 Resetting the pow er supply ............................................................................................ 57 Syst em board .................................................................................................................................... 57 Syst em cabling ................................................................................................................ 58 SFF worksta tion system cabling .................................................................. 58 T ower work station system cabling .............................................................. 59 4 Diagnostics and tro ubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 60 Calling support ..................................................................................................................................................... 60 Locating ID labels ................................................................................................................................................ 61 Locating w arranty information ........................................................................................................................... 61 Diagnosis guidelines ............................................................................................................................................ 61 Diagnosis at startup .......................................................................................................................... 61 Diagnosis during operation ............................................................................................................... 62 T roubl eshooting check list ................................................................................................................................... 62 HP troubl eshooting r esourc es and tools ............................................................................................................. 63 Online support ................................................................................................................................... 63 vii
HP Support Cent er .......................................................................................................... 63 HP Chat Support .............................................................................................................. 63 Customer A dvisories, Customer and Security Bull etins, and Customer No tices ........... 63 Product Ch ange NotiîÂÂcations ....................................................................... 64 Helpful hin ts ...................................................................................................................................... 64 At s tartup ........................................................................................................................ 64 During operation ............................................................................................................. 64 Customer Sel f Repair ...................................................................................................... 65 T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions ........................................................................................................... 66 Solving minor pr oblems .................................................................................................................... 66 Solving h ard drive pr oblems ............................................................................................................. 67 Solving dis play probl ems .................................................................................................................. 69 Solving audio pr oblems ..................................................................................................................... 71 Solving prin ter probl ems ................................................................................................................... 72 Solving po wer supply pr oblems ........................................................................................................ 72 T esting pow er supply ...................................................................................................... 72 Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) ........................................................................................................... 73 Downl oading HP PC Hardwar e Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB devic e .................................................. 74 POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes ....................................................... 74 POST numeric c odes and text me ssages .......................................................................................... 75 Interpr eting system validation diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes ................................................ 80 5 ConîÂÂguring password security and resetting CMO S ........................................................................................ 82 Prep aring to conîÂÂgure passwor ds ...................................................................................................................... 82 Resetting the pas sword jumper .......................................................................................................................... 82 Cle aring and resetting the BIOS ........................................................................................................................... 83 Appendix A Linux technical notes .................................................................................................................... 85 Syst em RAM ......................................................................................................................................................... 85 Audio .................................................................................................................................................................... 85 Network cards ...................................................................................................................................................... 86 Hyper - Threading T echnology .............................................................................................................................. 86 NVIDIA Graphics W orkstations ............................................................................................................................. 86 AMD Graphics W orkstations ................................................................................................................................ 87 Appendix B ConîÂÂguring RAID devices ............................................................................................................... 88 RAID hard drive maximum and as sociated st orage contr oll er options .............................................................. 88 Supported RAID conîÂÂgurations ........................................................................................................................... 89 ConîÂÂguring Intel SA T A RAID ................................................................................................................................. 89 ConîÂÂguring system BIO S ................................................................................................................... 89 viii
ConîÂÂguring RAID with the Intel utility .............................................................................................. 90 Softwar e RAID solution ........................................................................................................................................ 90 Softwar e RAID considerations .......................................................................................................... 90 Performanc e considerations ............................................................................................................. 91 ConîÂÂguring softwar e RAID ................................................................................................................ 91 Appendix C System board designat ors ............................................................................................................. 92 SFF worksta tion system boar d designators ....................................................................................................... 92 T ower work station system bo ard designat ors ................................................................................................... 93 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 95 ix
x
1 Hardw are overview This chapt er presents an o verview of works tation hardwar e components. T opics HP Z240 SFF Works tation components on page 2 HP Z240 T ower Worksta tion components on page 8 Product speciîÂÂcations on pag e 14 Ensuring proper v entilation on page 15 1
HP Z240 SFF W orkstation c omponents This section describes the HP Z240 Small F orm F actor (SFF) Work station components. For c omplete and curr ent information on sup ported acce ssories and components f or the comput er, see http://p artsur fer .hp .c om . HP Z240 SFF W orkstation fron t panel 1 Power b utton 6 USB 2.0 port, charging (1, black) 2 HDD LED 7 USB 2.0 port (1, black) 3 Optional op tical disc drive (not shown) 8 USB 3.0 ports (2) (blue) 4 Optional har d disk drive (not shown) 9 Microphone or he adphones connector (softwar e selectable, def ault mode is microphone) 5 Optional media car d reader (shown) 10 Headphones connect or 2 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
HP Z240 SFF W orkstation rear panel 1 Power c ord connect or 6 USB 3.0 ports (6) (blue) 2 Audio line-in connect or (blue) 7 Serial port 3 RJâÂÂ45 network connector 8 DisplayP ort (DP) (3) 4 PS/2 mouse c onnector (green) 9 PS/2 k eyboard c onnector (purple) 5 Audio line-out connect or (green) NOTE: The labels for the r ear panel connectors use industry-s tandard icons and col ors. NO TE: The DP ports are not supported when the sys tem is conîÂÂgured with Intelî Xeon E3-12x0 v5 pr ocessors. For al l other processors, these DP ports ar e disabled by def ault when a discrete gr aphics card is install ed. NO TE: Simultaneous usage o f integrated Int el HD graphics and discrete gr aphics cards (in order to drive mor e than three displays) can be en abled using the C omputer (F10) Setup Utility . Howe ver, HP recommends using onl y discrete graphics cards when attaching f our or more displays. HP Z240 SFF Work station components 3
Chassis c omponents For c omplete and curr ent information on sup ported acce ssories and components f or the comput er, go to http:// partsur fer .hp .c om . The fol lowing image shows the c omponents of a typical SFF comp uter layo ut. Drive conîÂÂgurations can vary . Item Description Item Description 1 Acc ess panel 6 Slim optical drive 2 Power sup ply 7 Front bez el 3 Chassis 8 Airî¯ow guide 4 Syst em board 9 Optional memory card r eader or second hard driv e 5 F an baî±e 10 Hard drive 4 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
System board c omponents The fol lowing il lustration and tabl e identify the system boar d components f or the SFF workstation. I/O SA T A P ower 1 Dual-Mode Dis playPort 16 USB 3.1 (op tion) 26 Battery 2 DisplayP ort SA T A 27 Proc essor power 3 Front audio 17 AHCI 6Gb/ s 28 Fron t power button/LED 4 Front s peak er PCI/PCIe 29 Main power 5 Front USB 2.0 18 PCIe3 x16 30 Pow er COMM 6 Front USB 3.0 19 PCIe3 x1 31 SA T A power 7 Internal USB 2.0 20 PCIe3 x1 Security 8 Internal USB 3.0 21 PCIe3 x16 (4) 32 Chassis sol enoid lock 9 Keyboar d / mouse 22 Z turbo drive LED (E19) 33 Hood sensor 10 Network / re ar USB 3.0 NO TE: For rel ated expansion card slot in formation, see Expansion slo ts on page 47 Service 11 Thunderbolt ( option) M.2 34 Cle ar CMOS button 12 Rear audio 23 PCIe3 x4 35 ME/ AMT î¯ash override 13 Rear USB 3.0 Cooling 36 Passw ord jumper 14 Serial 24 Proc essor fan 15 Serial (op tion) 25 Rear f an HP Z240 SFF Work station components 5
System board architecture The fol lowing îÂÂgure shows the typical syst em board bl ock diagram. NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe lanes supported. 6 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
W orkstation speciîÂÂcations SFF Processor technology Intel Series C236 chipset: â Support for the Intelî X eonî Proc essor E3 v5 Famil y, sixth-generation Int el Core⢠pr ocessors up to 95 W, or Intel P entiumî processors â Integra ted 2-channel memory control ler â Microar chitecture impro vements â Integra ted graphics (some models) â Advanced V ector Ext ensions (AVX) t o increase î¯oating point performanc e â Intel DMI3 int erface connecting the pr ocessor t o the I/O contr oller Power supply â 240 W, 92% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T ARî Version 6.1 r equirements â 200 W, 85% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T AR Version 6.1 r equirements â Supports European Union ERP L ot 6 tier 2 power limit of l ess than 0.5W in oî« mode Memory technology â Dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) based on DDR4 2133 MHz t echnology â Supports error checking and corr ecting (ECC) and non-E CC DIMMs â Tw o direct-attach memory channels enabl e low-lat ency access and f ast data transfer f or improved performance â Up to 64 GB syst em memory (16 GB DIMMs) â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB EC C unbuî«ered DIMM â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB non EC C unbuî«ered DIMM Graphics cards Supports: â Up to PCIe Gen 3 bus s peeds. â PCIe x16 cards ar e supported in both x16 mechanical slo ts. Multiple gr aphics cards are support ed, provided their t otal power consump tion is less than 45W . â Up to three dis plays with integrat ed Intel HD graphics ( depending on proces sor type) â The total number o f displays supported depends on the number of gr aphics cards present, and the number of outputs on e ach card. â Windows 10 supports display outp ut from both int egrated graphics capabl e proces sors and discrete graphics cards. This f eature is enabl ed by defaul t, and can be changed through the C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . NOTE: Most supported Int el Core pr ocessors pro vide Intel HD Graphics 510/530; Intel X eon proces sors with model designations that end in "___5" pr ovide Intel HD Graphics P530. NOTE: T o drive more than three dis plays, use Comput er Setup (F10) Utility to intermix integr ated Intel HD graphics and discret e graphics cards (with f our or more displays, HP r ecommends using only discr ete graphics cards ). I/O technol ogy â RAID conîÂÂgurations for SA T A RAID levels 0, 1 â Tw o external and one intern al USB 2.0 ports (includes front char ging port) â Eight extern al USB 3.0 ports and one internal USB 3.0 port â Three Displa yPort 1.2 connectors â Serial header that can be used with an op tional PCI bulkhead connect or â Native M.2 connect or with PCIe x4 interface HP Z240 SFF Work station components 7
HP Z240 T o wer W orkstation c omponents This section describes the HP Z240 T ower Works tation components. For c omplete and curr ent information on sup ported acce ssories and components f or the comput er, see http:// partsur fer .hp .c om . HP Z240 T ower W orkstation fron t panel 1 Optional har d disk / optical disc drive (not shown) 7 USB 2.0 ports (1) (black) 2 Optional har d disk / optical disc drive (not shown) 8 USB 3.0 ports (2) (blue) 3 Optical disc drive 9 Microphone or he adphones connector (softwar e selectable, def ault mode is microphone) 4 Power butt on 10 Headphone connect or 5 Hard disk drive activity light 11 Optional media car d reader (shown) 6 USB 2.0 port, charging (1, black) 8 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
HP Z240 T ower W orkstation rear panel 1 Power c ord connect or 8 Audio line-out connect or (green) 2 PS/2 k eyboard c onnector (purple) 9 PS/2 mouse c onnector (green) 3 USB 2.0 ports (2) (black) 10 RJ-45 network connector 4 Display P ort (DP) connectors (2) 11 Cabl e lock sl ot 5 DVI-D connect or 12 Padl ock loop 6 USB 3.0 ports (4) (blue) 13 Audio line-in connector (bl ue) 7 Microphone c onnector (pink) NOTE: The labels for the r ear panel connectors use industry-s tandard icons and col ors. NO TE: The DP and DVI-D ports are not sup ported when the system is conîÂÂgured with Intel X eon E3-12x0 v5 processors. Also, if a discret e graphics card is install ed the se ports are disabled b y default. NO TE: Simultaneous usage o f integrated Int el HD graphics and discrete gr aphics cards (in order to drive mor e than three displays) can be en abled using the C omputer (F10) Setup Utility . Howe ver, HP recommends using onl y discrete graphics cards when attaching f our or more displays. HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents 9
Chassis c omponents The fol lowing îÂÂgure shows the chas sis components of a typical t ower worksta tion layout. Drive conîÂÂgurations can vary . Item Description Item Description 1 Power suppl y 6 Slim optical drive 2 Side access p anel 7 Hard drive 3 Cooler 8 Optional second o ptical drive 4 System boar d 9 Optional solid state drive 5 Chassis 10 Front bez el 10 Chapter 1 Hardw are ov erview
System board c omponents The fol lowing il lustration and tabl e identify the system boar d components f or the tower work station. I/O SA T A Power 1 Dual-Mode Dis playPort 15 AHCI 6Gb/ s 25 Battery 2 DVI video PCI/PCIe 26 Proc essor power 3 Front audio 16 Z turbo drive LED (E19) 27 Front power butt on/LED 4 Front s peak er 17 PCIe3 x1 28 Main power 5 Front USB 2.0 18 PCIe3 x16 29 SA T A power 6 Front USB 3.0 19 PCIe3 x4 30 Power C OMM 7 Internal USB 2.0 20 PCIe3 x16 (4) Security 8 Internal USB 3.0 21 PCI (op tional) 31 Chassis sol enoid lock 9 Keyboar d / mouse NOTE: For related exp ansion card slot in formation, see Expansion slo ts on page 47 32 Hood sensor 10 Network / re ar USB 2.0 M.2 Service 11 Thunderbolt ( optional) 22 PCIe3 x4 33 Cle ar CMOS button 12 Rear audio Cooling 34 ME / AMT î¯ash o verride 13 Rear USB 3.0 23 Proc essor fan 35 Passwor d jumper 14 Serial (op tional) 24 Rear f an HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents 11
System board architecture NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe lanes supported. 12 Chapter 1 Hardw are ov erview
W orkstation speciîÂÂcations T ower Processor technology Intel Series C236 chipset: â Support for the Intel X eon Proc essor E3 v5 Famil y or sixth-generation Int el Core pr ocessors up to 95 W â Integra ted 2-channel memory control ler â Microar chitecture impro vements â Integra ted graphics (some models) â Advanced V ector Ext ensions (AVX) t o increase î¯oating point performanc e â Intel DMI3 int erface connecting the pr ocessor t o the I/O contr oller Power supply â 400 W, 92% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T AR Version 6.1 r equirements â 280 W, 90% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T AR Version 6.1 r equirements â Supports European Union ERP L ot 6 tier2 power limit of l ess than 0.5 W in oî« mode Memory technology â Dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) based on DDR4 2133MHz t echnology â Supports error checking and corr ecting (ECC) and non-E CC DIMMs â Tw o direct-attach memory channels enabl e low-lat ency access and f ast data transfer â Up to 64 GB syst em memory (16 GB DIMMs) â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB EC C unbuî«ered DIMM â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB non EC C unbuî«ered DIMM Graphics cards Supports: â Up to PCIe Gen 3 bus s peeds. â PCIe x16 cards ar e supported in both x16 mechanical slo ts. Multiple gr aphics cards are support ed, provided their t otal power consump tion is less than 45W . â Up to three dis plays with integrat ed Intel HD graphics ( depending on proces sor type). â The total number o f displays supported depends on the number of gr aphics cards present, and the number of outputs on e ach card. â Windows 10 supports display outp ut from both int egrated graphics capabl e proces sors and discrete graphics cards. This f eature is enabl ed by defaul t, and can be changed through the C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . NOTE: Most supported Int el Core pr ocessors pro vide Intel HD Graphics 510/530; Intel X eon proces sors with model designations that end in "___5" pr ovide Intel HD Graphics P530. NOTE: T o drive more than three dis plays, use Comput er Setup (F10) Utility to intermix integr ated Intel HD graphics and discret e graphics cards (with f our or more displays, HP r ecommends using only discr ete graphics cards ). I/O technol ogy â RAID conîÂÂgurations for SA T A RAID levels 0, 1 â Supports eSA T A (3.0 Gbps) at only one SA T A por t (P3) using an optional adap ter â Four ext ernal and two internal USB 2.0 ports â Six external and one in ternal USB 3.0 port â Tw o DisplayPort 1.2 connect ors â One DVI-D connect or â Serial header that can be used with an op tional PCI bulkhead connect or HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents 13
T ower â Native M.2 connect or with PCIe x4 interface Product speciîÂÂcations W orkstation weights and dimensions Characteristic HP Z240 SFF HP Z240 T ower Weight Standar d conîÂÂguration 6.7 k g (14.86 lb.) 9.4 k g (20.79 lb) Minimum conîÂÂguration 5.7 k g (12.66 lb) 8.6 kg (18.95 lb ) Maximum conîÂÂguration 7.7 k g (16.93 lb) 11.9 kg (26.20 lb ) Chassis dimensions T ower conîÂÂguration Height 33.8 cm (13.3 in) 39.9 cm (15.7 in) Width 10.0 cm (3.95 in) 17.0 cm (6.7 in) Depth 38.1 cm (15.0 in) 44.2 cm (17.4 in) Chassis dimensions Converted deskt op conîÂÂguration Height 10.0 cm (3.95 in) 17.0 cm (6.7 in) Width 33.8 cm (13.3 in) 39.9 cm (15.7 in) Depth 38.1 cm (15.0 in) 44.2 cm (17.4 in) Envir onmental speciîÂÂcations Characteristic HP Z240 SFF and Z240 T ower Workstations Temperature Operating : 5ðC to 35ðC (40ðF t o 95ðF) Non-operating : -40ðC to 60ðC (-40ðF t o 140ðF) NOTE: Derate b y 1ðC (1.8ðF) for every 305 m (1,000 ft) altitude o ver 1,524 m (5,000 ft). Humidity Operating : 8% to 85% r elative humidity, non-condensing Non-operating : 8% to 90% r elative humidity, non-condensing Al titude Operating: 0 to 3,048 m (10,000 ft) Non-operating : 0 to 9,144 m (30,000 ft) Shock Operating : ý-sine: 40g, 2-3ms Non-operating : â ý-sine: 160 cm/ s, 2-3ms (~100 g) â square: 422 cm/ s, 20 g NOTE: Val ues repre sent individual shock events and do not indicat e repetitive shock ev ents. Vibration Operating Random : 0.5 g (rms), 5-300 Hz Non-Operating : random: 2.0 g (rms), 10-500 Hz NOTE: Val ues do not indicate c ontinuous vibration. 14 Chapter 1 Hardw are ov erview
Ensuring pro per ventilation Pro per ventilation f or the system is important for work station operation. F oll ow these guidelines: â Operat e the workstation on a stur dy, lev el surface. â Pro vide at le ast 15.24 cm (6 inches) of cl earanc e at the front and back o f the workstation. (W orkstation models vary .) â Be sure that the ambien t air temperatur e falls within the envir onmental speciîÂÂcations listed in this documen t. NOTE: The ambient upper limit of 35ðC (95ðF) is onl y good up to 1524 m (5000 ft) el evation. Ther e is a 1ðC (33.8ðF) per 304.8 m (1000 f t) derating abo ve 1524 m (5000 ft). So, at 3,048 m (10,000 ft), the upper ambient air temper ature limit is 30ðC (86ðF). â For cabinet instal lation, be sure tha t adequate cabinet ventila tion and the ambient temperatur e within the cabinet doe s not ex ceed speciîÂÂed limits. â Never r estrict the incoming or o utgoing airî¯ow of the w orkstation by bl ocking any vents or air intak es, as sho wn in the fol lowing îÂÂgure. Ensuring proper v entilation 15
2 System man agement This section describes the tools and utilitie s that provide sys tem management f or the workstation. T opics Power man agement and performance fe atures on page 16 BIOS ROM on pag e 17 Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities on page 18 Deskto p management on page 29 P ower management and performance fe atures ERP compliance mode This comput er provide s ERP compliance mode capability . When enabled, the c omputer shuts do wn to the low est possibl e power stat e. The comput er must then be turned on with the power butt on. One of the eî«ects is that "wak e on L AN" is disabled. When disabled, the c omputer pow ers down conven tionall y . Enabling ERP compliance mode 1. Press F10 during startup. 2. Using the arrow k eys, select the Advanced > P ower Management Options , and then select S5 Maximum Power Savings . 3. Select Main > Save Change and Exit, and then press en ter to acc ept the change. 4. If using Windows 8 or Windows 8.1, boot to Windows and sear ch in the Start Menu for the setting Choose what the power buttons do. Uncheck T urn on fast startup (recommended) . If the checkbox is not a vailable, sel ect Change settings that are currently unavailable at the top of the windo w. If using Windows 10, use the taskbar sear ch îÂÂeld to search f or Power Options. Sel ect Choose what the power button does , then sel ect Turn on fas t startup (recommended) . Disabling ERP compliance mode 1. Press F10 during startup. 2. Using the arrow k eys, select Advanced > P ower Management Options , then clear S5 Maximum Power Savings . 3. Select Main > Save Change and Exit, and then press en ter to acc ept the change. 4. If using Windows 8 or Windows 8.1, boot to Windows and sear ch in the Start Menu for the setting Choose what the power buttons do. Check T urn on fast startup (recommended) . If the check box is not a vailable, sel ect Change settings that are currently unavailable at the top of the windo w. If using Windows 10, use the taskbar sear ch îÂÂeld to search f or Power Options. Sel ect Choose what the power button does , then sel ect Turn on fas t startup (recommended) . 16 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
Hyper- Threading Technol ogy (HT T) This comput er supports HTT, an Intel-pr oprietary technol og y that impr oves pr ocessor perf ormance through paral lelization of c omputations (doing mul tipl e tasks at once). The operating sys tem tre ats an HTT -enabl ed proces sor as two virtual proces sors, and shares the work load between them when possibl e. This featur e requir es that the operating sys tem support multipl e proc essors and be speciîÂÂcally optimiz ed for HTT . Use Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility to enabl e HTT . Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to determine if y our CPU supports HTT . SA T A Po wer Management SA T A Power Managemen t enables or disabl es SA T A bus and/ or devic e power management. Intel T urbo Boost Technol ogy Y our workstation supports Int elî Turbo Boos t T echnology . This fe ature enabl es the CPU to run at a higher than normal r ate. When al l CPU core s are not nec essary for the work load, inactiv e cores ar e turned oî« and power is divert ed to the active c ores to incr ease their performance . T urbo Boost is enabl ed and disabled with Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to determine if y our CPU supports T urbo Boost. Non-Uniform Memory Acces s (NUMA) Non-uniform memory acc ess (NUMA) is avail able on some works tations. NUMA can improv e memor y bandwidth and lat enc y for mul ti-proc ess or mul ti-thre aded applications or workl oads. Observed performanc e impro vements depend on the operating sys tem, customer w orkl oad, system conîÂÂguration, and the degr ee to which the applications used are de signed to be NUMA-aware/eî°cient. NUMA requir es that both pr ocessor sock ets be popul ated. Instal led memory should be b alanced between both proc essors for maximum performanc e. NUMA is enabled if Memory Node Int erlea ve is disabled in the syst em BIOS. T o do this, press F10 during startup to ent er Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . Select Adv anced > Chipset/Memory . Use the arrow k eys t o set Memory Node Interleave t o Disable. Pre ss F10 to exit the menu, and then sel ect Main > Save Changes and Exit . Y our change tak es eî«ect when the comput er restarts. BIOS R OM The BIOS RO M is a coll ection of machine language applications s tored as îÂÂrmware in R OM. It includes functions such as Pow er-On Sel f- T est (POST), PCI devic e initialization, Plug and Pl ay support, power management, and C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to re view the lates t BIOS ROM speciîÂÂcations. BIOS RO M 17
C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities Use Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility to do the f ollowing: â Change settings from the de faults or r estor e the settings to defaul t val ues. â View the syst em conîÂÂguration, including settings for pr ocessor, gr aphics, memor y, audio, st orage, communications, and inp ut devices. â Modify the boot order o f bootable de vices such as har d drives, optical driv es, or USB î¯ash media devices. â (Windows 7 onl y) Establish an Ownership T ag, the tex t of which is display ed each time the system is turned on or res tarted. â Enter the As set T ag or property identiîÂÂcation number assigned by the c ompany to this c omputer . â Enable the po wer -on password pr ompt during syst em restarts (warm boo ts) as well as during po wer -on. â Establish an administr ator passwor d that con trols acc ess to the C omputer Setup (F10) Utility and the settings described in this section. â Establish minimum requir ements for v alid passwords, incl uding length and requir ed types of charact ers. â Secure int egrated I/ O functionality, including the serial, USB, or audio, or embedded NIC, so tha t they cannot be used until they ar e unsecured. â Enable or disabl e diî«erent types of boot so urces. â ConîÂÂgure fe atures such as Secure Boo t, power management, virtualization support, and language and k eyboard type used in Setup and POS T . â Replicat e the system setup by saving sys tem conîÂÂguration informa tion on a USB device and re storing it on one or more c omputers. â Enable or disabl e DriveLock security or secur ely er ase a hard drive ( when supported by drive ). Using C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities Comput er Setup can be acc essed only b y turning the comput er on or restarting the syst em. T o acces s the Comput er Setup Utilities menu, compl ete the fol lowing s teps: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. Repe atedly pr ess F10 when the monit or light turns on to acc ess the utility . Y ou can also press Esc t o a menu that all ows you t o acces s diî«erent options availabl e at startup, including the C omputer Setup utility . NO TE: If you do not pr ess F10 at the appr opriate time, yo u must restart the c omputer and again repe atedl y press F10 when the monit or light turns green to ac cess the utility . 3. A choice o f four headings ap pears in the Comput er Setup Utilities menu: Main, Security, Advanced, and UEFI Drivers. NO TE: Selecting UEFI Drivers r estarts the comput er into the 3rd p art y option R OM management application. Y ou can acce ss this application directl y by pr essing F3 during startup. 4. Use the arr ow (left and right) k eys t o select the appr opriate heading. U se the arrow (up and do wn) ke ys to sel ect the option yo u want, then pres s Enter. T o return to the Comp uter Setup Utilities menu, pre ss Esc . 5. T o appl y and save changes, sel ect Main > Save Changes and Exit. 18 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
â If you h ave made changes that y ou do not wan t applied, select Ignore Changes and Exit. â T o res tore settings fr om the Advanced and Main menus t o original values, sel ect Apply F actory Defaul ts and Exit . â T o res tore settings fr om the Advanced and Main menus t o those previousl y saved b y Save Custom Defaul ts , select Apply Cus tom Defaul ts and Exit . If no custom def aults hav e been saved, then fact or y defaul ts are used. NOTE: Settings in the Security menu are no t modiîÂÂed by Apply Defaul ts . Those values ar e reset b y Restore Security Settings t o Fact ory Defaul ts at the bottom o f the Security menu. NOTE: Not al l settings shown in the foll owing sections are av ailable f or all models CAUTION: Do NOT turn the c omputer pow er OFF while the BIOS is saving the C omputer Setup (F10) change s because the settings coul d become c orrupted. It is saf e to turn oî« the comput er only aft er exiting the F10 Setup screen. Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 19
Computer SetupâÂÂMain NOTE: Support for speciîÂÂc C omputer Setup options ma y vary depending on the hardwar e conîÂÂguration. T able 2-1 Computer SetupâÂÂMain Option Description System Information Lists all information in f ollo wing list if Advanced System Information is sel ected. Lists small er subset if Basic System Information is sel ected. â Product name â Install ed memory size â Proc essor type â Proc essor cache size (L1/L2/L3) â Proc essor speed â MicroCode R evision â Proc essor Step ping â Memory Speed â DIMM size (f or each install ed module) â Syst em BIOS version â ME Firmware v ersion (Intel only ) â Video BIOS version â Super I/O Firmw are version â Born On Date â Serial Number â SKU number â UUID (Universall y Unique IdentiîÂÂer) â Asset T racking Number â Featur e Byte â Build ID â Product F amily â Syst em Board ID â Syst em Board CT â Integra ted MAC Addre ss System Diagnostics If the har d drive has the HP Advanc ed Diagnostics installed, the ap plication will launch. If HP Advanc ed Diagnostics is not instal led, then a basic version buil t into the BIOS wil l provide the capability to perf orm the foll owing functions: â Memory T est â Hard Drive Check â Language Update System BIOS Lets y ou update the syst em BIOS from www .hp.c om or another network server, from a r emovable USB drive, or from a îÂÂle l ocated on the har d drive. â âÂÂCheck HP . com for BIOS Updat esâ or âÂÂCheck the Network for BIO S Updatesâ 20 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-1 Computer SetupâÂÂMain (continued) The string that appe ars here depends on the setting in âÂÂBIOS Update Pr eferenc esâÂÂ. â Lock BIOS V ersion If this option is check ed, the system is l ocked t o the current BIOS version and updat es are not all owed. â BIOS Update P referenc es All ows the administrat or to select the sour ce of network update s (www.hp .com or ano ther network server) and al lows conîÂÂguration of a periodic check f or updates, including policies f or: â Check for update s and prompt the user to ac cept or r eject the update at that time â Check for update s and install all new v ersions â Check for update s and install only ne w versions marked important â Network ConîÂÂguration Settings â Update BIOS Using L ocal Media Lets you ac cess îÂÂles on either USB st orage or the hard driv e. The HP BIOS Update and Rec overy application included in BIOS So ftpaqs at www.hp .com wil l copy the BIOS îÂÂle t o the correct l ocation on the hard driv e or USB device. System IDs Lets you set the f ollo wing values: â Asset T racking Number â Ownership T ag Replicated Setup Backup current settings to USB de vice Saves syst em conîÂÂguration to a formatt ed USB î¯ash media device. Restore current settings fr om USB device Rest ores system conîÂÂguration fr om a USB î¯ash media device. Save Custom De faults Saves the curr ent system conîÂÂguration settings as the custom de fault set. Apply Custom Def aults and Exit Applies the cust om default settings to the c omputer after r ebooting. Does not appl y to op tions in the Security menu. Apply F actory Defaul ts and Exit Rest ores the fact ory system conîÂÂguration settings to the comput er after rebooting . Does not apply t o options in the Security menu. Ignore Changes and Exit Exits Comput er Setup without applying or saving an y changes. Save Changes and Exit Sa ves changes to curr ent system conîÂÂguration, exits C omputer Setup, and reboo ts. Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 21
Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity NOTE: Support for speciîÂÂc C omputer Setup options ma y vary depending on the hardwar e conîÂÂguration. T able 2-2 Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity Option Description Set up BIOS Administrator P assword Lets you set and en able a BIOS administrat or password, which incl udes the foll owing privileges: â Manage other BIOS users â Full ac cess t o BIOS policy and settings â Unlock the c omputer when other BIOS users fail the pr eboot authentication. NOTE: Creating a BIO S user disables the F ast Boot option. NOTE: If the passwor d is set, it is required to ch ange Computer Setup op tions, update the BIOS, and mak e changes to certain pl ug and play settings under Windows. Change BIOS Administrator P assword (This selection is active only if a BIOS administrat or password is set.) Lets you ch ange the BIOS administrator p assword. Y ou must know the curr ent passwor d to be able to ch ange it. Password P olicies Let you set the guideline s for a valid passwor d. Options include: â Passwor d minimum length â Require s at least one symbol â Require s at least one number â Require s at least one upper case char acter â Require s at least one l ower case charact er â All ow spaces Clear Pas sword Jumper Select âÂÂHonorâ to al low or âÂÂIgnore â to not all ow the absence of the p assword jumper to cl ear the passwor ds at boot up . Default is âÂÂHonorâÂÂ. Security ConîÂÂguration TPM Embedded Security â TPM Device Lets you set the T rust ed Platform Modul e as available or hidden. â TPM State Select t o enable the TPM. â TPM Clear Select t o reset the TPM to an uno wned state. Aft er the TPM is clear ed, it is also turned oî«. T o temporaril y suspend TPM oper ations, turn the TPM oî« instead o f clearing it. CAUTION: Clearing the TPM r esets it to fact ory defaults and turns it oî«. Y ou wil l lose all cr eated k eys and data prot ected by those k eys. BIOS Sure Start â Verify Boot Block on e very Boot Select t o check validity of boot block r egion each boot. If not sel ected, boot bl ock region will be validated on po wer cycles. 22 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-2 Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity (continued) â Data Recovery P olicy Select â Automaticâ or âÂÂManualâ t o set data recov ery polic y . âÂÂManualâ lets y ou select whether or not t o execut e recov ery of a corrupted r egion if it is detected. Dynamic Runtime Scanning of Boo t Block VeriîÂÂes the integrity of the BIO S boot block region se veral times each hour whil e the system is running. Set Up BIOS Power -On Password Lets you set and en able a BIOS power -on passwor d. The power-on pas sword promp t appears after a power cycl e or reboot. If the user does not en ter the correct po wer-on passw ord, the unit will not boo t. Change BIOS Power -On Password (This selection is active only if a BIOS po wer-on passwor d is set.) Lets you ch ange the BIOS power -on password. Y ou must know the curr ent passwor d to be able to ch ange it. DriveLock Allows y ou to assign or modify a mast er or user password f or hard drives. When this f eature is enabl ed, the user is prompt ed to pro vide one of the DriveLock passw ords during POST . If neither is succes sfully enter ed, the hard drive will r emain inacce ssible until one of the pas swords is succ essfull y provided during a subsequent col d-boot sequence. NOTE: This selection wil l only appear when at l east one drive that sup ports the DriveLock featur e is attached to the syst em. CAUTION: Be aware that these settings tak e place immediat ely . A save is not neces sary . CAUTION: Be sure to document the Driv eLock password. L osing a DriveLock passwor d will render a driv e permanently l ocked. After y ou select a drive, the f ollowing op tions are availabl e: Set DriveLock Master P assword . Sets the driveâ s mast er password but does no t enable DriveL ock. Enable DriveLock . Sets the drive âÂÂs user p assword and enabl es DriveLock. Secure Erase Lets you sel ect a hard drive t o complet ely erase. Once a har d drive has been erased with a progr am that utilizes Secure Er ase îÂÂrmware commands, no îÂÂle reco very program, partition r ecovery progr am, or other data reco very method will be able t o extract data from the drive . Save/Rest ore MBR of the system hard drive NOTE: Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 syst ems are generall y not formatt ed to include an MBR. Inst ead they use GUID Partition T able (GPT) f ormat, which better supports large h ard drives. Enabling this fea ture will save the Mas ter Boot Rec ord (MBR) of the system h ard drive. If the MBR gets changed, the user will be pr ompted to r estor e the MBR. Default is disabl ed. The MBR contains inf ormation needed to succ essfull y boot from a disk and to ac cess the data s tored on the disk. Master Boot R ecord Security may pr event unintention al or malicious changes to the MBR, such as those caused by some viruses or by the inc orrect use of c ertain disk utilities. It also allows y ou to rec over the "last known good" MBR, sho uld changes to the MBR be det ected when the system is r estarted. NOTE: Most operating sys tems contr ol access t o the MBR of the current bootabl e disk; the BIOS cannot prev ent changes that may occur whil e the operating syst em is running. Rest ores the backup Mas ter Boot Rec ord to the current boo table disk. Defaul t is disabled. Only appe ars if all of the fol lowing conditions ar e true: â MBR security is enabled â A backup c opy of the MBR has been pre viously sav ed â The current boo table disk is the same disk from which the back up copy was sav ed Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 23
T able 2-2 Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity (continued) CAUTION: Restoring a pr eviously sav ed MBR after a disk utility or operating syst em has modiîÂÂed the MBR, may cause the data on the disk to bec ome inacces sible. Only r estor e a previousl y saved MBR if you are conîÂÂdent that the curr ent bootable disk' s MBR has been corrup ted or infect ed with a virus. Smart Cover Cover L ock (Lock/Unlock) Defaul t is âÂÂUnlockâÂÂ. Cover Remo val Sensor (Disabled/Notify user / Administrator pas sword) Lets you disabl e the cov er sensor or conîÂÂgure what action is taken if the c omputer co ver was remo ved. Defaul t is âÂÂDisabledâÂÂ. NOTE: Notify user alerts the user with a POS T error on the îÂÂrst boot aft er the sensor detects remov al of the cov er . If the passwor d is set, Administrator Pas sword requires tha t the password be ent ered to boot the comput er if the sensor detects that the co ver has been remov ed. System Management Command All ows authorized personnel to r eset security settings during a ser vice ev ent. Defaul t is enabled. Restore Security Settings to Defaul t This action resets security devic es, clears BIOS pas swords (not incl uding DriveLock), and rest ores settings in the Security menu to fact ory defaults. Computer SetupâÂÂAdv anced NOTE: Support for speciîÂÂc C omputer Setup options ma y vary depending on the hardwar e conîÂÂguration. T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) Option Heading Display Language Lets you sel ect the language of the menus in F10 Setup and the k eyboard lay out. Scheduled Power-On This featur e wak es the system up from a po wered oî« state a t a speciîÂÂed date and time. Boot Options Select the devic es that the comput er can boot from, as wel l as other options, including: â Startup Menu Delay(sec). Enabling this f eature will add a user-speciîÂÂed del ay to the POST pr ocess. One purpose for the delay is t o provide additional time t o activate hotk eys such as Esc for the Startup Menu or F10 for C omputer Setup. â F ast Boot. Defaul t is enabled for Windo ws 8.1 or later, and disabled f or Windows 7 systems. â CD-ROM Boot. Def ault is enabl ed. â Network (PXE) Boo t. Default is enabl ed. â Promp t on Memory Size Change. Defaul t is enabled. â Promp t on Fixed St orage Change. Defaul t is disabled. â After P ower Loss. Defaul t is Power Oî«. â Power oî«âÂÂcauses the c omputer to r emain powered oî« when pow er is restor ed. â Power onâÂÂcause s the computer t o power on automaticall y as soon as power is res tored. â Previo us stateâÂÂcauses the c omputer to power on aut omatically as soon as po wer is rest ored, if it was on when power w as lost. NOTE: If the system is conîÂÂgured t o âÂÂPower On from K eyboard P ortsâ (see Power Management Options), then this setting is f orced to âÂÂP ower OnâÂÂ. â Audio Al erts During Boot. Default is enabl ed. When disabled, most audibl e beeps from errors, warnings, and passw ord prompts during boo t up are suppres sed. â UEFI Boot Order . 24 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) Defaul t is enabled. Specify the order in which UEFI boo t sources ( such as a internal hard driv e, USB hard driv e, USB optical drive, or intern al optical drive) ar e checked for a boo table operating sys tem image. UEFI boot sour ces alw ays have prec edence over l egacy boot sourc es. â Legacy Boot Or der Specify the order in which l egacy boot source s (such as a network interface car d, internal hard driv e, USB optical drive, or in ternal optical drive ) are check ed for a bootable o perating system image. Specify the order of attached har d drives. The îÂÂrst har d drive in the order will ha ve priority in the boot sequence and wil l be recogniz ed as drive C (if any devices ar e attached). NOTE: T o drag a device to a pr eferred plac e, press Ent er . NOTE: MS-DOS drive l ettering assignments may not appl y after a non-MS-DOS oper ating system has started. Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order T o boot one time from a device o ther than the defaul t device speciîÂÂed in Boot Or der, restart the comput er and press Esc (t o acces s the Startup menu) and then F9 (Boot Menu), or only F9 (skip ping the Startup menu) when the monitor light turns gr een. After POST is c ompleted, a list o f bootable devic es is displayed. Use the arrow k eys t o select the pref erred bootable de vice and press En ter . The computer then boo ts from the sel ected non-defaul t device for this one time. Secure Boot ConîÂÂguration ConîÂÂgure Legacy Support and Secure Boot Legacy Support â Lets yo u turn oî« all legacy support on the comput er, including booting t o DOS, running legacy graphics car ds, booting to l egacy devices, and so on. Windows 7 for ins tance require s legacy support, whereas Windows 8 doe s not. Secure Boot â L ets you mak e sure an operating syst em is legitimate be fore booting t o it, making Windows resistan t to malicious modiîÂÂcation from pr eboot to full OS boo ting, preventing îÂÂrmware a ttacks. UEFI and Windows Secure Boo t only all ow code signed by pr e-approv ed digital certiîÂÂcates to run during the îÂÂrmware and OS boot pr ocess. Defaul t is âÂÂLegacy Support Enable and Secure Boo t Disableâ f or Windows 7 and other non-Windo ws conîÂÂgurations. Defaul t is âÂÂLegacy Support Disable and Secure Boo t Enableâ f or Windows 8.1 and later conîÂÂgurations. Secure Boot Key Management Lets you man age the custom k ey settings. Clear Secure Boot Keys Lets you del ete any pr eviously l oaded custom boot k eys. Cl earing ke ys will disable secure boo t. Default is disabled. Reset Secure Boot keys to f actory defaul ts Defaul t is disabled. Enable MS UEFI CA key Disabling this setting alt ers the Secure Boot k ey list to further res trict the allow ed software components. Set this op tion to â disableâ t o support Device Guard. System Options ConîÂÂgure Stor age Control ler for RAID (enable/ disable) Lets you en able onboard RAID . Default is disabl ed. POST Pr ompt for RAID ConîÂÂguration (Intel only ) When disabled, the pr ompt for âÂÂRAID option RO Mâ in legacy mode is suppre ssed. Virtualization Technology (VTx) (Intel onl y) Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 25
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) Contr ols the virtualization features o f the proces sor . Changing this setting requires turning the c omputer oî« and then back on. Defaul t is disabled. Virtualization Technology for Directed I/ O (VTd) (Intel only ) Contr ols virtualization DMA remapping fea tures of the chipset. Changing this setting r equires turning the comput er oî« and then back on. Default is disabl ed. PCI Express Slo t x (enable/ disable) Lets you disabl e individual expansion slo ts. All ow PCIe/PCI SERR# Interrupt (enabl e/ disable) All ows PCI devices t o report PCI/PCIe System Err or signals, such as address parity err ors, data parity errors, and critical errors o ther than parity . Defaul t is enabled. Power Button Override ( disable/4 sec/15 sec) Lets you disabl e or enable and sel ect the number of seconds yo u have to hol d down the power button f or it to for ce the system t o power oî«. Defaul t is âÂÂ4 secâÂÂ. Built -In Device Options Embedded LAN Controller Select t o show the device in the operating sys tem. Defaul t is enabled. Wake On LAN Lets you either disabl e the Wak e On LAN featur e, or conîÂÂgure where the comput er boots, including the network or hard driv e. Default is Boo t to Network. Dust Fil ter (select models only ) Select t o enable the Dust Fil ter replac ement reminder, which can be set for 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, or 180 days. The reminder wil l show during POST after the r eminder timer has expired. Video Memory Size Use this option t o manage graphics memory alloca tion. The value you choose is al located permanentl y to graphics and is unavail able to the oper ating system. Audio Device Select t o show the device in the operating sys tem. Defaul t is enabled. Internal Speakers ( does not aî«ect external s peak ers) Clear t o disable the chassis s peaker . This function is applicable t o normal audio playback in the operating system and does no t aî«ect the error or warning beeps during POS T . Defaul t is enabled. Integrated Micro phone Clear t o disable the integr ated microphone . This does not aî«ect devices pl ugged into audio jacks. Def ault is enabled. Integrated Camera Clear t o disable the integr ated webcam. Defaul t is enabled. Increase Idle F an Speed(%) Sets idle fan s peed percentage . This setting only changes the minimum fan s peed. The fan is still automaticall y contr olled. Fingerprint Device Select t o show the device in the operating sys tem. Defaul t is enabled. T ouch Panel Clear t o disable the display p anel touch fea ture. Defaul t is enabled. 26 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) Port Options All ows you to hide the f ollo wing ports from the operating system: â Serial port A â Serial port B â SA T A0 â SA T A1 â SA T A2 â SA T A3 â Front USB ports â Rear USB ports â USB charging port function â Media card r eader Restrict USB Devices Specify the foll owing categories o f USB devices to en able: â All ow all USB devic es â All ow only k eyboard and mo use â All ow all but st orage devices and hubs. When some devices ar e restrict ed, the system will disabl e USB ports that do not meet the allo wed criteria. This fe ature is usuall y combined with similar policies within the oper ating system since USB devices can be mo ved to diî«erent ports. The ports disabled by the BIO S will remain disabl ed until the system is r estarted. Option ROM Launch Policy These policies contr ol whether Legacy Option ROMs or UEFI driv ers are loaded. Def ault is â Al l legacyâ for Windows 7 and non-Windo ws conîÂÂgurations. Default is â All UEFIâ for Windows 8.1 or lat er . ConîÂÂgure Option ROM Launch P olicy â All l egacy â All UEFI â All UEFI ex cept video Slot settings Lets y ou enable or disabl e any PCIe slot. Power Management Options Runtime Power Managemen t (enable/ disable) All ows certain operating syst ems to reduc e processor v oltage and fr equency when the current software load does no t require the ful l capabilities of the proc essor . Defaul t is enabled. Extended Idle Power S tates (enabl e/ disable) All ows certain operating syst ems to decre ase the processors pow er consumption when the proc essor is idle. Def ault is enabl ed. S5 Maximum Power Savings ( enable/ disable) Enabling this fea ture reduce s the power of the system as much as pos sible in the S5 state . Power is remov ed from the wak e up circuitry, the expansion slo ts, and any management fe atures while in S5. Defaul t is disabled. SA T A Power Management ( enable/ disable) Enables or disabl es SA T A bus and/ or devic e power management. Defaul t is enabled. Unique Sleep State Blink Rates ( enable/ disable) Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 27
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) This featur e is designed to pro vide a visual indication of what sleep s tate the system is in. Each sl eep state has a unique blink p attern. Defaul t is disabled. NOTE: A normal shutdown goes t o the S4 state for Windo ws 8 or later . S0 (On) = Solid white LED . S3 (Stand By)= 3 blink s at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) fol lowed b y a pause of 2 seconds (whit e LED) â repeat ed cycles o f 3 blinks and a pause. S4 (Hibernation)= 4 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycl e) foll owed by a pause of 2 sec onds (white LED) â repeat ed cycles of 4 blink s and a pause. S5 (Soft Oî«) = LED is oî«. Remote Management Options Active Management (AMT) ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. All ows you to disc over, r epair, and protect network ed comp uting devices. USB Key Provisioning Support ( enable/ disable) Defaul t is disabled. USB Redirection Support (enabl e/ disable). Def ault is enabl ed. USB redir ection allows USB devic es plugged int o a client computer t o be transparen tly redir ected to the guest opera ting system. UnconîÂÂgure AMT on next boo t (Do Not Apply / Apply). Def ault is âÂÂDo Not Appl yâÂÂ. SOL Terminal Emulation Mode (ANSI / VT100). Defaul t is ANSI. SOL terminal emulation mode is onl y activated during r emote AMT r edirection operations. The emula tion options all ow administrat ors to select which mode work s best with their console . Show UnconîÂÂgure ME ConîÂÂrmation Prompt ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. Verbose Boot Messages ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. Verbose boo t shows additional logging inf ormation during the boot. mainly f or debugging if something goes wrong during boo tup. Watchdog Timer ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. All ows you to set amo unt of time for a oper ating system and BIOS wat chdog alert to be sent if the timers are not de activated. BIOS w atchdog is deactivat ed by BIOS and woul d indicate that a hal t occurred during execution if the al ert is sent to the management consol e. An operating syst em alert is deactivat ed by the operating syst em image and would indicat e that a hang occurr ed during its initialization. â OS Wat chdog Timer (min.) â (5/10/15/20/25). Default is 5 min. â BIOS Wat chdog Timer (min.) â (5/10/15/20/25). Default is 5 min. CIRA Timeout (min.) (1/2/3/4/Never ) CIRA is Customer Initiated R emote Assistanc e, an Intel service t o help users employing Activ e Management T echnology (AMT). 28 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
Desk top managemen t This section summarizes capabilitie s, featur es, and k ey components of c omputer manag ement. T opics Initial comput er conîÂÂguration and deployment on page 30 Installing a r emote syst em on page 30 Cop ying a setup conîÂÂguration to another comput er on page 30 Updating and managing softwar e on page 31 HP Client Management Sol utions on page 31 Al tiris Client Management Solutions on page 31 HP SoftPaq Downl oad Manager on page 32 Syst em Software Manager on pag e 32 ROM Flash on pag e 32 F ailSafe Boot Bl ock on page 32 Works tation security on page 33 F ault notiîÂÂcation and rec overy on page 39 Progr ammable power butt on (Windows only) on p age 40 NO TE: Support for speciîÂÂc featur es described in this guide can vary by model and so ftware version. Deskt op management 29
Initial computer conîÂÂguration and depl oyment The comput er includes a pr einstall ed system softwar e image. Aft er a brief software unb undling proces s, the comput er is ready t o use. If you pr efer t o replace the pr einstall ed software imag e with a customized set o f system and application softwar e, you can depl oy a customiz ed software image b y: â Installing addition al software applications a fter unbundling the preins talled so ftware image â Using a disk -cl oning proces s to cop y the conten ts from one hard driv e to another The HDD-based HP Reco very Manager ROM -based setup, and ACPI har dware pr ovide further assistance with rec overy of syst em softwar e, conîÂÂguration management and troubl eshooting, and pow er management. Support for speciîÂÂc fe atures described in this guide can v ary by model and software v ersion. The best depl oyment method depends on the inf ormation technology envir onment and proc esses. Instal ling a remote system Remot e system ins tallation enabl es starting and setting up the comput er using software and conîÂÂguration information on a network serv er . This feature is usual ly used f or system setup and conîÂÂguration and can be used to: â Deplo y a software image on ne w PCs â Format a har d drive â Install ap plication software or driv ers â Update the oper ating system, application so ftware, or drivers T o initiate a r emote sys tem installa tion, press f12 when f12=Network Service Boot appe ars in the lower - right corner o f the HP logo scr een. Foll ow the on-screen instructions t o continue the instal lation proc ess. The defaul t boot or der is a BIOS conîÂÂguration setting that can be changed to al ways att empt a network boot. Co pying a setup conîÂÂguration to another c omputer This section pro vides information about r eplicating the comput er setup. CAUTION: Setup conîÂÂguration is model-speciîÂÂc. File syst em corruption can r esult if so urce and tar get comput ers are not the same model. T o cop y a setup conîÂÂguration: 1. Select a setup conîÂÂguration t o cop y, and then restart the comp uter . 2. As soon as you s tart or restart the comp uter, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . If necessary, pres s enter to b ypass the title scr een. NO TE: If you do not pr ess F10 at the appr opriate time, yo u must restart the c omputer, and then pr ess and hold F10 ag ain to acc ess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. Select Main > Replicated Setup > Back up current settings to USB device . F ollo w the instructions on the screen t o creat e the conîÂÂguration îÂÂle cpqsetup. txt and write it to a USB st orage device . 4. T urn oî« the comput er you ar e conîÂÂguring and insert the removabl e USB media device c ontaining the conîÂÂguration îÂÂle. 30 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
5. T urn on the comput er you ar e conîÂÂguring. 6. Pr ess and hold the F10 k ey until y ou enter C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . If neces sar y, pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen. 7. Select Main > Replicated Setup > Re store current settings from USB device , and then f oll ow the instructions on the screen. 8. Res tart the computer when the conîÂÂguration is c omplete . Updating and managing softw are HP pro vides several t ools for managing and updating so ftware on deskt ops and comput ers: â HP Client Manager So ftware â Al tiris Client Management Sol utions â HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager â Syst em Software Man ager HP Client Management Sol utions HP Client Management Sol utions (CMS), avail able for downl oad from h ttp://www .hp. com/go / easydepl oy , are standards -based solutions for man aging and control ling comput ers in a networked en vironment. HP Client Management Sol utions oî«ers these services: â Detailed vie ws of hardw are inven tory for asset managemen t â PC heal th-check monitoring and diagnostics â Pro active notiîÂÂcation of change s in the hardwar e environment â Web-ac cessibl e reporting of b usiness-critical details such as thermal warnings and memory alerts â Remot e updating of syst em software such as de vice drivers and RO M BIOS â Remot e changing of boot or der â ConîÂÂguration of syst em BIOS settings Al tiris Client Managemen t Solutions Al tiris and HP have partner ed to pro vide comprehensiv e, tightly int egrated sys tems management sol utions to reduc e the cost of o wning HP client PCs. The HP CMS is the foundation f or additional Al tiris Client Management Sol utions that address the f oll owing topics. â Inven tory and asset management â Deplo yment and migration â Help desk and pr oblem re solution â Softwar e and operations management Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / Al tiris _Solutions for inf ormation about: Deskt op management 31
â How HP CMS works â Which solutions ar e compatibl e with the operating syst em â How to do wnload a full y functional, 30-day ev aluation version of A ltiris sol utions HP SoftP aq Download Man ager HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager is a fr ee, easy-t o-use interfac e for locating and do wnloading softwar e updates f or the HP client PC models in your en vironment. By specifying your models, o perating system, and language, yo u can quickl y locat e, sort, and select the softpaqs yo u need. For more inf ormation, go to http:// ww w .hp. com/go / sdm . System So ft ware Man ager Syst em Software Man ager (SSM) is a utility availabl e on WindowsâÂÂbased comp uters that enabl es you t o update sys tem-lev el software on mul tipl e systems simul taneously . When execut ed on a PC client system, SSM detects h ardwar e and software v ersions and then updates the softwar e from a c entral reposit ory, known as a îÂÂle st ore . Driver versions supported b y SSM are no ted with a special icon on the so ftware, the driver downl oad website, and on the Support Softwar e CD . T o downl oad the utility or to obtain mor e information about S SM, see http://www .hp. com/go / ssm . RO M Flash BIOS settings are s tored on a pr ogrammable î¯ash R OM. By establishing an administra tor passwor d in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility, you can pr otect unauthoriz ed users from modifying the BIOS settings. T o upgrade the BIOS, downl oad the lat est SoftPaq imag es from http:// ww w .hp .c om/support/ worksta tion_swdrivers . Remote R OM Flash Remot e ROM Flash al lows sys tem administrat ors to safel y upgrade the RO M on remot e HP computers fr om a centr alized network management c onsole, r esulting in a c onsistent depl oyment of, and gr eater c ontrol o ver, HP PC ROM image s over the network. T o use Remot e ROM Flash, the c omputer must be po wered on, or turned on using Remo te W akeup . For mor e information about R emote R OM Flash and HPQFlash, see the HP Client Manager So ftware or Syst em Softwar e Manager sections at http:// ww w .hp. com/g o/ ssm . HPQFlash The HPQFlash utility is used to l ocall y update or res tore the sys tem ROM on PCs using a Windo ws operating system. F or more inf ormation about HPQFlash, see http:// ww w .hp .com/g o/ ssm , and ent er the name of the comput er . F ailSafe Boo t Block F ailSafe Boot B lock enabl es BIOS rec overy in the unlik ely ev ent of a RO M î¯ash failur e. For exampl e, if a power fail ure occurs during a RO M upgrade, Boot Bl ock uses a î¯ash-protected section of the RO M to verify a valid system R OM î¯ash when power is r estor ed to the comp uter . If the system R OM is valid, the comp uter starts normall y . If the system R OM fails the validation check, F ailSafe Boot Bl ock provides eno ugh support to start the comput er from a BIOS image CD cr eat ed from a SoftPaq . The BIOS image CD progr ams the system RO M with a valid image. 32 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
When Boot Bl ock detects an inv alid system RO M, the computer po wer LED blinks red eight time s and the comput er beeps eight times; then the comp uter pauses for tw o seconds. On some models, a Boot Bl ock rec overy mode message ap pears. In prepar ation for syst em reco very, use the BIOS CD media îÂÂle in the SoftPaq t o creat e a BIOS image CD or USB k ey . Reco vering the computer by using F ailSafe Boot B lock reco very mode T o rec over the c omputer after it en ters Boot Bl ock reco very mode: 1. Remo ve any media such as USB k eys or disks in the op tical disk drives. 2. Insert a BIOS image CD int o the DVD drive or insert a USB BIOS image î¯ash driv e, such as an HP DriveKey, into a USB port. 3. T urn oî« the comput er, and then turn it back on. If no BIOS image CD or USB media is f ound, you ar e prompt ed to insert one and restart the c omputer . If an administrat or passwor d has been established, the caps l ock light is illumina ted and you ar e promp ted for the pas sword. 4. Enter the adminis trator pas sword. If the comput er starts from the CD or î¯ash drive and suc ces sfull y reprogr ams the ROM, three k eyboard lights are il luminat ed and a rising-tone series o f beeps signals succe ssful rec overy . 5. Remo ve the CD or î¯ash drive and turn oî« the comp uter . 6. Res tart the computer . W orkstation security This section pro vides information about pr oviding syst em security through asset tr acking, password security, hard driv e locking, and chassis l ocks. Asset tracking Asset tracking f eature s provide asset tr acking data that can be managed using HP S ystems Insight Manager (HP SIM), HP Consol e Management Con troll er (CMC), or other sys tems-management applica tions. Seaml ess, automatic int egration between asset tr acking featur es and these products enabl es yo u to choose the management t ool that is best suited t o the environment and t o lev erage inv estments in existing t ools. HP also oî«ers sever al solutions for c ontrolling ac ces s to valuabl e components and in formation: â HP Pro tectT ools Embedded Securit y prev ents unauthorized ac cess t o data, checks system in tegrity, and authenticate s third-party users attempting syst em acce ss. â Security featur es such as Pr otectT ools and the Smar t Co ver Sensor (side acc ess panel sensor ) help prev ent unauthorized ac cess t o the data and to the int ernal components of the c omputer . â By disabling paral lel, serial, or USB ports, or by disabling remo vable-media boo t capability, you can pro tect valuabl e data assets. â Memory Change and Side acc ess panel sensor (Smart Co ver Sensor) al erts can be forwar ded to system management applications t o deliver pro active notiîÂÂcation of tampering with a c omputerâ s internal components. Pro tectT ools, the Smar t Co ver Sensor, and the side acc ess panel solenoid l ock (Hood Lock) are av ailable as options on sel ect systems. Deskt op management 33
Y ou can manage security settings as foll ows: â Locall y with Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility â Remot ely with HP CMS or HP S ystem Softw are Manager (SSM), which en able the secure, c onsistent deplo yment and contr ol of security settings from a simpl e command line utility The fol lowing C omputer Setup (F10) Utility fe atures l et you manage c omputer security . Feature Purpose Remov able Media Boot Con trol Prev ents booting from r emovable media driv es Serial, Paral lel, USB, or Infrar ed Interfac e Control Prev ents transfer o f data through the int egrated serial, paral lel, USB, or infrar ed interfac e Power -On Passwor d Prev ents use of the comput er until the passwor d is entered (ap plies to initial system startup and restarts) Ddministrat or Password Prev ents reconîÂÂguration of the comput er (through the Setup utility) un til the passwor d is entered Network Server Mode Provide s unique security features f or computers used as servers SA T A hard drive security HP comput ers include the HP DriveL ock facility for SA T A hard drive s to prev ent unauthorized ac cess t o data. WARNING! Enabling DriveL ock can render a SA T A hard drive permanentl y inacc essibl e if the master passwor d is lost or f orgo tten. No method exists to r ecov er the passwor d or acces s the data. DriveLock h as been implemented as an ex tension to C omputer Setup (F10) Utility functions. It is onl y availabl e when hard driv es that support the A T A securit y command set ar e detected. On HP c omputers, it is not av ailable when the SA T A emulation mode is RAID AHCI or RAID. DriveLock is f or HP customers f or whom data security is a paramount c oncern. For such cust omers, the cost of a har d drive and the los s of the data st ored on it is inconsequential when c ompared t o the damage that coul d resul t from un authorized acc ess to its c ontents. T o balance this l evel o f security with the need to addres s the issue of a for gott en password, the HP implementa tion of DriveLock empl oys a two-passw ord security scheme. One passwor d is intended t o be set and used by a syst em administrat or, while the other is typicall y set and used by the user . No "back door" can be used to unl ock the drive if both p asswords ar e lost. Ther efore, Driv eLock is most saf ely used when the data contained on the h ard drive is r eplicated on a corpor ate information sys tem or is regularl y back ed up. If both DriveL ock passwor ds are los t, the hard drive is r endered unusabl e. For users who do not îÂÂt the previo usly deîÂÂned cust omer proîÂÂle, this might not be acc eptabl e. For users who îÂÂt this proîÂÂle, it might be a tol erable risk, giv en the nature o f the data stor ed on the hard drive. DriveLock applications The most practical use o f DriveLock is in a c orporate envir onment. The system administr ator wo uld be res ponsible for conîÂÂguring the h ard drive, which inv olv es setting the DriveLock mast er passwor d and a temporary user pas sword. If yo u forget the user p assword or if the equipment is p assed on to another emplo yee, the master p assword can be used t o reset the user pas sword and reg ain acces s to the har d drive. HP rec ommends that corporat e system administr ators who enabl e DriveLock also establish a c orporate policy for setting and maintaining mast er passwor ds. This should be done t o prev ent a situation where an empl oyee 34 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
sets both DriveL ock passwor ds before l eaving the c ompany . In such a scenario, the hard driv e is unusable and requir es replac ement. Lik ewise, by not setting a mast er passwor d, system administr ators might îÂÂnd themselv es lock ed out o f a hard drive and un able to perform r outine checks f or unauthorized softwar e, other asset con trol functions, and support. For users with l ess stringent security r equirements, HP does no t recommend enabling Driv eLock. Users in this category incl ude personal users, or user s who do not maintain sensitiv e data on their hard driv es as a common pr actice. For these users, the po tential l oss of a har d drive resul ting from f orgetting both p asswords is much gre ater than the val ue of the data DriveL ock prot ects. Acc ess to C omputer Setup (F10) Utility and DriveL ock can be restrict ed through the administr ator passw ord. By specifying an administrat or passwor d and not giving it to users, syst em administrators can r estrict users from enabling Driv eLock. Using DriveLock When hard driv es that support the A T A security command set are detect ed, DriveLock appe ars under the Security menu in the Comput er Setup (F10) Utility menu. Y ou are pr esented with o ptions to set the mast er passwor d and to enabl e DriveLock. Y ou must pro vide a user passwor d to enable Driv eLock. Because the initial conîÂÂguration of DriveL ock is typically perf ormed by a system adminis trator, a mast er passwor d should be set îÂÂrst. HP encour ages system adminis trators t o set a master passw ord whether they plan t o enable DriveL ock or not. This give s the administrator the ability t o modify DriveLock settings if the drive is l ocked in the futur e. After the mas ter passwor d is set, the system adminis trator can enabl e DriveLock or l eave it disabl ed. If a lock ed har d drive is presen t, POST requir es a passwor d to unl ock the device. If a po wer-on pas sword is set and it matches the de viceâ s user password, POS T does not pr ompt the user to r e-enter the passwor d. Otherwise, the user is prompt ed to ent er a DriveLock passw ord. For a c old start, use the mast er or user password. F or a warm start, ent er the same password used t o unlock the drive during the pr eceding col d start. Users have two a ttempts to en ter a corr ect passwor d. During cold s tart, if neither attempt succ eeds, POST continues b ut the drive remains inac ces sible. During a warm-s tart or restart from Windows, if neither a ttempt succ eeds, POST hal ts and the user is instructed t o cycle pow er . Enabling DriveLock T o enable and set the Driv eLock user passw ord: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. As soon as you turn on the c omputer, r epeatedl y pres s the F10 k ey until you ent er Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er, then repeat edly pr ess F10 again to ac cess the utility . 3. Select Security > DriveL ock Security . 4. For e ach DriveLock -capabl e drive, select a driv e by pre ssing F10 to acc ept. 5. T o enabl e DriveLock for a speciîÂÂc driv e, select Enable DriveL ock NOTE: T o set the DriveLock mas ter passwor d, select Set DriveL ock Master Password . CAUTION: If you for get the DriveLock p assword, the driv e is unusable. 6. Enter a ne w user passwor d (1 to 32 charact ers long), and then pres s F10 to acc ept. Deskt op management 35
7. Enter the p assword ag ain in the Enter New Pas sword Ag ain îÂÂeld. If you for get this passwor d, the drive is render ed permanently disabl ed. 8. Select File > Sa ve Changes and Exit , and then press en ter to ac cept the chang es. After yo u press ent er , the comput er performs a col d start befor e invoking the DriveL ock function. When the comput er starts, you ar e prompt ed to enter the Driv eLock passwor d for each Driv eLock - capable driv e for which yo u have set a passw ord. Y ou have two attemp ts to ent er the password corr ectly . If the passwor d is not enter ed corr ectly, the comp uter attemp ts to start anyway . Howev er, the boot pr ocess most lik ely fails because data fr om a lock ed drive cannot be ac ces sed. In a single driv e comput er, if the drive has DriveLock en abled, the comp uter might not be abl e to boot t o the operating sys tem, and might try to boot fr om the network or from another s torage de vice (depending on the boo t ordering options ). Regardl ess o f the outcome o f the start attempts, the driv e- lock ed drive r emains inacc essible witho ut the DriveLock pas sword. In a two-drive comp uter that has a boo t drive and a data drive, yo u can apply the Driv eLock fea ture to the data drive onl y . In this case, the computer can al ways start, but the data driv e is acce ssible onl y when the DriveLock p assword is ent ered. When you s tart or restart the comput er, you must en ter DriveLock p asswords. F or example, if y ou boot to DOS and pr ess ctrl al t del , you must en ter the DriveLock pas sword bef ore the comp uter compl etes the next start cycl e. This restart -start behavior is consist ent with the DriveLock f eature . Pas sword security This comput er supports security password f eatur es, which can be established thro ugh the Computer Setup Utilities menu. This comput er supports two security passwor d featur es that are es tablished through the C omputer Setup Utilities menu: administra tor passwor d and power -on passwor d. When you establish onl y an administrat or passwor d, any user can acc ess all the inf ormation on the comput er exc ept Comput er Setup. When y ou establish onl y a power -on passwor d, the power -on password is r equired t o acces s Computer Setup and an y other inf ormation on the comput er . When you establish bo th passwords, onl y the administra tor passwor d will give yo u acce ss to Comp uter Setup. When both pas swords are set, the adminis trator pas sword can also be used in plac e of the power -on passwor d as an override t o log in to the c omputer . This is a useful f eature f or a network administrat or . If you f orget one or bo th passwords, y ou can cle ar all passwor ds by powering oî« the sys tem, opening the co ver, temporaril y remo ving the PSWD jumper, and booting onc e. This will erase the administr ator and power -on passwor ds. Y ou must r est ore the jumper to cr eate new p asswords. CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button with po wer remov ed will re set the BIOS settings to fact or y defaul ts. It may be useful to b ack up the BIOS settings or save them as cust om defaults be fore r esetting them in case they are needed l ater . Back up can be performed in Comp uter Setup or using the BiosConîÂÂgUtility tool availabl e from www .hp. com. See C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities on pag e 18 for information on backing up the BIOS settings. Establishing an administr ator password using C omputer Setup (F10) Utility Establishing an administr ator passwor d through C omputer Setup (F10) Utility pr events reconîÂÂguration of the comput er (through the use o f Comput er Setup (F10) Utility) until the passwor d is enter ed. T o establish an administr ator passw ord using Comp uter (F10) Setup menu: 36 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. As soon as the comp uter is turned on, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen, if neces sary . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er, and then press and hol d F10 again to ac cess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. Select Security > Set Up BIO S Administrator P assword and then fol low the on-scr een instructions. 4. Befor e exiting, select Main > Save Change s and Exit . Establishing a power-on passw ord using Computer Setup (F10) Utility Establishing a power -on passw ord thro ugh Computer Setup (F10) Utility pr events ac cess t o the comput er when power is c onnected, unle ss the passwor d is entered. When a po wer-on p assword is set, C omputer Setup (F10) Utility presents P asswor d Options in the Security menu. The passwor d options include Network Server Mode and Passw ord Pr ompt on Warm Boo t. When Network Server Mode is disabled, y ou must ent er the password when the c omputer is turned on, when the k ey icon appe ars on the monitor . When Passwor d Promp t on Warm Boo t is enabled, yo u must enter the passwor d. The passwor d must also be enter ed each time the comp uter is res tarted. When Network Server Mode is enabled, the p assword pr ompt is not pr esented during POS T, but an attached PS/2 k eyboar d remains lock ed until y ou enter the pow er-on pas sword. T o enable Netw ork Ser ver Mode, y ou must set a power -on passwor d under Security > Set Up BIOS Po wer-On Passw ord . This option enabl es the comput er to start without r equiring the power -on password, b ut the k eyboard and mo use are lock ed until you enter the pas sword. The k eyboar d LEDs rotat e constantl y when the comput er is in lock ed mode. T o establish a pow er-on pas sword thro ugh the Comput er Setup (F10) Utility menu: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. As soon as the comp uter is turned on, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen, if neces sary . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er and then press and hol d F10 again to ac cess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. Select Security > Set Up BIO S Power-On P assword and then fol low the onscr een instructions. 4. Befor e exiting, select Main > Save Change s and Exit . Entering a power-on passw ord T o enter a po wer-on pas sword: 1. Res tart the computer . 2. When the k ey icon appe ars on the monitor, enter the curr ent passwor d, and then pres s enter. T ype carefull y . For security reasons, the ch aracters you en ter do not appe ar on the screen. If you en ter the passwor d incorrectl y, a brok en k ey ic on appears. T ry again. After thr ee unsucces sful tries, you will ent er the F10 setup screen with re ad-only permission. (See the Setup Br owse Mode option under the Pow er-On op tions.) Deskt op management 37
Entering an administrat or password If an administrat or passwor d has been established on the comp uter, you wil l be prompt ed to ent er it each time you run C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . T o enter an adminis trator pas sword: 1. Res tart the computer . 2. As soon as the comp uter is turned on, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen, if neces sary . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er and press and hol d F10 again to ac cess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. When the k ey icon appe ars on the monitor, enter the adminis trator pas sword, and pr ess enter. T ype carefull y . For security reasons, the ch aracters you en ter do not appe ar on the screen. If you en ter the passwor d incorrectl y, a brok en k ey ic on appears. T ry again. After thr ee unsucces sful tries, you must re start the computer be fore y ou can continue. National keyboard delimiter characters Each k eyboar d meets country-speciîÂÂc requirements. The syn tax and ke ys you use for changing or del eting passwor ds depend on the k eyboard incl uded with the computer . Language Delimiter Language Delimiter Language Delimiter Arabic / Greek - Russian / Belgian = Hebrew . Slo vakian - BHCSY * - Hungarian - Spanish - Brazilian / Italian - Swedish/Finnish / Chinese / Japanese / Swiss - Czech - Kor ean / T aiwanese / Danish - Latin American - Thai / French ! Norwegian - Turkish . French Canadian é Polish - U.K. English / German - Portuguese - U.S. English / * Bosnia-Herzegovin a, Croatia, Slo venia, and Yug oslavia Clearing passw ords If you f orget the pas sword, yo u cannot acc ess the comput er . For instructions abo ut clearing pas swords, see ConîÂÂguring pas sword security and resetting CM OS on page 82 . 38 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
Chassis security Smart Cover Sensor ( optional) The optional Smart C over Sensor is a c ombination of har dware and softw are technol ogy that alerts you when the side panel of the c omputer is r emoved (pr ovided the sensor has been conîÂÂgured in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility). Three l evels of pr otection ar e availabl e *: Level Setting Description Level 0 Disabled Sensor * is disabled ( default). Level 1 Notify User When the comput er restarts, a message indicat es that the comput er has been o pened or the acce ss panel has been remov ed. Level 2 Adminis trator Pas sword When the comput er restarts, a message indicat es that the comput er has been opened or the acc ess panel has been remo ved. Y ou must ent er the administrator passwor d to continue. * Smart Cover Sensor settings ar e changed using Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . Setting the protection le vel T o set the Smart Cov er Sensor prot ection lev el: 1 . T urn on or res tart the computer . 2 . During startup, pre ss and hold the F10 k ey until y ou enter C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . Pres s enter to bypass the titl e screen, if nec essary . NOTE: If you do no t press the F10 k ey at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er, and then pr ess and hol d the F10 k ey again to ac cess C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3 . Select Security > Smart C over > Co ver Removal Sensor , and fol low the on-scr een instructions. 4 . Befor e exiting, select Main > Save Change s and Exit . Side access panel solenoid l ock The side acc ess panel sol enoid lock (av ailable onl y on speciîÂÂc workstations ) secures the side acc ess panel t o the chassis. The sol enoid is contr olled b y a local or remo te signal. T o lock the sol enoid, set a passwor d for the solenoid l ock in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . T o unlock the solenoid, r emove the sol enoid lock pas sword in Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . The solenoid l ock F ailSafe Ke y (availabl e from HP) is is a de vice for manual ly disabling the sol enoid lock. Y ou will need the F ailSafe K ey in case of a f orgott en passwor d, power los s, or computer mal function. Cable lock ( optional) T o prev ent theft, you can attach a k ey ed cable lock t o the rear ch assis panel. This cable l ock attaches to the chassis and secur es it to the work ar ea. F aul t notiîÂÂcation and reco very F ault notiîÂÂcation and rec overy fe atures c ombine innovative h ardwar e and software t echnology to pr event the los s of critical data and minimize unplanned do wntime. Deskt op management 39
If the comput er is connected t o a network that is managed b y HP CMS, the computer sends a f ault no tice to the network management applica tion. With HP CMS, you can also remo tel y schedule diagnostics t o run on managed PCs and cr eate a summary report of f ailed te sts. ECC faul t prediction When the comput er encount ers an exce ssive number of err or checking and correcting (E CC) memory errors, it displays a l ocal alert messag e. This message con tains information about the err ant DIMM, enabling you t o tak e action befor e you experience nonc orrectabl e memor y errors. E CC DIMMs ar e standard on this c omputer . Thermal sensors Sever al thermal sensors in the HP workstation r egulate comp uter fans t o maintain an accep table, eî°cient chassis t emperature. Progr ammable power button (Windows only) With ACPI (Adv anced ConîÂÂguration and Pow er Interfac e) enabled, y ou can customiz e the behavior of the power butt on so that rather than po wering down, the workstation en ters sleep mode (l ow power stat e), or hibernate mode ( very low po wer state ). This lets yo u go to standby witho ut closing applications, and then return t o the same operational stat e without any data l oss. Changing the power button conîÂÂguration (Windo ws only) Windows 7 or Windows 10 1. Select S tart , and then select Con trol Panel > System and Security > P ower Options . 2. On the le ft side of the screen, sel ect Choose What the Power Buttons Do. 3. Select the de sired options. If you choose Sl eep or Hibernate, y ou can pres s the power button t o initiate standb y, and then press it again to exit standb y and return to y our work. T o compl etel y turn oî« the workstation, sel ect Start > Shut Down. CAUTION: T o reduce the risk o f data loss, do no t use the power button t o turn oî« the comput er unless the system is no t unresponsiv e. NOTE: If the comput er is unres ponsive, pres s and hold the power b utton for fo ur seconds to c ompletel y turn oî« power t o the computer . Windows 8.1 1. Point t o the upper -right or low er-right c orner of the Start scr een to display the ch arms. 2. In the Sear ch îÂÂeld, type control. 3 . On the le ft side of the screen sel ect Control P anel , and then select System and Security > P ower Options . 4 . In Po wer Options Pr operties, select Choose What the Po wer Button Does . 5 . Select the de sired options. 40 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
3 C omponent replacement in formation and guidelines This chapt er provides w arnings, cautions, information, and guidelines f or remov al and replacemen t proc edures. It does no t document the step-by -step proc edures. IMPORT ANT : Removal and replacemen t procedures are now av ailable in videos on the HP website. Go to the HP Cust omer Self R epair Services Media Library at http:// www.hp .c om/go/ sml . This chapt er includes these t opics: T opics Warnings and cautions on page 42 Service considera tions on page 42 Product r ecycling on page 44 Component r eplacement guidelines on page 44 41
W arnings and cautions WARNING! These symbols on any surfac e or area o f the equipment indicate the fol lowing: Pre sence of a ho t surface or hot c omponent. If this surface is c ontacted, the pot ential for injury exists. T o reduc e the risk of injury from a hot c omponent, let the surfac e cool befor e you t ouch it. Pre sence of an el ectric shock hazard. T o reduce the risk of injury fr om electric shock, do not open an y enclosed ar ea mark ed with this symbol. T o reduc e the risk of personal injury, product must al ways be lifted b y two persons. WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of electric shock or damage t o your equipment: â Do not disabl e the power cor d grounding pl ug. The grounding pl ug is an important safety fe ature. â Plug the po wer cor d in a grounded ( earthed) outlet that is e asily ac cessibl e at all times. â Disconnect pow er from the equipment by unpl ugging the power c ord from the el ectrical outlet. WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of serious injury, read the Saf ety & Comfort Guide . It describes pr oper comput er setup, posture, he alth, and work h abits for comput er users, and provides important el ectrical and mechanical safety inf ormation. This guide is locat ed at http://www .hp .com/er go . WARNING! Do not use the fr ont bezel as a handl e or lifting point when lifting or moving the comput er . Lifting the comput er from the fron t bezel, or lifting it incorrectl y, might cause the comp uter to f all, causing possibl e injury to you and damage t o the computer . T o properl y and safel y lift the computer, lift fr om the bottom o f the comput er . CAUTION: Static el ectricity can damage the electronic c omponents of the comp uter . T o prev ent damage to the comput er, observe the fol lowing El ectrostatic Disch arge (ESD) pr ecautions while servicing the comput er: â Befor e you begin, dischar ge yoursel f of static el ectricity by brieî¯y touching a gr ounded metal object. â Work on a s tatic- free mat. â We ar a static strap t o make sur e that any ac cumulated el ectrostatic char ge is discharged fr om your body t o the ground. â Cre ate a common gr ound for the equipment y ou are working on b y connecting the static -fr ee mat, static strap, and peripher al units to that piec e of equipment. NOTE: HP acc essories are f or use in HP Works tation products. They hav e been extensiv ely te sted for reliability and ar e manufactured t o high quality standards. Service consider ations T ools and software requirements The tools nec essary for comp uter component r emoval and instal lation are: â T orx T -15 driver â Flat blade and cr oss-tip scr ewdrivers â Diagnostics softwar e 42 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Electr ostatic discharge (ESD) information Generating static Diî«erent activities generat e diî«erent amounts of static el ectricity through electr ostatic discharge (ESD ). Static el ectricity increases as humidity decre ases. CAUTION: Static electricity in the amoun t of 700 volts migh t degrade a product. Event Relative humidity 55% 40% 10% Walking acr oss carpet Walking acr oss vinyl î¯oor Motions of bench work er 7,500 V 3,000 V 400V 15,000 V 5,000 V 800 V 35,000 V 12,000 V 6,000 V Removing bubbl e pack from PCB Packing PCBs in f oam-lined box 7,000 V 5,000 V 20,000 V 11,000 V 26,500 V 21,000 V Preventing ESD equipment damage Many electr onic components are sensitiv e to ESD. Cir cuitry design and structure determine the degr ee of sensitivity . The fol lowing packaging and gr ounding precautions are nec essary to pre vent damage to electr onic components and acc essories: â T ransport products in static -safe c ontainers such as tubes, bags, or boxe s, to avoid hand con tact. â Pro tect electr ostatic parts and assemblies with nonconductive or ap proved c ontainers or packaging. â Keep el ectrostatic -sensitive parts in their containers until they arriv e at static- free stations. â Place it ems on a grounded surfac e before remo ving them from containers. â Befor e handling or touching a sensitive c omponent or assembly, gr ound yourself b y touching a grounded metal object. â Avoid c ontact with pins, leads, or cir cuitry . â Place r eusable electr ostatic -sensitive parts from assemblies in pr otective pack aging or nonconductive f oam. Personal grounding methods and equipment Use the fol lowing items t o help preven t ESD damage: â Wrist straps â These ar e î¯exible straps with a maximum of one megohm ñ 10% r esistance in the ground c ords. T o provide a pro per ground, wear the str ap against bare skin. The gr ound cord mus t be connected and îÂÂt snugl y into the banan a plug connector on the gr ounding mat or comput er . â Heel straps, toe s traps, and boot straps â These can be used a t standing computers and ar e compatibl e with most types of shoes or boots. On c onductive î¯oors or dissipative î¯oor mats, use them on both feet with a maximum o f one megohm ñ 10% resistanc e between the operator and ground. Static shielding materials Static shiel ding materials provide the f ollo wing levels of pr otection. Method Antistatic plastic Carbon-loaded plas tic Metalized laminat e Vol tage 1,500 V 7,500 V 15,000 V Grounding the work area to preven t static damage â Cov er the work surface with appr oved static -dissipative material. Use a wris t strap connected t o the work surface, and pr operly grounded t ools and equipment. â Use static -dissipative mats, f oot straps, or air ionizers to giv e added protection. â Disconnect power and inp ut signals before inserting and removing c onnectors or test equipment. â Use îÂÂxtures made of static -safe mat erials when îÂÂxtures must directl y contact dissipa tive surfaces. Service consider ations 43
â Handle el ectrostatic -sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB laminate . Handle them only in sta tic-fr ee work are as. â Keep work ar ea free of c onductive materials, such as plastic assembl y aids and Styro foam. â Use îÂÂeld service tools (such as cutt ers, screwdriv ers, and vacuums) that are non- conductive . Recommended ESD prevention materials and equipment â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, apr ons, and sleeve prot ectors â Non-conductive bins and o ther assembly or soldering aids â Non-conductive f oam â Non-conductive tabl etop comp uters with a ground c ord of one megohm ñ 10% resistanc e â Static -dissipative tabl e or î¯oor mats with a hard-tie t o ground â Field service kits â Static awar eness labels â Wrist str aps and footwear str aps providing one megohm ñ 10% resis tance â Material -handling packages â Non-conductive plas tic bags â Non-conductive plas tic tubes â Non-conductive t ote box es â Opaque shielding bags â T ransparen t metallized shielding bags â T ransparen t shielding tubes Product recycling HP encour ages customers t o recycl e used electronic h ardwar e, HP original print cartridges, and rechar geabl e batteries. For inf ormation about recycling HP c omponents or products, see http:// www .hp. com/go /r ecycle . C omponent replacement guidelines This section pro vides information and guidelines f or remov al and replacemen t procedur es. It does not document the st ep-by-step pr ocedur es. IMPORT ANT : Removal and replacemen t procedures are now av ailable in videos on the HP website. Go to the HP Cust omer Self R epair Services Media Library at http:// www.hp .c om/go/ sml . In Media Selection, choose the Deskt ops & Workstations pr oduct category and the Personal Work stations product famil y, then choose your pla tform This chapt er provides guideline s for remo val and replac ement proc edures. Battery on page 45 Cable managemen t on page 45 CPU (proc essor) and CP U heatsink on page 46 Expansion slo ts on page 47 Hard drive s and optical disc drives on page 51 Memory on page 53 Power sup ply speciîÂÂcations on page 56 Syst em board on page 57 44 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Battery The battery that c omes with the comput er provides po wer to the r eal- time clock and has a minimum lifetime of about thr ee years. Observe the f ollo wing warning and caution when replacing the ba ttery . WARNING! HP Z Series Work stations use lithium batteries. Ther e is a risk of îÂÂre and chemical burn if the battery is handl ed improperl y . Do not disassemble, crush, p uncture, short external c ontacts, dispose of in wat er or îÂÂre, or expose battery to temper atures higher than 60ðC (140ðF). CAUTION: Before r emoving the batt er y, back up the CMOS settings in case the y are los t when the battery is remo ved. Use Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility to back up the settings. NO TE: Do not dispose of ba tteries, battery packs, and ac cumulators with gener al household w aste. Cable management Pro per routing of the in ternal cable s is critical to the operation o f the workstation. F ollo w good cable management pr actices when remo ving and installing c omponents. â Handle cabl es with care t o avoid damage. â Appl y only the tension r equired t o seat or unseat cabl es during insertion or remov al from the connect or . â When possibl e, handle cabl es by the connect or or pull -strap . â Rout e cables in such a w ay that they cannot be caught or sn agged by parts being remo ved or replac ed. â Keep cabl es away fr om direct con tact with major heat sourc es, such as the heatsink. (Some air î¯ow guides hav e a cable guide that l ets you ro ute cable s safel y around the heatsink.) â Do not jam cabl es on top o f expansion cards or DIMMs. Circuit car ds and DIMMs are not de signed to tak e exc essive pr essure . â Keep cabl es cle ar of movabl e or ro tating parts (such as the power suppl y and drive cage) t o preven t them from being cut or crimped when the c omponent is low ered into its normal position. â In all cases, av oid bending or twisting the cables. Do no t bend any cable sharpl y . A sharp bend can break the internal wir es. â Never bend a SA T A data cabl e tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius. â Never cr ease a SA T A data cable. â Do not r ely on componen ts like the driv e cage, power suppl y, or comput er cov er to push cabl es down into the chas sis. Alw ays position the cables t o lay properl y by themsel ves or in the cabl e guides and chassis ar eas designed for cabl e routing . When remo ving the power suppl y power cable fr om the connector on the sys tem board, al ways f ollo w these steps: 1. Squeeze on the t op of the retaining l atch attached to the cabl e end of the connect or . 2. Gras p the cable end of the c onnector and pull it s traight out. CAUTION: Alw ays pull the c onnector â NEVER pull on the cabl e. Pulling on the cabl e coul d damage the cable and r esult in a f ailed pow er supply . Component r eplacement guidelines 45
CPU (pr ocessor ) and CPU heatsink CAUTION: Observe the foll owing cautions when remo ving or replacing the heatsink. â When remo ving the heatsink, loosen al l screws a littl e at a time to mak e sure the CPU r emains lev el. Do not full y loosen one scr ew, and then move on t o the next. â After y ou remo ve the CPU heatsink fr om the chassis, use al cohol and a soft cl oth to cl ean the thermal compound r esidue from the CP U and the heatsink, all owing the alc ohol on the CPU and CPU heatsink t o dry compl etel y . â If you ar e reusing the original he atsink, apply thermal c ompound to the c enter of the CPU t op surface. â If you ar e using a new CPU heatsink, do no t apply thermal c ompound to the CPU because the ne w heatsink alre ady has thermal compound applied t o the heatsink surface . Instead, r emove the thermal c ompound pro tective liner fr om the bottom of the ne w heatsink. â Do not ov ertighten the heatsink scr ews. Overtightening can s trip the threads in the chas sis. â Do not ful ly tight en one screw and then mov e on to the next. Inst ead, tighten al l screws a littl e at a time, ensuring that the CPU r emains lev el. CAUTION: Observe the foll owing cautions when remo ving or replacing the CPU . â If you ar e installing a sec ond CPU, it must be of the same type as the îÂÂrst CPU . â Internal c omponents might be power ed even when the c omputer is oî«. T o prevent damage, disc onnect the comput er power cor d befor e you r emove or instal l a component. â The CPU sock et contacts and p ads are extremel y fragil e. Do not to uch the CPU sock et contacts or the gol d pads underneath the CP U. Use extr eme care and handl e the CPU onl y by the edges. â The CPU sock et contacts ar e delicate and bend easil y . T o avoid bending the contacts, use ex treme care when installing the CP U in the socket. â Installing a pr oces sor incorrectl y can damage the system bo ard. Contact an HP authoriz ed resel ler or service pro vider to instal l the proces sor . If you plan to ins tall the proc essor yo urself, view the entir e remov e and replac e video befor e you begin. â F ailure t o foll ow the comp uter prepar ation instructions can resul t in an impro perly instal led proc essor, causing extensiv e comput er damage. 46 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Expansion slo ts This section identiîÂÂes and describes comp uter expansion car d slots, and pr esents card conîÂÂguration information. Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to le arn which graphics cards ar e supported in the works tation, how much memory each graphics car d includes, and graphics car d power requir ements. Card conîÂÂguration restrictions f or power supplies CAUTION: T o preven t damage, the over all power c onsumption of the comp uter (including I/ O cards, CP U, and memory) must not ex ceed the maximum r ating of the comput er power suppl y . For power suppl y information, see P ower suppl y speciîÂÂcations on page 56 . Choosing an expansion card slo t Whenever pos sible, use the fol lowing tips t o help you sel ect the proper sl ot for an exp ansion card: â Use the PCIe x16 sl ot for the primary graphics car d. If you do not use this sl ot for the gr aphics card, onl y cards certiîÂÂed as A fter Mark et Options are support ed. â Install a sec ond graphics card in the o ther PCIe x16 slot. â Install a car d in a slo t that most closel y matches its in terface t echnology: ⦠Install a PCIe Gen1 x16 or a PCIe Gen1 x8 car d in the PCIe Gen3 x16 slo t. ⦠Install a PCIe Gen1 x4 car d in the PCIe Gen2 x4 slo t. ⦠Install a PCIe Gen1 x1 car d in the PCIe Gen2 x1 slo t. ⦠Install a PCI car d in the PCI slo t. ⦠Whenever pos sible, instal l a PCIe x1 card in an x1 slo t. â Lea ve as much spac e as possible between car ds (especial ly gr aphics cards) to al low he at to dissipa te more eî°ciently. â For bes t operational eî°ciency, sel ect a slot tha t: ⦠El ectrically mat ches the number of PCIe car d lanes (for ex ample, x1 in an x1 sl ot). ⦠Has more lane s electricall y . ⦠Has few er lanes, but is closer t o your needs. F or example, plac e an x16 card in an x4 sl ot, and an x4 card in a an x1 sl ot. â An x1 connect or supports an x1 card only . While an x1 card can be inserted int o a larger sl ot, this may limit pot ential future card pl acement. Component r eplacement guidelines 47
SFF works tation slot identiîÂÂcation and description Maximum power used b y all slo ts must not ex ceed total sys tem power and is subject t o conîÂÂguration limitations. Slot Type Mechanical compatibility Electrical compatibility 4 PCIe3 x16 x16 x16 3 PCIe3 x1 x1 x1 2 PCIe3 x1 x1 x1 1 PCIe3 x16(4) x16 x4 NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe3 lanes supported. 48 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
SFF works tation installation sequence rec ommendations Load order Card description Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Native M.2 1 PCIe graphic card Only 2 Second PCIe graphic card Only 3 Internal PCIe stor age Only 4 Second internal PCIe st orage Only 5 Thunderbolt card Onl y 6 PCIe NIC card 1st 2nd 3rd 7 Serial port (cable) 3rd 2nd 1st 8 HP USB 3.1 T ype- C PCI-E x1 card 2nd 1st 3rd 9 PCIe parall el port card 1st 2nd 3rd 10 1394b FireWir e PCIe Card 1st 2nd 3rd NOTE: Slot sequenc ed from the re ar I/O aperture t o the board edge. Component r eplacement guidelines 49
T ower workstation sl ot identiîÂÂcation and description Maximum power used b y all slo ts must not ex ceed total sys tem power and is subject t o conîÂÂguration limitations. Slot Type Mechanical compatibility Electrical c ompatibility 5 PCIe3x1 x1 x1 4 PCIe3x16 x16 x16 3 PCIe3x4 x4 x4 2 PCIe3x16(4) x16 x4 1 PCI ( optional) PCI PCI NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe3 lanes supported. Slo t two is the primary graphics slot; sl ot f our is the secondary graphics sl ot. 50 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
T ower workstation instal lation sequence recommendations Load order Card description Slot 1 (x1) Slot 2 (x16) Slot 3 (x4) Slot 4 (x16[x4]) Slot 5 (PCI) Native M. 2 (x4) 1 PCIe graphic card Only 2 Second PCIe graphic car d Onl y 3 Internal PCIe s torage Only 4 Second int ernal PCIe storage Only 5 Thunderbolt car d 2nd 1st 6 PCIe NIC card 1st 3rd 2nd 7 PCIe NIC card â 10G Only 8 Serial port (cabl e) 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 9 eSA T A kit (cable ) 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 10 PCIe parall el port card 1st 3rd 2nd 11 1394b FireWire PCIe car d 1st 3rd 2nd NOTE: Slot sequenc ed from the re ar I/O aperture t o the board edge. Hard drives and optical disc drives Handling hard drives CAUTION: T ake pr oper precautions when handling h ard drives t o preven t loss o f work and damage to the comput er or drive. â Do not r emove har d drives from the ship ping package for s torage. K eep hard driv es in their prot ective packaging until the y are mount ed in the computer . â Al ways shut down the oper ating system, turn oî« the power, and unpl ug the power cor d. Never r emove a drive whil e the comput er is on or in standby mode. â Befor e handling a drive, mak e sure y ou discharge s tatic electricity . While handling a drive, a void touching the connect or . â Handle a driv e carefull y . Do not drop it fr om any height. â T o prev ent possibl e ESD damage when the drive is install ed, connect the driv e power cable bef ore connecting the data cabl e. This discharg es accumulat ed static electricity thr ough the drive power cabl e to the c omputer chassis. â Do not use ex cessiv e forc e when inserting a drive. â Av oid exposing a hard drive t o liquids, temperatur e extremes, or pr oducts that have magnetic îÂÂelds such as monitors or spe akers. â If you mus t mail a drive, use a bubbl e-pack mailer or other pr otectiv e packaging and label the packag e âÂÂFragil e: Handle With Car e.â Component r eplacement guidelines 51
Remov al and replacement tips â T o verify the type, size, and capacity of the st orage devic es install ed in the comput er, run Computer Setup (F10) Utility . â Adding a new drive ma y require tha t you mak e new connections fr om the drive to the sys tem board. Not e that: ⦠The primary Serial A T A (SA T A) hard driv e must be connected t o the dark blue primary SA T A connect or on the system boar d labeled SA T A0. ⦠Connect a sec ondary hard drive t o SA T A1. ⦠Connect SA T A optical driv es to the black SA T A2 connect or . ⦠Connect an op tional eSA T A adapter cable t o the black ESA T A connector SA T A3 on the system boar d. (T ower onl y) ⦠Connect a media car d reader USB cabl e to the USB connect or on the system boar d labeled MEDIA. If the media card r eader has a 1394 port, connect the 1394 cabl e to the 1394 PCI card. Drive instal lation and cabling scenarios This section presen ts cabling guidelines for the most c ommon maximum storage conîÂÂgurations. If y ou add or remo ve drives, HP r ecommends you f oll ow these guidelines for highes t drive performance and eî°cient cabl e routing . SFF workstationsâÂÂS A T A cable connection guidelines ConîÂÂguration / PCA SA T A connector SA T A 0 SA T A 1 SA T A 2 SA T A 3 HDD x1 ODD x1 1st HDD 1st ODD HDD x2 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD HDD x3 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD 3rd HDD T ower workstationsâÂÂS A T A cable connection guidelines ConîÂÂguration / PCA SA T A connector SA T A 0 SA T A 1 S A T A 2 SA T A 3 HDD x1 ODD x1 1st HDD 1st ODD e-SA T A HDD x1 ODD x2 1st HDD 1st ODD 2nd ODD HDD x2 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD e-SA T A HDD x2 ODD x2 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD 2nd ODD HDD x3 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD 3rd HDD 52 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Memory Supported DIMM conîÂÂgurations NO TE: Mirroring and DIMM sparing ar e not supported. Platform ConîÂÂguration SFF â Four DIMM sl ots â Unbuî«ered EC C/nEC C DIMMS only â Maximum capacity: 64 GB T ower â Four DIMM sl ots â Unbuî«ered EC C/nEC C DIMMS only â Maximum capacity: 64 GB BIOS errors and w arnings The BIOS genera tes warnings/ errors on in valid memory conîÂÂgurations: â If the BIOS can îÂÂnd a valid memory conîÂÂguration by disabling pl ugged-in memory, it does so and reports a warning during PO ST . the workstation can s till be started. The w arning will indicate the location o f the failed DIMM on the sys tem board. â If there is no w ay for the BIOS t o obtain a valid memory conîÂÂguration by disabling plug ged-in memory, the BIOS hal ts with a diagnostics 2006 code f or memory error (îÂÂve beeps and blinks). DIMM instal lation guidelines â Install onl y HP-appr oved DDR3 DIMMs CAUTION: HP ships only DIMMs that ar e electrical ly and thermall y compa tible with this works tation. Because third-party DIMMs might not be el ectricall y or thermall y compatibl e, they are no t supported by HP . â Install onl y HP-appr oved DDR3 DIMMs. See h ttp://www .hp. com/go / quickspecs to îÂÂnd DIMMs that ar e compatibl e with the worksta tion. â Do not int ermix DIMMs of diî«erent technol ogies. EC C Unbuî«ered DIMMs (UDIMMs), Regist ered DIMMs (RDIMMs), and Load R educed DIMMs (LRDIMMs) ar e supported on your w orkstations. Supported DIMM conîÂÂgurations on page 53 speciîÂÂes which technol ogies are sup ported on each platform. CAUTION: DIMMs and their sockets ar e k eyed for pr oper install ation. T o preven t socket or DIMM damag e, align these guides pr operly when instal ling DIMMs. Component r eplacement guidelines 53
SFF works tation DIMM installation order Install DIMMs in this or der . NOTE: If you ins tall DIMMs of diî«erent size s, load them in or der of size, starting with lar gest and îÂÂnishing with the small est (lar gest in DIMM 1, small est in last l oaded DIMM). 54 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
T ower workstation DIMM instal lation order Install DIMMs in this or der . NO TE: If you instal l DIMMs of diî«erent sizes, l oad them in order of siz e, starting with large st and îÂÂnishing with the small est (lar gest in DIMM 1, small est in last l oaded DIMM). Component r eplacement guidelines 55
Po wer supply Po wer supply speciîÂÂcations All po wer supplies hav e these speciîÂÂcations: â Wide-ranging, active P ower F actor C orrection (PFC) â ENERG Y ST ARî qualiîÂÂed â FEMP Standb y Power c ompliant @115V (<1W in S5 â Power Oî«) â Surge t oleran t (withstands power sur ges up to 2000V) SFF T ower SFF T ower Power sup ply 240 W 92% eî°cient 400 W 92% eî°cient 200 W 85% eî°cient 280 W 90% eî°cient Operating vol tage range 90âÂÂ264 VA C 90âÂÂ264 VA C 90âÂÂ264 VA C 90âÂÂ264 VA C Rated vol tage range 100âÂÂ240 VA C 100âÂÂ240 VA C 100âÂÂ240 VAC 100âÂÂ240 VA C Rated line fr equency 50âÂÂ60 Hz 50âÂÂ60 Hz 50âÂÂ60 Hz 50âÂÂ60 Hz Operating line frequency rang e 47âÂÂ63 Hz 47âÂÂ66 Hz 47âÂÂ63 Hz 47âÂÂ63 Hz Rated input curr ent 4A @100âÂÂ240 VA C 5.2A @ 100âÂÂ240 VA C 3A @100âÂÂ240 VA C 3.6A @ 100âÂÂ240 VA C Heat dissipation, typical (conîÂÂguration and software dependent) 423.5 btu/hr (106.8 k cal /hr) 782.6 btu/hr (197.4 k cal /hr) 423.5 btu/hr (106.8 k cal /hr) 782.6 btu/hr (197.4 k cal /hr) Heat dissipation, maximum (conîÂÂguration and software dependent) 645.79 btu/hr (162.87 k cal /hr) 996.16 btu/hr (251.23 k cal /hr) 645.79 btu/hr (162.87 k cal /hr) 996.16 btu/hr (251.23 k cal /hr) Power sup ply fan All fans are variable speed One fan, 70mm x 25mm One fan, 80mm x 25mm One fan, 70mm x 25mm One fan, 80mm x 25mm Built -in Self T est LED No Y es No No Power c onsumption in sleep mode <5 W <5 W <5 W <5 W IMPORT ANT : If you ins tall a discret e graphics card in the unit, y ou must use the 400 W power suppl y . The P6 connect or on this power suppl y must be inserted into the gr aphics card. 56 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Po wer consumption and heat dissipation Pow er consumption and hea t dissipation speciîÂÂcations are av ailable f or multipl e conîÂÂgurations. T o review availabl e speciîÂÂcations, go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quickspecs . T o re ach zero pow er consumption, unpl ug the workstation fr om the power outl et or use a power strip with an on/oî« switch. F or additional information about po wer-sa ving featur es, see the operating syst em installation instructions. This product is in c ompliance with U .S. Executive Or der 13221. Resetting the power supply If an overl oad triggers the pow er supply ov erload pr otection, pow er is immediatel y disconnected. T o reset the po wer supply: 1. Disconnect the po wer cord fr om the workstation. 2. Determine wha t caused the overl oad and îÂÂx the probl em. For troubl eshooting inf ormation, see Diagnostics and tro ubleshoo ting on page 60 . 3. Rec onnect the power cor d and restart the work station. When you turn oî« the w orkstation thro ugh the operating syst em, power consump tion falls bel ow what is consider ed low pow er consumption but doe s not reach z ero . This low pow er consumption f eature ex tends the life o f the power suppl y . System board If you r eplace the syst em board: â Mak e a note o f the cable connections be fore disc onnecting them from the system bo ard. â Fol low good cabl e management practic es. See Cable manag ement on page 45 . The fol lowing tabl es show system cabling f or the workstations. Component r eplacement guidelines 57
System cabling SFF workstation sys tem cabling See Syst em board c omponents on page 5 to det ermine the location of sys tem board c onnectors. Cable T o Cable designator on system bo ard PSU cable PCA (Main power ) P1 (White) PSU cable PCA (PWR CO MM) P2 (White) PSU cable PCA (CPU pow er) P3 (White) SA T A power cable PCA P160 (Black) SA T A power cable First ODD P12 (Black) SA T A power cable Other drive P13 (Black) SA T A power cable SSD P15 (Black) SA T A power cable First HDD P16 (Black) Speak er PCA P6 (White) Cool er fan cable PCA P8 (White) Syst em fan cable PCA P11 (Brown) Front audio cabl e PCA P23 (Blue) LED/P ower button cabl e PCA P5 (Black) Front USB 2.0 cabl e-1 PCA P24 ( Y ell ow) Front USB 3.0 cabl e-2 PCA P26 (Blue) Serial cable PCA P52 (Black) Chassis sol enoid lock PCA P124 (Black) Hood sensor PCA P125 (White) SA T A cable First HDD SA T A0 (Blue) SA T A cable Second HDD SA T A1 (Black) SA T A cable First ODD SA T A2 (Black) SA T A cable Third HDD SA T A3 (Black) 58 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
T ower workstation sys tem cabling See Syst em board c omponents on page 11 to det ermine the location of sys tem board c onnectors. Cable T o Cable designator on system bo ard PSU cable PCA (Main Power ) P1 (White) PSU cable PCA (PWR CO MM) P2 (White) SA T A power cable PCA (CPU Pow er) P3 (Whit e) SA T A power cable First hard drive (Bay 4) P15 (Black) SA T A power cable Second hard driv e (Bay 5) P16 (Black) SA T A power cable Third hard driv e (Bay 6) P17 (Bl ack) SA T A power cable First optical drive (Bay 3) P12 (Black) SA T A power cable Other drive (Bay 2) P13 (Black) PSU cable Second op tical drive (Bay 1) P14 (Black) PSU cable First graphics card P4 (Black) Speak er PCA P6 (White) Cool er fan cable PCA P8 (Whit e) Syst em fan cable PCA P11 (Br own) Front audio cabl e PCA P23 (Blue) Front LED /Pow er button cable PCA P7 (B lack) Front USB 2.0 cabl e PCA P24(Y ellow) Front USB 3.0 cabl e PCA P26 (Bl ue) Serial cable ( optional) PCA P52 (Black) Hood sensor PCA P125 (White) Chassis sol enoid lock PCA P124 (Black) SA T A cable First HDD SA T A0 (Blue) SA T A cable Second HDD SA T A1 (Black) SA T A cable FIrst ODD SA T A2 (Black) SA T A cable Third HDD SA T A3 (Black) eSA T A brack et cable (op tional) First external S A T A devic e SA T A3 (Black) SA T A power cable SA T A device P160 (Black) Component r eplacement guidelines 59
4 Diagnostics and tr ouble shooting This chapt er describes the tools av ailable for diagnosing and tr ouble shooting system is sues. T opics Calling support on page 60 Locating ID labels on page 61 Locating warr anty information on page 61 Diagnosis guidelines on page 61 T rouble shooting checklist on pag e 62 HP troubl eshooting reso urces and t ools on page 63 T rouble shooting scenarios and solutions on p age 66 Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 73 Interpreting sys tem validation diagnostic fr ont panel LEDs and audible code s on page 80 Cal ling suppor t At time s you might enco unter an issue tha t requires sup port. Before yo u call support, do the fol lowing: â Have the work station re adily acc essibl e. â Write do wn the workstation serial numbers, product numbers, model name s, and model numbers and have them in fr ont of yo u. â Not e any applicable err or messages. â Not e any add-on options. â Not e the operating syst em. â Not e any third-party hardw are or softwar e. â Not e the details of any blinking LEDs on the fron t of the workstation (t ower and deskt op conîÂÂgurations) or on the side of the work station (all -in-one conîÂÂgurations). â Not e the applications you wer e using when you enc ounter ed the problem. NOTE: When calling in f or service or support, you might be ask ed for the pr oduct number (exampl e: PS988A V) of the workstation. If the w orkstation has a pr oduct number, it is generall y locat ed next to the 10- or 12-digit serial number of the works tation. NOTE: On most models, the serial number and product number l abels can be found on the to p or side panel and at the re ar of the worksta tion (tower and desk top conîÂÂgurations) or on a pul l-out car d on the side of the display ( all -in-one conîÂÂgurations). 60 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
For a listing o f all worl dwide support phone numbers, go to http:// ww w .hp .com/sup port and select your region. Under C ontact HP , select Al l HP Contacts . F ollo w the instructions to loca te the appro priate phone number . Locating ID labels T o assist in tr oubleshoo ting, identiîÂÂcation labels are av ailable on each w orkstation. â All w orkstations hav e a serial number (unique for each w orkstation) and product number . Hav e these numbers availabl e when you c ontact support. â The CertiîÂÂcate of Authentica tion (CO A) is used for Windows 7-pr einstall ed systems onl y . â A service label shows the b uild ID and Fe ature Byte strings, which ar e needed for syst em board replac ement. NO TE: Y our works tation may look slightl y diî«erent from the il lustra tion in this section. Locating w arran ty information T o locat e warranty inf ormation, go to http:// www .hp. com/support/w arranty-look uptool . T o locat e an existing Care P ack, go to http:// www.hp .c om/go /lookupt ool . T o extend a s tandard product w arranty, go to h ttp://www .hp. com/hps/ carepack . HP Car e Pack Services oî«er upgraded service l evels t o extend and expand a standar d product warr anty . Diagnosis guidelines If you enc ounter a pr oblem with the c omputer, monitor, or so ftware, the fol lowing sections pr ovide a list o f general sugg estions that help y ou isolate and f ocus on the problem be fore taking further action. Diagnosis at startup â V erif y that the c omputer and monitor ar e plugged in to a working electrical o utlet. â Remov e all CDs, or USB drive k eys fr om your syst em befor e turning it on. Locating ID labels 61
â V erif y that the c omputer is turned on and the blue po wer light is blue (normal oper ation) and not red (err or state ). â If you h ave install ed an operating sys tem other than the f actory-install ed operating syst em, check to be sure that it is sup ported on your syst em, go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs . â V erif y that the monit or is turned on and the green monitor light is on. No te that no t all monitors are equipped with LED lights to indica te their functionality . â T urn up the brightness and c ontrast c ontrols of the monit or if the monitor is dim. Diagnosis during operation â Look for blinking LEDs on the side o f the comput er . The blinking lights are error c odes that will hel p you diagnose the probl em. Refer t o the Interpreting sys tem validation diagnostic fr ont panel LEDs and audible c odes on page 80 section of this document f or information on int erpreting diagnostic lights and audible c odes. â Check all cabl es for l oose or incorrect c onnections. â Wak e the c omputer by pr essing any k ey on the k eyboar d or the power butt on. If the system remains in suspend mode, shut down the syst em by pr essing and holding the pow er button for at l east f our seconds, then pr ess the power b utton again to r estart the system. If the syst em does not shut down, unplug the pow er cord, w ait a few seconds, then pl ug it in again. If it does not r estart, pres s the power button t o start the comput er . â ReconîÂÂgure the comput er after instal ling a nonâÂÂplug and play expansion boar d or other option. â Be sure that al l requir ed device drivers hav e been install ed. For exampl e, if you hav e connected a prin ter, you mus t install a print er driver . â If you ar e working on a network, plug ano ther computer with a diî«erent cabl e into the network connection. Ther e might be a probl em with the network plug or cable . â If you r ecentl y added new hardw are, r emove the har dware and v erify if the computer functions pr operly . â If you r ecentl y install ed new softwar e, uninstall the softw are and verify if the comput er functions properl y . â If the screen is blank, pl ug the monitor int o a diî«erent video port on the computer if one is av ailable. Al ternativ ely, repl ace the monitor with a monit or that you know is w orking properl y . â Upgrade the BIOS . A new rel ease of the BIOS might ha ve been rel eased that supports new f eatures or îÂÂxes your pr oblem. â Pre ss the caps lock k ey . If the caps lock LED t oggles on or oî«, the k eyboar d is operating c orrectl y . Tro ubleshooting check list Befor e running diagnostic utilities, mak e sure that the f oll owing conditions are met: â The comput er is connected t o a working electrical o utlet and power ed on, and the power light is ill uminated. â The monitor (f or tower or de sktop conîÂÂgurations) is c onnected to a working el ectrical outl et and power ed on, and the power light is ill uminated. â The monitor brightnes s and contras t are pro perly adjust ed. â The k eyboard is o perating corr ectly (pr ess and hold any k ey and listen for a beep ). â All cabl es are pr operly c onnected. 62 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
â All nec essary device driv ers are install ed. â All ex ternal media (such as op tical disks or USB drive k eys) ar e remov ed before s tartup. â The late st version of BIOS, driv ers, and software ar e install ed. HP tro ubleshooting re sources and t ools This section pro vides information t o guide you in tro ubleshooting y our system. Online support Online support reso urces incl ude web-based troubl eshooting t ools, technical knowl edge databases, driver and patch do wnloads, online c ommunities, and product change notiîÂÂcation service s. The fol lowing websit es are also av ailable to y ou: â http:// ww w .hp. com âÂÂP rovides useful pr oduct information. â http:// ww w .hp. com/support/ workstation_manuals âÂÂPr ovides the lat est online documentation. â http:// ww w .hp. com/go /w orkstationsupport âÂÂPr ovides technical support inf ormation for works tations. â http:// ww w8.hp. com/us/ en/ contact -hp/ phone-assist.h tml âÂÂProvide s a listing of the worl dwide technical support tel ephone numbers. Select y our region. â http:// ww w .hp. com/support/ workstation_swdriv ers âÂÂProvide s acces s to softwar e and drivers for worksta tions. HP Support Center T o help yo u troubl eshoot probl ems yoursel f, HP pro vides the HP Support Center . The HP Support C enter is a portal to an ext ensive selection o f online tools. T o acc ess the HP Support Cent er, compl ete the fol lowing steps: 1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/go /work stationsupport . 2. Sear ch for your pr oduct. HP Chat Support HP Chat Support is a set of web-b ased support tools that automat e and speed up the resol ution of probl ems conc erning desktop c omputing, tape st orage, and printing. HP Chat Support enabl es you t o electronical ly submit a support tick et to HP o ver the web . When you submit a support tick et, HP Chat Support coll ects information abo ut the workstation and pas ses it to an online support specialist. The c ollection o f information might tak e up to 30 seconds, depending on the works tation conîÂÂguration. When you submit a support tick et, yo u receiv e a conîÂÂrmation message con taining your case ID, the support hours for y our location, and the es timated time of r esponse. For mor e information about HP Cha t Support, go to http://instantsupport.hp .c om/ . NO TE: This featur e is not availabl e for Linux. Customer Advisorie s, Customer and Security Bul letins, and Customer Notice s T o îÂÂnd advisories, bul letins, and notic es: HP troubl eshooting r esourc es and tools 63
1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/go /work stationsupport . 2. Sear ch for your pr oduct. 3. On the product p age, select the tab T op Issues and Sol utions . Product Change NotiîÂÂcations Product Ch ange NotiîÂÂcations (PCNs) are pr oactive notiîÂÂcations for pr oduct changes oc curring within a 30- to 60-day window of the eî«ective dat e of the change in the manuf acturing proces s. PCNs give customers advance no tice of ch anges to their pr oduct, such as an updated BIOS version that the y might need to decide whether to downl oad prior to the chang e taking place. T o view a list of PCNs, go to the Advisorie s, Bulletins & Notices pag e for your pr oduct. Helpful hin ts If you enc ounter a pr oblem with the work station, monitor, or softw are, the fol lowing gener al suggestions might help y ou isolate and f ocus on the problem be fore taking further action. At s tartup â V erif y that the work station is plugged in to a functional AC o utlet. â Remov e all optical discs and USB î¯ash driv es befor e starting the workstation. â V erif y that the work station is on and the power light is on. â If you h ave install ed an operating sys tem other than the f actory-install ed operating syst em, conîÂÂrm that it is supported on y our system b y going to http:// www.hp .c om/go/ quickspecs . â V erif y that the int ernal display panel is lit. â If the internal dis play panel is dim, turn up the brightnes s. â If you h ave an extern al monitor: ⦠V erif y that the monit or is plugged int o a functional AC outl et. ⦠V erif y that the monit or is on and the green monitor light is on. ⦠If the monitor is dim, turn up the brightnes s and contras t controls. During operation â Beeps and blinking lights on the works tation are error c odes that can help y ou diagnose probl ems. For more inf ormation on interpr eting these codes, see the Diagnostic LED and audibl e (beep) codes section in the Maintenance and Service Guide f or your work station. â Pre ss and hold any k ey . If the syst em beeps, your k eyboar d is operating corr ectly . â Check all cabl es for l oose or incorrect c onnections. â Wak e the work station by pre ssing the power butt on or any k ey on the k eyboard. If the syst em remains in suspend mode, shut down the syst em by pr essing and holding the pow er button for at l east f our seconds. Then pr ess the power b utton again to r estart the system. If the system doe s not shut down, unplug the po wer cord, w ait a few sec onds, and then plug it in again. If the system doe s not res tart, press the power b utton. â After ins talling a non-PnP expansion boar d or other option ( such as a diskett e drive), re start the worksta tion. 64 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
â Be sure that al l requir ed device drivers hav e been install ed. For exampl e, if you hav e connected a prin ter, you mus t install a print er driver . â If you ar e working on a network, use another cabl e to plug y our workstation in to the network connection. If y ou still canno t connect, there might be a pr oblem with the network pl ug. â If you r ecentl y added new hardw are, r emove the har dware t o see whether the workstation functions properl y . â If you r ecentl y install ed new softwar e, uninstall the softw are to see whether the work station functions properl y . â If the internal dis play panel on an all -in-one workstation is bl ank, open the workstation and be sur e that both ends of the cabl e between the syst em board and the intern al display panel ar e connected. If y ou are using a gr aphics card, verify that the car d is properl y install ed. â Upgrade the BIOS . A new rel ease of the BIOS might ha ve been rel eased that supports new f eatures or îÂÂxes your pr oblem. â For mor e detailed inf ormation, see the troubl eshooting chapt er in the Maintenance and Service Guide at http:// ww w .hp. com/support/ workstation_manuals . Customer Sel f Repair Under the Customer Sel f Repair pr ograms, yo u can order a replac ement part and install the part without on- site HP t echnical assistance. Cus tomer Sel f Repair might be requir ed for some c omponents. For more information, g o to http:// ww w .hp. com/go / sel frepair and sel ect your product. NO TE: Some components are no t eligible for Cus tomer Sel f Repair and must be r eturned to HP for service. Call support f or further instructions before att empting to r emove or r epair these components. HP troubl eshooting r esourc es and tools 65
Tro ubleshooting scen arios and solutions This section presen ts troubl eshooting scenarios and pos sible solutions f or a Windows-based syst em. Sol ving minor problems Problem Cause Possible Solution Works tation appears froz en and does not shut down when the power butt on is pressed. Software c ontrol of the po wer switch is not functional. 1. Press and hold the po wer button for at l east fo ur seconds until the comput er shuts down. 2. Disconnect the electrical plug fr om the outlet. 3. Restart the computer . Works tation seems to be froz en. Progr am in use has stopped responding t o commands. 1. If possible, use the Windows T ask Manager to isolate and terminat e the oî«ending process. 2. Attempt the normal Windows shut down procedur e. 3. Restart the computer using the pow er button. Works tation date and time display is inc orrect. Real -time clock (R TC) batt ery might need replac ement. 1. Reset the date and time in the Contr ol Panel. 2. Replace the RT C battery . Works tation appears to pause periodicall y . Network driver is l oaded and no network connection is established. Establish a network connection, or use C omputer Setup (F10) Utility or Microsoft Windows De vice Manager to disabl e the network contr oller . Cursor does not mov e using the arrow k eys on the k eypad. num lock is on. Press num l ock . The num lock k ey can be disabled or enabl ed in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . Poor performanc e is experienced. Proc essor is hot. 1. Verify that airî¯ow to the comp uter is not bl ocked. 2. Verify that chassis fans ar e connected and working properl y . Some fans oper ate only when needed. 3. Verify that the proces sor heatsink is install ed properl y . Hard drive is ful l. T ransfer data fr om the hard drive t o create mor e space on the hard driv e. Works tation powered oî« automaticall y and the Power LED î¯ashes red 2 times ( once every second), f ollow ed by a 2- second pause, and then two simultaneo us beeps sounded. Proc essor thermal prot ection is activated. A fan might be bl ocked or not turning. OR The proce ssor heatsink is not properl y attached to the proc essor . 1. Verify that the comput er air vents are not bl ocked. 2. Open the access panel and pr ess the comput er power button. 3. Verify that the system fan is running . 4. Verify that the proces sor heatsink fan spins. If the f an is not spinning, v erify that the heatsink fan cable is pl ugged into the syst em board connect or and that the heatsink is properl y seated. 5. Replace the proc essor heatsink. Syst em does not turn on, and the LEDs on the front o f the comput er are not î¯ashing. Syst em cannot power on. Pr ess and hold the pow er button for l ess than four sec onds. If the hard driv e LED turns green: 1. T o îÂÂnd a faul ty device, remov e all devices one at a time : a. Disconnect AC po wer to the comput er . b. Remove a device . c. Reconnect AC pow er and turn on the computer . 66 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Problem Cause Possible Solution 2. Repeat this proce ss until the faulty de vice is identiîÂÂed. Remov e the graphics card last. R eplace the faul ty device. 3. If no faulty device is f ound, replace the sys tem board. OR 1. Press and hold the po wer button for l ess than four seconds. If the har d drive LED does not ill uminate: a. Verify that the c omputer is plugged in to a working AC outl et. b. Verify that the power button h arness is connected t o the inline front panel I/ O device assembl y connector . 2. Verify that the power suppl y unit (PSU) cables ar e connected t o the system boar d. 3. Verify power supply unit PS U functionality (T ower onl y): a. Disconnect the AC po wer . b. Unplug cables connect ed to the system boar d. c. Reconnect AC pow er â If the PSU fan spins and the BIS T LED illumin ates, the PSU is good; repl ace the system boar d. â If the PSU fan does no t spin or the LED does not ill uminate, replac e the PSU. Sol ving hard drive problems Problem Cause Solution Hard drive err or Hard drive has bad sect ors or has fail ed. Locate and bl ock the usage of bad sectors. If nec essary, ref ormat the hard drive. If the drive is detect ed by the UEFI, run F2 Diagnostics Drive T est. Disk transaction probl em The direct ory structure is bad, or there is a pr oblem with a îÂÂle. 1. Open Windows Explorer and sel ect a drive. 2. Right click on the drive and select Properties > T ools . 3. Under Error-checking, sel ect Check Now. Drive not f ound (identiîÂÂed) Improper cabl e connection On computers with discr ete data and power cabl es, make sur e that the data and power cabl es are securel y connected t o the hard driv e. (See the Hard drive section of this guide for connection details.) Improperl y seated har d drive On systems with blind-mate driv e connections, check for connector damag e on the drive and in the chassis. Reseat the h ard drive and its carrier in the chassis t o make sure that a pr oper connection. (See the Hard drive section of this guide for connection details.) T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions 67
Problem Cause Solution The system might no t have automaticall y rec ognized a newly ins talled devic e. 1. Run Computer Setup (F10) Utility . 2. If the system does not rec ognize the new device, v erify that the device is lis ted in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . If it is listed, the pr obable cause is a driver pr oblem. If it is not list ed, the probable cause is a har dware pr oblem. 3. If this drive is newly instal led, enter Setup and try adding a POST delay under Adv anced > Boot Options . Drive re sponds slowl y immediatel y after power -up. Run Comput er Setup (F10) Utility and increase the POST Del ay in Advanced.> Boot Options Non-system disk or NTLDR missing message Syst em is trying to start from nonbootable media. Remov e the optical disc or USB drive. Syst em is trying to start from a damaged hard driv e. 1. Inser t a bootabl e system optical disc or USB driv e and restart the c omputer . 2. If the hard drive is still inac cessibl e and MBR Security is enabled, try re storing the previo usly saved MBR image by entering Setup and sel ecting Security > Save/ Restore MBR o f the system hard drive . Syst em îÂÂles missing or not properl y install ed. 1. Inser t a bootabl e system optical disc or USB driv e and restart. 2. Verify that the hard drive is p artitioned and formatted. 3. Install the system îÂÂles for the ap propriate oper ating system, if nec essary . Hard drive boo t disabled in Comput er Setup. Run Comput er Setup (F10) Utility and enable the hard driv e entry in the Advanced > Boot Options list. Works tation will not start. Hard drive is damag ed. Replac e the hard drive. 68 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Sol ving display problems These sugges tions apply t o monitors connected t o deskt op and tower conîÂÂgurations, and t o external monitors connect ed to all -in-one conîÂÂgurations. Problem Cause Solution Blank screen (no video ). The cable connections ar e not correct. Verify the cabl e connections from the monitor t o the comput er and to a working electrical o utlet. The monitor is oî«. T urn the monitor on (LED is on). Y ou might need t o refer to the monitor manual for an expl anation of LED signals. Screen blanking utility instal led or energy saver f eatures enabled. Pres s a key or the mo use button and, if set, enter y our passwor d. Syst em ROM is bad; system is running in F ailSafe Boot Bl ock mode (indicated by 8 beeps ). Reî¯ash the ROM using a SoftP aq. Fixed-sync monit or does not sync at the resol ution speciîÂÂed. Verify that the monit or can accept the same horiz ontal scan rate as the r esolution speciîÂÂed. Comput er is in Hibernate mode. Press the power butt on to resume fr om Hibernate mode. Works tation monitor settings are not c ompatible with the monitor . 1. When you see Press f8 in the bottom-righ t corner of the screen, r estart the computer and pr ess f8 during startup. 2. Using the keyboar d arrow k eys, select Enable VGA Mode , and then press en ter . 3. For Windows, double-click the Display ic on in the Contr ol Panel and then select the Settings tab . 4. Use the sliding control to r eset the resol ution. The display work s properly during the POST but g oes blank when the operating syst em starts. The display settings in the operating syst em are incompatibl e with your graphics card and monitor . 1. For Windows, restart yo ur computer in V GA mode. 2. After the operating syst em starts, change the display settings to match those sup ported by your graphics car d and monitor . 3. Refer to yo ur operating system and gr aphics card documentation for inf ormation about changing display settings. Power LED î¯ashes r ed 6 times (once every second), f ollow ed by a two- second pause, and then the comput er beeps 6 times. Pre-video gr aphics error . F or systems with a graphics card: 1. Reseat the graphics card. 2. If the card requires ex ternal power, mak e sure the power cable is pr operly connect ed. 3. Replace the graphics card. 4. Replace the system boar d. For syst ems with no graphics card instal led, the CPU may hav e no integra ted graphics capability . Monitor does not function when used with Energy Saver f eatures. Monitor without Ener gy Saver capabilities is being used with Energy Saver f eatures enabl ed. Disable the monit or Energy Saver featur e. Dim characters The brightness and c ontrast contr ols are not set pro perly . Adjust the monitor brigh tness and contras t controls. T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions 69
Problem Cause Solution Cables ar e not properl y connected. Verify that the gr aphics cable is connected t o the graphics card and the monitor . Blurry video or reques ted resol ution cannot be set. If the graphics contr oller w as upgraded, the corr ect video drivers might not be l oaded. Install the video driv ers included in the upgrade kit, or download and ins tall the lates t drivers for your gr aphics card from http:// welcome .hp.c om/country / us/ en/ support.html . Monitor cannot dis play request ed resolution. Change the reques ted resol ution. The picture is br oken up, rol ls, jitters, or î¯ashes. The monitor connections migh t be faul ty, or the monitor might be incorrectl y adjusted. 1. Be sure the monitor cable is secur ely connect ed to the comput er . 2. In a multiple CRT monit or system, mak e sure that the monitors' el ectromagnetic îÂÂelds are not int erfering with each other . Move them apart if nece ssary . 3. Move î¯uorescent lights or fans that ar e too close to the CRT monitor . Monitor must be degaus sed. Degauss the monit or . Vibrating or rattling noise c oming from inside a CRT monit or when powered on. Monitor degaussing c oil has been activated. None. It is normal for the degaus sing coil to be activat ed when the monitor is turned on. Clicking noise coming from inside a CRT monitor . Electr onic relays hav e been activated inside the monit or . None. It is normal for some monit ors to make a clicking noise when turned on and oî«, when going in and out of S tandby mode, and when changing resol utions. High pitched noise coming fr om inside a î¯at-panel monitor . Brightness and c ontrast settings are too high. Lower brightne ss and contrast settings. Fuzzy focus; s treaking, ghosting, or shadowing eî«ects; horizontal scrolling line s; faint vertical bars; or unable t o center the pictur e on the screen (î¯at-panel monitors using an analog V GA input connection onl y .) Flat-p anel monitorâÂÂs int ernal digital conv ersion circuits might be unable t o correctl y interpret the output synchr onization of the graphics card. 1. Select the monitorâÂÂs Aut o-Adjustment option in the monitorâ s onscreen display menu. 2. Manually synchroniz e the Clock and Clock Phase onscreen displa y functions. 3. Download SoftPaq SP22333 t o assist with the synchronization). Some typed symbols do not appear correctl y . The font yo u are using does not support that symbol. Use the Charact er Map to locat e and select the appropriat e symbol. For Windows 7, sel ect Start > All Progr ams > Accessories > System T ools > Character Map . Y ou can cop y the symbol from the Char acter Map into a document. For Windows 8.1, fr om the Start screen, type character map . The application appears under the Apps he ading. (Windows 10) T ype character in the taskbar search bo x, and then select Character Map . 70 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Sol ving audio problems Problem Cause Solution Sound does not c ome out of the speak er or headphones. Software v olume contr ol is turned down. Double-click the Spe aker icon on the taskbar, and then use the volume slider t o adjust the volume. The external s peakers ar e not turned on. T urn on the external spe akers. External s peakers pl ugged into the wrong audio jack. See your sound car d documentation for pro per speak er connection. Digital CD audio is not enabl ed. Enable digital CD audio: 1. From the Control P anel, select System. 2. On the Hardware tab, sel ect the Device Manager button. 3. Right-click the CD/DVD device and sel ect Properties. 4. On the Properties tab, select Enable digital CD audio f or this CD-ROM device . Headphones or devic es connected t o the line-out connector h ave muted the internal s peaker . T urn on and use headphones or external s peak ers, if connected, or disc onnect headphones or extern al speak ers. Vol ume is muted. 1. From the Contr ol Panel, select Sound, S peech and Audio Devices , and then select So unds and Audio Devices . 2. Deselect the Mute checkbox. Comput er is in Standby mode. P ress the power b utton to resume fr om Standby mode. Noise or no sound comes o ut of the speak ers or headphones. 1. If you are using digital speak ers that hav e a stereo jack and you w ant the system to aut oswitch to digital, use a ster eo-to-mono adapter t o engage the auto sense featur e, or use multimedia devic e properties to swit ch the audio signal from anal og to digital. 2. If the headphones have a mono jack, use the mul timedia device pr operties to switch the syst em to analog o ut. NOTE: If you set digital as the Output Mode, the internal s peaker and ex ternal analog s peakers no l onger output audio until y ou switch back to an aut o sense or analog mode. If you set anal og as the Output Mode, external digital speak ers do not function until yo u change the output mode back to an aut o-sense or digital mode. Sound occurs int ermittently . Processor r esourc es are being used by other open ap plications. Shut down all open pr ocessor -intensive ap plications. Works tation appears to be lock ed up while r ecording audio . The hard driv e might be full. 1. Before rec ording, be sure there is eno ugh free spac e on the hard driv e. 2. Try recor ding the audio îÂÂle in a compres sed format. T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions 71
Sol ving printer problems Problem Cause Solution Printer doe s not print. Printer is no t turned on and online. T urn the printer on and be sure it is online. The correct prin ter driver for the application is not instal led. 1. Install the correct print er driver for the application. 2. Try printing using the MS-DOS command: DIR C:\> [printer port] Replace print er port with the address o f the printer used. If the printer work s, reload the print er driver . If you ar e on a network, you might not hav e made a connection to the prin ter . Mak e the proper network connection t o the printer . Printer migh t have failed. Run printer self -test. Printer doe s not turn on. The cables might not be connected pr operly . Sol ving power supply problems This section presen ts power suppl y troubl eshooting scenarios. Testing power supply Befor e replacing the pow er supply unit (PSU), use the Buil t-In Sel f - T est (BIST) fe ature t o learn if the pow er suppl y still works. NOTE: Not al l PSUs have the BIS T functionality . Refer to the Rear panel c omponents section of this document to det ermine BIST avail ability for your work station. T o tes t the power suppl y: 1. Unplug the A C power . 2. Unplug al l power cable s to the system bo ards. 3. Pl ug in AC power and verify the f ollo wing: â If the green BIS T LED on the rear o f the workstation is il luminated and the f an is spinning, the PSU is functional. â If the green BIS T LED is not ill uminated or the fan is no t spinning, replac e the PSU . See the Rear panel components section of this documen t to locat e the BIST LED on yo ur workstation. Problem Cause Solution PSU shuts down int ermittently . Power supply f ault. Replac e the PSU. Works tation powers oî« and the Power LED î¯ashes r ed 2 times (once every second), f ollow ed by a two- second pause. Proc essor thermal prot ection is activated. A fan might be bl ocked or not turning. 1. Make sure that the w orkstation air vents ar e not block ed. 2. Open the access panel and pr ess the workstation pow er button. 72 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Problem Cause Solution OR The proce ssor heatsink fan assembl y is not properl y attached to the proc essor . 3. Verify that the system fan is running . 4. Verify that the proces sor heatsink fan spins. If the heatsink fan is no t spinning, verify that the fan cable is pl ugged into the syst em board connector . Verify that the fan is pr operly seat ed. 5. Replace the proc essor heatsink. Power LED î¯ashes r ed (once e very 2 seconds). Power f ailure (power sup ply is overl oaded). 1. Determine whether a device is causing the probl em by performing the fol lowing: a. Disconnect AC po wer . b. Remove all attached devic es. c. Turn on the work station. If the system ent ers the POST, perform the fol lowing: a. Power oî« the w orkstation. b. Replace one device at a time and r epeat this procedur e until a failur e occurs. c. Replace the devic e causing the failure. d. Continue adding devices one at a time t o verify that all devic es are functioning. 2. Verify power supply function ality (T ower onl y). a. Disconnect AC po wer . b. Unplug all system boar d power cables. c. Plug in AC pow er . â If the PSU fan spins and the LED is illumin ated (see T esting power suppl y on page 72 ), the power suppl y is good. Replace the sys tem board. â If the PSU fan does no t spin or the LED does not ill uminate (see T esting power suppl y on page 72 ), replac e the power suppl y . Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics is a UniîÂÂed Ext ensible Firmwar e Interfac e (UEFI) that all ows you t o run diagnostic tes ts to determine whether the c omputer har dware is functioning pr operly . The tool runs outside the operating sys tem so that it can isolat e hardwar e failur es from issue s that are caused by the o perating system or other softw are components. When HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a f ailure th at require s hardwar e replac ement, a 24-digit F ailure ID is g enerated. This ID can then be pr ovided to support to hel p determine how t o correct the pr oblem. T o start HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI), fol low the se steps: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer, and quick ly pr ess esc 2. Pr ess F2. The BIOS sear ches three plac es for the diagnostic t ools, in the foll owing order: Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) 73
a. Connected USB driv e NO TE: T o download the HP PC Har dware Diagnos tics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Do wnloading HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB de vice on page 74 . b. Hard driv e c. BIOS 3. When the diagnostic t ool opens, select the type of diagnostic t est you w ant to run, and then f ollo w the on-screen instructions. NOTE: If you need t o stop a diagnos tic test, pr ess esc. Downl oading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) t o a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) downl oad instructions are pr ovided in English onl y, and you must use a Windows c omputer to do wnload and cr eate the HP UEFI support envir onment because only . exe îÂÂles are oî«ered. There ar e two options to do wnload HP PC Har dward Diagnostics t o USB device. Download the late st UEFI version 1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/go /techc enter /pcdiags . The HP PC Diagnostics home p age is displayed. 2. In the HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics section, click the Dowl oad link, and then select Run . Download any version o f UEFI for a speciîÂÂc product 1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/support , and then select y our coun try . The HP Support page is displa yed. . 2. Click Drivers & Downloads. 3. Use the cat egories listed t o îÂÂnd your pr oduct. â or â Click Find Now to l et HP automatical ly detect y our product. 4. Select y our comput er, and then select y our operating syst em. 5. In the Diagnostic section, f ollow the on-scr een instructions to sel ect and downlo ad the UEFI version you want. POS T error me ssages and diagnostic fr ont panel LEDs and audible c odes This appendix lists the err or codes, error me ssages, and the various indica tor light and audible sequenc es that yo u may encount er during Power -On Self - T est (POS T) or comput er restart, the pr obable sour ce of the probl em, and steps y ou can tak e to resol ve the err or condition. POST Me ssage Disabled suppr esses most sys tem message s during POST, such as memory coun t and non- error t ext messages. If a PO ST error oc curs, the screen will displ ay the error messag e. T o manuall y switch to the POST Me ssages Enabl ed mode during POST, pre ss any k ey (ex cept F10, F11, or F12). The de fault mode is POST Me ssage Disabled. The speed at which the c omputer l oads the operating syst em and the extent t o which it is test ed are determined b y the POST mode sel ection. 74 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Quick Boot is a fas t startup proce ss that does not run al l of the system l evel t ests, such as the memory test. Ful l Boot runs all of the R OM-based syst em tests and tak es l onger to compl ete. Ful l Boot may also be enabl ed to run every 1 to 30 days on a r egularl y scheduled basis. T o establish the schedule, reconîÂÂgure the c omputer t o the Full Boo t Every x Days mode, using Comput er Setup. NO TE: For more inf ormation on Comput er Setup, see Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities on page 18 . POS T numeric codes and tex t messages This section co vers those POST err ors that have numeric c odes associated with them. The section also includes some t ext messages th at may be encount ered during POS T . NO TE: The computer wil l beep once after a PO ST text me ssage is display ed on the screen. Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 002-Option ROM Checksum Err or Sys tem ROM or expansion boar d option ROM checksum. 1. Verify the correct RO M. 2. Flash the ROM if needed. 3. If an expansion board was rec ently added, remov e it to see if the probl em remains. 4. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 5. If the message disappears, there may be a probl em with the expansion card. 6. Replace the system boar d. 003-S ystem Boar d Failur e DMA or timers. 1. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 2. Remove expansion boar ds. 3. Replace the system boar d. 005-Real - Time Cl ock Power Loss Invalid time or dat e in conîÂÂguration memory . RT C (real -time clock) batt ery may need to be replac ed. Reset the dat e and time under Control Panel (Comp uter Setup can also be used). If the probl em persists, replace the R TC batt ery . See the Remov al and Replacement section for instructions on installing a ne w battery . 008âÂÂMicrocode P atch Error Proc essor is not supported b y the BIOS. 1. Upgrade BIOS to pr oper version. 2. Change the processor . 009âÂÂPMM Al location Error during MEBx Download Memory error during POST ex ecution of the Management Engine (ME) BIOS Ext ensions option RO M. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the c omputer, res tore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00A-Pr oduct Information Not V alid The pr oduct information progr ammed into the system boar d is missing or invalid. Use Comput er Setup to update this inf ormation. POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 75
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 00B-MEBx Module did no t checksum correctl y Memory error during POS T execution of the Management Engine (ME) BIOS Ext ensions option RO M. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the pow er cord, r estore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00C -PMM Deal location Error during MEBx Cleanup Memory error during POST ex ecution of the Management Engine (ME) BIOS Ext ensions option RO M. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the pow er cord, r estore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00D-Setup Err or during MEBx Execution MEBx selection or exit r esulted in a setup failur e. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the pow er cord, r estore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00E-Inven tory Error during MEBx Execution BIOS information p assed to the MEBx resul ted in a failur e. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. If the error persists, update to the lat est BIOS version. 3. If the error still persists, repl ace the system boar d. 00F-Interfac e Error during MEBx Execution MEBx oper ation experienced a hardw are error during communication with the ME. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. If the error persists, update to the lat est BIOS version. 3. If the error still persists, repl ace the system boar d. 100-Front A udio Not Connected F ront audio cable has been detached or unseated fr om system boar d. Reconnect or r eplace front audio cabl e. 2E1-MemorySize Error Memory amount has changed since the l ast boot (memory added or remov ed). The system memory size is diî«erent fr om the last startup . The most common re ason is the remov al of memory from the system boar d. Pres s the F1 key t o save the memory changes. If this message persists, v erify that the memory modules are ins talled c orrectly . 76 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 2E2-Memory Error Memory module conîÂÂguration fail ed during boot up . 1. Ensure memory modules are c orrectly install ed. 2. Verify proper memory module type. 3. Remove and replac e the identiîÂÂed faulty memory module(s). 4. If the error persists after replacing memory modules, repl ace the system board. 2E3-Incompatibl e Memory Module in Memory Sock et(s) X, X, ... A memory module in memory sock et identiîÂÂed in the error messag e is missing critical SPD information, or is inc ompatible with the chipset. 1. Verify proper memory module type. 2. Try another memory sock et. 3. Replace with a supported modul e. 2E4-DIMM ConîÂÂguration Warning The current memory conîÂÂguration is not optimized. Rearr ange the DIMMs so that each channel has the same amount of memory . 2E5-EC C Memory Module Detected on Unsupported Platf orm Recentl y added memory module(s) support EC C memory error corr ection. 1. If additional memor y was r ecently added, remov e it to see if the probl em remains. 2. Check product documentation for memory support information. 2E6âÂÂMemory Not ConîÂÂgured Corr ectly for Proper MEB x Execution DIMM1 is not instal led. Mak e sure there is a memory module in the DIMM1 sock et and that it is properl y seated. 300âÂÂConîÂÂguration Change Warning The stor age device conîÂÂguration will be updated as shown. Not applicabl e 301-Hard Disk 1: SMART Har d Drive Detects Imminent F ailure Hard drive is abo ut to fail. (Some hard driv es have a har d drive îÂÂrmware patch tha t will îÂÂx an erroneous err or message.) 1. Determine if hard drive is giving c orrect error messag e. Run the Drive Pro tection Syst em test under using F2 Diagnostics when booting the comp uter . 2. Apply hard driv e îÂÂrmware patch if applicable. (A vailable at http://www .hp. com/support .) 3. Back up contents and replac e hard drive . 302-Hard Disk 2: SMART Har d Drive Detects Imminent F ailure Hard drive is abo ut to fail. (Some hard driv es have a har d drive îÂÂrmware patch tha t will îÂÂx an erroneous err or message.) 1. Determine if hard drive is giving c orrect error messag e. Run the Drive Pro tection Syst em test under using F2 Diagnostics when booting the comp uter . 2. Apply hard driv e îÂÂrmware patch if applicable. (A vailable at http://www .hp. com/support .) 3. Back up contents and replac e hard drive . 309 â 30C: Hard Disk 3âÂÂ6: SMART Har d Drive Detects Imminent F ailure Hard drive is abo ut to fail. (Some hard driv es have a har d drive îÂÂrmware patch tha t will îÂÂx an erroneous err or message.) 1. Determine if hard drive is giving c orrect error messag e. Run the Drive Pro tection Syst em test under using F2 Diagnostics when booting the comp uter . 2. Apply hard driv e îÂÂrmware patch if applicable. (A vailable at http://www .hp. com/support .) 3. Back up contents and replac e hard drive . 3F0âÂÂBoot Devic e Not Found Boot device not fo und. Insert boot device or l oad operating syst em. POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 77
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 3F1âÂÂHard Disk 1 Err or Hard disk 1 error . 1. Check and/ or replace cabl es. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. Replace the hard disk driv e. 3F2âÂÂHard Disk 2 Err or Hard disk 2 error . 1. Check and/ or replace cabl es. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. Replace the hard disk driv e. 400-Serial P ort A Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both external and intern al serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 401-Serial P ort B Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both external and int ernal serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 402-Serial P ort C Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both extern al and internal serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 403-Serial P ort D Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both external and in ternal serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 419-Out of Memory Space f or Option ROMs Recentl y added PCI expansion card con tains an option RO M too large t o download during POS T . â² If a PCI expansion card w as recentl y added, remov e it to see if the probl em remains. 41A-Fr ont USB1/USB2 Not Connected Front USB cable has been detached or unse ated from syst em board. Reconnect or r eplace front USB cabl e. 41B-Device in PCI Expr ess Slot F ailed T o Initialize There is an incomp atibility or problem with a PCIe device and the syst em or PCIe link coul d not be conîÂÂgured to a v alid bus width or speed. T ry rebooting the system. If the err or reoccurs, the device may no t work with this system 43A-USB T ype-C I2C Not Connected Cable is requir ed between I2C on card and USB- C on the system boar d. Install cabl e between I2C on card and USB-C on the system boar d. 43B-More Than One USB type-C Cards Ar e Install ed More than one USB type-C card is instal led. R emove USB type-C card so onl y one is install ed. 500âÂÂBIOS Rec overy A syst em BIOS reco very has occurred. Not applicable. 70x- Wireles s Mode Not Supported The syst em has detected a wir eless modul e install ed in the system that is not sup ported and has been disabled. Replace with a sup ported module. 78 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 800-Keyboar d Error Keyboard fail ure. 1. Reconnect k eyboard with c omputer turned oî«. 2. Check connector for bent or missing pins. 3. Ensure that none of the k eys are depressed. 4. Replace k eyboard. 801-Keyboar d or System Unit Err or Keyboard fail ure. 1. Reconnect the k eyboard with c omputer turned oî«. 2. Ensure that none of the k eys are depressed. 3. Replace the k eyboard. 4. Replace the system boar d. 900-CPU F an Not Detected CPU fan is not c onnected or may hav e malfunctioned. 1. Reseat CPU fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace CPU fan. 901-Chassis, Rear Ch assis, or Front Chas sis Fan not Detect ed Chassis, re ar chassis, or front chas sis fan is not connected or ma y have malfunctioned. 1. Reseat chassis, re ar chassis, or front chassis fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace chassis, r ear chassis, or front chassis fan. 903-Computer C over Has Been Remo ved Since Last Syst em Startup N/ A 904-SA T A Cabling Error One or more SA T A devices ar e improperly attached. For optimal perf ormance, the SA T A 0 and SA T A 1 ports should be used for har d drives befor e other ports. Ensure SA T A connect ors are used in ascending order . For one device, use SA T A 0. For two devices, use SA T A 0 and SA T A 1. For thr ee devices, use SA T A 0, SA T A 1, and SA T A 2. 90B-F an Failur e The system has det ected that a cooling f an is not operating c orrectl y . 1. Reseat fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace fan. 90D-S ystem T emperature Thermal shutdown occurr ed. The system BIOS has detect ed your machine was pre viously shut down to av oid overheating. Ov erheating may occur if the cooling v ents are block ed or the operating t emperature exc eeds the system speciîÂÂcations. The machine should r eturn to normal operation onc e the situation is resolv ed. Mak e sure system has pr oper airî¯ow. 90E-Pow er Supply F an Not detect ed Power suppl y fan is not c onnected or may have malfunctioned. 1. Reseat power suppl y fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace power suppl y fan. 910âÂÂFilt er Warning Airî¯ow îÂÂlter is dirty . R eplace the airî¯ow îÂÂlter. POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 79
Interpreting system v alidation diagnostic fron t panel LEDs and audible c odes During the system v alidation phase that occurs at sys tem startup, the BIOS validat es the functionality of the fol lowing subsyst ems and conditions: â AC adap ter â Syst em board pow er â Proc essor fail ure â BIOS corrup tion â Memory failur e â Graphics fail ure â Syst em board f ailure â BIOS authentication f ailure If an error is det ected, speciîÂÂc patterns o f long and short blinks, ac companied by l ong and short beeps (where applicable ) are used to iden tif y the error . These p atterns will mak e up a two part code: â Major â the category of the err or â Minor â the speciîÂÂc error within the cat egory NOTE: Single beep /blink codes ar e not used. Number of long beeps/blink s Error category 1 Not used 2 BIOS 3 Har dware 4 Thermal 5 Sys tem board Patt erns of blink/beep codes are det ermined by using the foll owing paramet ers: â 1 second pause oc curs after the last major blink. â 2 second pause oc curs after the last minor blink. â Beep error c ode sequences occur f or the îÂÂrst 5 iterations o f the pattern and then st op. â Blink error c ode sequences c ontinue until the comput er is unplugged or the pow er button is pre ssed. NOTE: Not al l diagnostic lights and audible c odes are avail able on all models. The red LED blinks t o repr esent the major error cat egory (long blinks). The whit e LED blinks to r epresent the minor error cat egory (short blinks). For exampl e, âÂÂ3.5â indicates 3 l ong red blinks and 5 short whit e blinks to communicat e the proce ssor is not detect ed. 80 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Category Major /minor code Description BIOS 2.2 The main area (D XE) of BIOS has become c orrupted and there is no r ecovery binary image availabl e. 2.3 The embedded control ler policy requires the user t o enter a k ey sequence. 2.4 The embedded control ler is checking or rec overing the boot bl ock. Hardwar e 3.2 The embedded contr oller h as timed out waiting for BIOS t o return from memory initialization. 3.3 The embedded control ler has timed out waiting f or BIOS to return fr om graphics initialization. 3.4 The system board dis plays a power fail ure (cr owbar).* 3.5 The proces sor is not detected.* 3.6 The proces sor does not support an enabled f eature. Thermal 4.2 A processor ov er temperatur e condition has been detected.* 4.3 An ambient temperatur e over temper ature condition has been det ected. 4.4 An MXM over temper ature condition has been det ected. Syst em board 5.2 The embedded controll er cannot îÂÂnd valid îÂÂrmware. 5.3 The embedded control ler has timed out waiting f or the BIOS. 5.4 The embedded control ler has timed out waiting f or BIOS to return fr om system boar d initialization. 5.5 The embedded control ler reboo ted the system after a pos sible lock up condition had been det ected through the use o f a System Heal th Timer, Automat ed System Rec overy Timer, or other mechanism. * Indicates har dware trigger ed event; all o ther events are c ontroll ed by the BIOS. Interpr eting system validation diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 81
5 ConîÂÂguring passw ord security and resetting CMO S This chapt er describes how to conîÂÂgure p assword security and to r eset CMOS. Preparing to conîÂÂgure pas swords Comput er Setup (F10) Utility enables y ou to cr eate setup and pow er-on pas swords. There ar e three possibilities f or setting passwor ds: â DeîÂÂne an administrat or passwor d only . Y ou wil l need the passwor d to enter C omputer Setup (F10) Utility, but you wil l not need a passw ord to start the work station. â DeîÂÂne a power -on passwor d only . This passwor d lets y ou start the workstation or ent er the setup utility . â DeîÂÂne both. In this case, the administr ator passw ord lets y ou start the workstation and en ter the setup utility . The power-on pas sword starts the work station but does not l et you en ter the setup utility, After y ou cre ate both pas swords, yo u can use the administrator p assword in plac e of the power -on passw ord as an override t o log int o the comput er (a useful fe ature for a network adminis trator ). NOTE: Y ou can only cl ear the passwor ds with the passwor d jumper . Clearing CMO S does not cle ar the passwor ds. CAUTION: Before pr essing the Cl ear CMOS butt on, back up your c omputer CMOS settings. Pre ssing the Cle ar CMOS button r esets CMOS val ues to fact ory defaults and er ases customiz ed information, including asset numbers and s pecial settings. T o back up the CMOS settings, run C omputer Setup (F10) Utility and select Sa ve to Diskette from the Fil e menu. Resetting the passw ord jumper CAUTION: Stringent security is a mode where ther e is no physical bypas s of the passwor d function. If enabled, r emoving the passw ord jumper will be ignor ed. T o enable this mode, chang e the security setting Clear P assword Jumper in Passw ord Policies t o Ignore. If you l ose or for get the passwor d when in stringent security mode, the system can onl y be reset b y Syst em Management C ommand. This is a way for HP Service and Sup port to provide a secur e method to acc ess the BIOS and command a p assword r eset for a speciîÂÂcally identiîÂÂed unit under the dir ection of the owner . This scenario may no t be cov ered under warr anty . T o prev ent needing a customer servic e event to r estor e acc ess to the syst em, recor d your conîÂÂgured administrat or and power -on passwor ds in a safe place aw ay from y our comput er . T o disable the po wer-on or adminis trator pas sword fe atures, or t o clear the pow er-on or administr ator passwor ds, compl ete the fol lowing st eps: 82 Chapter 5 ConîÂÂguring passw ord security and resetting CMO S
1. Shut down the oper ating system pr operly, then turn oî« the c omputer and any ext ernal device s, and disconnect the pow er cord fr om the power outl et. 2. With the power c ord disconnect ed, press the po wer button again t o drain the syst em of any re sidual power . WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/ or hot surfaces, be sur e to disconnect the pow er cord fr om the wall o utlet, and all ow the intern al system componen ts to cool befor e touching. CAUTION: When the computer is pl ugged in, the power sup ply al ways has vol tage applied t o the system bo ard even when the unit is turned oî«. F ail ure to disc onnect the power cor d can resul t in damage to the sys tem. Static el ectricity can damage the electr onic components of the c omputer or op tional equipment. Befor e beginning these proc edures, ensur e that you ar e discharged o f static electricity by brieî¯y t ouching a grounded metal object. See the Saf ety & Regulatory Inf ormation guide for more in formation. 3. Remo ve the acc ess panel. 4. Locat e the header and jumper . NOTE: The passwor d jumper is green so that it can be e asily identiîÂÂed. 5. Remo ve the jumper from pins 1 and 2. 6. Plac e the jumper on either pin 1 or 2, but not both, so th at it does not get l ost. 7. Replac e the acce ss panel and rec onnect the external equipment. 8. Pl ug in the computer and turn on po wer . All ow the operating syst em to start. This cl ears the current passwor ds and disables the pas sword f eatures. 9. Shut down the c omputer, unplug the po wer, and disconnect the ext ernal equipment. 10. Remov e the acce ss panel. 11. Plac e the jumper on pins 1 and 2. 12. Replac e the acces s panel. 13. Rec onnect the external equipment and pl ug in the comput er . Clearing and re setting the BIOS The CMOS butt on resets BIOS settings t o defaul t, but does not cl ear the passwor ds or aî«ect any of the other Security settings. On Intel syst ems with advanced manag eability featur es, the CMOS butt on will also partiall y unpro vision AMT . Cle aring and resetting the BIOS 83
1. T urn oî« the comput er and any ext ernal devices, and disc onnect the power cor d from the power o utlet. 2. Disconnect the k eyboar d, monitor, and any o ther external equipment c onnected to the c omputer . WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/ or hot surfaces, be sur e to disconnect the pow er cord fr om the wall o utlet, and all ow the intern al system componen ts to cool befor e touching. CAUTION: When the comput er is plugged in, the power sup ply al ways has vol tage applied t o the system bo ard even when the unit is turned oî«. F ail ure to disc onnect the power cor d can resul t in damage to the sys tem. Static el ectricity can damage the electr onic components of the c omputer or op tional equipment. Befor e beginning these proc edures, ensur e that you ar e discharged o f static electricity by brieî¯y t ouching a grounded metal object. See the Saf ety & Regulatory Inf ormation guide for more in formation. 3. Remo ve the acc ess panel. CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button wil l reset CMO S values t o factory defaul ts. It is important to back up the comput er CMOS settings befor e resetting them in case they ar e needed later . Back up is easil y done through C omputer Setup . See Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities on page 18 for in formation on backing up the CMOS settings. 4. Locat e, press, and hol d the CMOS butt on in for îÂÂve seconds. NO TE: Make sur e you hav e disconnected the A C power cor d from the wal l outlet. The CM OS button wil l not cl ear CMOS if the pow er cord is c onnected. 5. Replac e the acce ss panel. 6. Rec onnect the external devic es. 7. Pl ug in the computer and turn on po wer . NO TE: Y ou will r eceive PO ST error mes sages after cl earing CMOS and r ebooting advising you th at conîÂÂguration changes hav e occurr ed. Use Comput er Setup to reset an y special system setups al ong with the date and time. For instructions on C omputer Setup, see C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities on pag e 18 . 84 Chapter 5 ConîÂÂguring passw ord security and resetting CMO S
A Linux technical note s HP oî«ers a variety of Linux sol utions for HP works tation customers: â HP oî«ers an Ubuntu pr eload on some Z Series W orkstations. â HP certiîÂÂes and supports Ubuntu on some HP work stations. â HP certiîÂÂes and supports Red Hat Ent erprise Linux (RHEL) on HP workstations. â HP certiîÂÂes SUSE Linux Ent erprise Desktop (SLED ) on HP workstations. â HP oî«ers a SLED 11 prel oad on some older Z Series W orkstations. For Linux setup and r estor e procedur es, see the user guide for y our workstation at h ttp://www .hp. com/ support/work station_manuals . â Syst em RAM â Audio â Network cards â Hyper - Threading T echnology â NVIDIA Graphics W orkstations â AMD Graphics W orkstations NO TE: After yo u set up the operating syst em, make sur e that the late st BIOS, drivers, and softwar e updates are instal led. CAUTION: Do not add optional h ardwar e or third-party devices t o the workstation un til the operating system is suc cess full y install ed. Adding hardwar e might cause errors and pr event the oper ating system fr om installing c orrectl y . System RAM HP supports diî«erent amounts of t otal RAM in various HP work stations, based on the number of har dware DIMM slo ts and the capabilities of the syst em. The total memory supported f or each conîÂÂguration is listed in the Hardware Support Matrix for HP Linux W orkstations at http ://www .hp. com/support/ linux_hardw are_matrix . Audio All HP w orkstations come with b uilt -in audio hardwar e. The audio hardw are is supported b y the Advanced Linux Sound Architecture (ALSA) driv ers included with all modern Linux distrib utions. The audio hardw are pro vides basic playback and r ecording f eature s. The ability to simultaneo usly play audio from mul tiple so urces, such as ap plications and CDs, is provided in the ALSA driv er that provide s audio mixing. The performance o f software audio mixing and pl ayback is greatl y impro ved in ALSA version 1.0.13 and lat er . After the driv er is install ed, the optional NVIDIA and AMD graphics car ds that are sup ported in HP worksta tions also provide audio functionality ov er HDMI. The signal can be passed thr ough the DisplayP ort connect or to a monitor with audio capabilitie s. The vendor driver must be instal led. Such a conîÂÂguration might pre sent two audio hardwar e choices. If y ou do not hear so und through the spe akers, one pos sible Syst em RAM 85
re ason is that the graphics card ( defaul t) is select ed for audio output inst ead of the Dis playPort. Check the audio settings (for ex ample, Sound in gnome-c ontrol -center ). In some systems, embedded In tel HD graphics may also pr esent a similar HDMI audio devic e that can be used through the Dis playPort int erface. No pro prietary driver is needed for this devic e, just a suî°ciently recen t k ernel. Network cards All HP w orkstations include one or two in tegrat ed network interface c ontrol lers. Some support optional NICs. Most Linux distributions h ave drivers for the se interface s. Hyper- Thre ading Technology The Z Series Work stations support Hyper- Threading T echnology (HTT), an Intel technol ogy that improve s proc essor performance b y enabling the proc essor to simul taneousl y perform multipl e tasks. The operating system tr eats an HTT -enabled pr ocessor as two virtual pr ocessors and shar es the workl oad between them when possibl e. This featur e can be used only if the oper ating system support mul tiple pr ocessors and is speciîÂÂcally optimiz ed for HTT . T o enable HTT : 1. During startup, pre ss F10 to ent er Computer Setup (F10) Utility . 2. Select Adv anced > Performance Options . 3. Set Intel Hyper- Threading Technol ogy to Enable , and then pre ss F10 to exit the menu. 4. Select Main > Sa ve Changes and Exit . 5. Res tart the system to enabl e HTT . NOTE: On most rec ent Linux distributions (incl uding RHEL 6, SLED 11, and updates t o those streams ), the k ernel automaticall y detects tha t HT T is enabl ed and works corr ectly . NVIDIA Graphics W ork stations Some worksta tion conîÂÂgurations come with NVIDIA Quadro gr aphics hardwar e. HP rec ommends the use of NVIDIA drivers for be st resul ts on Linux systems. HP pro vides recommended v ersions of the drivers with RPM-c ompatible instal lers for RHEL and SLED distributions. These ar e availabl e from the HP Instal ler Kit for Linux and fr om workstation driv er repositorie s on hp. com. When HP instal lers ar e used, their contents and documen tation links are l ocated in the / opt/hp / nvidia fol der . When installing Linux on a w orkstation that c ontains an NVIDIA card, administr ators should sel ect a VESA- compatibl e driver t o avoid the instability that is experienc ed with some open-sourc e versions of the Nouv eau and DRM drivers. Open-sourc e versions of Nouv eau drivers and NVIDIA drivers canno t coexist in the same runtime en vironment because they use the same har dware r esourc es. If administrat ors creat e their own Linux environments using NVIDIA drivers but choose no t to use HP-packag ed versions, HP recommends th at they manuall y append the fol lowing boot l oader paramet ers to properl y suppr ess the Nouve au driver at runtime (grub exampl e belo w): kernel /vmlinuz ... rdblacklist=nouveau nouveau.modeset=0 This action is applied by HP ins tallers but mus t be applied/ rest ored under other cir cumstances. 86 Appendix A Linux technical note s
T o customiz e display char acteristics and re solutions when the comput er is using an NVIDIA driver, ex ecute the fol lowing c ommand: /usr/bin/nvidia-settings T o cre ate and manipulat e the / etc/ X11/ xorg .c onf îÂÂle, execute: /usr/bin/nvidia-xconfig AMD Graphics W ork stations Some worksta tion conîÂÂgurations include AMD graphics har dware. HP r ecommends use of AMD gr aphics drivers for be st resul ts on Linux systems. HP also pro vides recommended v ersions of AMD graphics drivers with RP M-compatibl e install ers for RHEL and SLED distributions. These ar e availabl e from the HP Instal ler Kit for Linux and w orkstation driver support package s on hp. com. The open sour ce RADEON and RADEONHD drivers can conî¯ict with the AMD graphics driv ers by claiming the hardw are earl y in the boot pr ocess. The AMD driv er installation pr ocess usual ly black lists conî¯icting drivers and turns oî« k ernel mode-setting in the initial RAM image. Administra tor customization o f the display char acteristics and many o ther aspects of an AMD graphics driv er environmen t is availabl e through the fol lowing c ommand, which starts the Catalys t Control C enter: /usr/bin/amdcccle Some settings for AMD graphics, incl uding reconîÂÂguration of the / etc/X11/x org. conf îÂÂle, can be ac complished through the man y options pro vided by the fol lowing c ommand: /usr/bin/aticonfig Information can be f ound in these direct ories after the driver is ins talled: /opt/hp/ati /usr/share/ati /usr/share/doc/fglrx If the automatic init scrip t attempts t o rebuil d the kernel modul e, the name of the l og îÂÂle is /var /log/f glrx- buil d.log. AMD Graphics W orkstations 87
B ConîÂÂguring RAID devices This appendix explains how t o conîÂÂgure RAID arrays on your work station. T opics RAID hard drive maximum and as sociated storag e control ler options on page 88 Supported RAID conîÂÂgurations on page 89 ConîÂÂguring Intel SA T A RAID on page 89 Software RAID sol ution on page 90 For additional inf ormation about RAID conîÂÂguration, go to http:// www .hp. com/support/RAID _F AQs . RAID hard drive maximum and associated st orage c ontrol ler options This section lists the maximum number of har d drives support ed on HP workstations ac cording t o RAID conîÂÂguration and stor age contr oller o ptions. NOTE: This section applies to in ternal works tation conîÂÂgurations that do not use add-in car ds and external enclosur es. Maximum hard drives allo wed Hard drives Storage contr ollers SA T A Onboard 8.5 mm (3.5 in) 6.3 mm (2.5 in) RST SFF 2 2 Y es T ower 2 2 Y es 88 Appendix B ConîÂÂguring R AID device s
Supported R AID conîÂÂgurations The fol lowing RAID conîÂÂgurations are support ed: RAID conîÂÂguration details ConîÂÂguration Description Control lers RAID 0 Integra ted striped disk array â Require s a minimum of two drives. â Pro vides improved I/ O performance. â Pro vides no fault t oleranc e. â Loses all da ta if any disk in the array fails. â Increase s disk performance. Intel with RS T RAID 1 Mirror ed disk array â Supports two drives. â Pro vides 100% redundancy: all data from one driv e is duplicated on a sec ond drive. â Reco vers from a single-driv e failure. â Serves as a good entry-le vel redundant syst em. Intel with RS T ConîÂÂguring Intel SA T A RAID This section describes how t o use Intel î Rapid St orage T echnology (RS T) to set up and manage SA T A RAID v olumes. NO TE: These instructions appl y to Windows-based syst ems. They also appl y to Linux distributions tha t incl ude the isci k ernel driver support for the RS T e technol ogy . This driver is incl uded on recent r ele ases of most upstr eam and enterprise distrib utions, and may be availabl e for addition to some pr evious rel eases. If this driver is not a vailable in the dis tribution, or is not applicabl e to the platform ( e. g., the RST c ontrol ler ), the Softwar e RAID solution is recommended. Y ou can creat e a SA T A RAID array that c ontains up to the maximum number o f internal SA T A hard drive s and eS A T A drives (if you use an op tional eSA T A bulkhead cable ) supported on your work station. The Intel SA T A option R OM conîÂÂguration utilities run when yo u select RAID for the SA T A emulation mode. T wo or more har d drives must be attached t o the control ler f or the option ROM t o run. ConîÂÂguring system BIOS T o set up a RAID conîÂÂguration, the emulation mode must be set to RAID in C omputer Setup ( F10) Utility . This is the defaul t setting. If the mode has been changed, f ollo w these steps t o reinstat e it. 1 . During startup, pre ss esc to sel ect a language from the list, and then sel ect Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . 2 . Under Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility, use the arrow k eys t o navigate and sel ect options. 3 . Select Adv anced > System Options , then pres s enter. 4. Select ConîÂÂgure St orage Contr oller for RAID > Enable . 5 . Select Menu > Sa ve Changes and Exit , then press en ter . 6 . Pr ess enter t o accep t the changes. Supported RAID conîÂÂgurations 89
ConîÂÂguring RAID with the Intel utility Fol low these s teps to cr eate RAID vol umes. 1. Pr ess ctrl I when promp ted, to ent er the Intel Rapid S torage T echnology utility (RST). Use the arr ow k eys and the spac e bar to naviga te and select op tions. NO TE: If only one har d drive is attached, the utility does not open. 2. Select Cre ate RAID Volume , and then pr ess ent er . 3. T ype the a name for the RAID vol ume in the Name îÂÂeld, and then press tab. 4. Select a l evel in the RAID Le vel îÂÂeld, and then pres s tab. 5. If three or mor e hard driv es are instal led, compl ete the f ollowing s teps: a. Press en ter to dis play the Select dial og box. b. Select individual ph ysical members of the volume . c. Pr ess ent er to exit the Select dial og box and to r eturn to the Cr eate V olume Menu dial og box. 6. If appr opriate, select a siz e in the Stripe Size îÂÂeld, and then pr ess tab. 7. Enter the de sired vol ume size in the Capacity îÂÂeld, and then pres s tab. 8. Pr ess enter t o initiate vol ume creation. 9. When the warning mes sage appears, pre ss Y to cre ate the vol ume. 10. Select 6 > Exit, then pr ess ent er . 11. Pre ss Y to conîÂÂrm the exit. Softw are R AID solution This section summarizes so ftware RAID considerations th at are speciîÂÂc to the Linux en vironment, and pro vides links to additional conîÂÂguration r esourc es. Software RAID c onsiderations The Linux k ernel software RAID driver ( call ed md, for multiple device) oî«ers int egrated so ftware RAID without the need for additional har dwar e disk control lers or k ernel patche s. Unlike mos t hardwar e RAID solutions, softwar e RAID can be used with all types of disk technol ogies, including SA T A, SCSI, and solid-state driv es. This softwar e solution requir es only minimal setup o f the disks themselv es. Howev er, when compar ed to hardw are-based RAID, softwar e RAID has disadvantages in managing the disks, bre aking up data as necessary, and managing parity data. The CPU mus t assume some extra l oading: disk - intensiv e workl oads resul t in ro ughly doubl e the CPU ov erhead (for ex ample, from 15% t o 30%). For most applications, this ov erhead is easil y handled b y exce ss headroom in the pr ocessors. But f or some applications where disk and CPU perf ormance are v ery well balanc ed and already near bo ttleneck l evels, this additional CPU ov erhead can become tr oublesome . Hardw are RAID oî«ers advantages because o f its large har dware cache and the cap ability for better scheduling of oper ations in parall el. However, so ftware RAID oî«ers more î¯exibility f or disk and disk control ler setup. A dditionall y, hardwar e RAID requires tha t a failed RAID contr oll er must be replac ed with an identical model to av oid data loss, wher eas softwar e RAID imposes no such requirements. Some softwar e RAID schemes oî«er data prot ection through mirr oring (cop ying the data to mul tiple disks in case one disk fails) or parity data ( checksums that al low err or detection and limited r ebuilding o f data in case 90 Appendix B ConîÂÂguring R AID device s
of a fail ure). F or all softwar e RAID solutions on HP workstations, r edundancy can be rest ored onl y after the system is shut do wn so that the fail ed drive can be replac ed. This replac ement require s only a minimum amount of w ork. Performance consider ations Disk I/ O bandwidth is typically limit ed by the system b us speeds, the disk contr oll er, and the disks themselv es. The balance o f these hardw are limitations, as aî«ected by the so ftware conîÂÂguration, determine s the location o f the any bottl eneck is in the system. Sever al RAID levels oî«er impr oved performanc e relativ e to stand-al one disk performance. If disk thr oughput is res tricted because of a singl e disk contr oller, RAID can prob ably do littl e to impro ve performance until another c ontroll er is added. Conv ersely, if raw disk perf ormance is the bottl eneck, a tuned software RAID solution can dr amatically impr ove the thr oughput. The sl ower disk performance is, r elative t o the rest o f the system, the bett er RAID per formanc e will scale, because the sl owes t piece of the performanc e pipeline is being directl y addres sed by moving to RAID . ConîÂÂguring software RAID See the fol lowing sit es for additional inf ormation about conîÂÂguring softwar e R AID: â Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 7âÂÂSee the Storage Administration Guide at https:// acces s.redhat. com/ documentation/ en-US/Red_Hat_En terprise_Linux/7/html /S torage_Adminis tration_Guide/index.html â Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 6âÂÂSee the Storage Administration Guide at http :// docs.r edhat.c om/docs/ en- US/Red_Ha t_Enterprise_Linux/6/html /S torage_A dministration_Guide/index.html â Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 5âÂÂSee the Deployment Guide at http:// docs.redhat. com/docs/ en-US/ Red_Hat_Ent erprise_Linux/5/ html/Deploymen t_Guide/ ch-raid.h tml . â SLED 12âÂÂSee the Deployment Guide at https:// www.suse .com/documen tation/ sled-12/ book_sle_depl oyment/ data/ sec_ yast2_system_r aid.html . â SLED 11âÂÂSee the Deployment Guide at http:// www .suse.c om/documentation/ sled11/ book_sle_depl oyment/?page=/ documentation/ sled11/book_sle_depl oyment/ data/ book_sle_depl oyment.html . â Ubuntu 14.04 L TSâÂÂSee the Server Guide at https://help. ubuntu. com/l ts/ serverguide/ advanc ed- install ation.html or the Community Wiki at https://help .ubuntu. com/c ommunity /Installation/ Softwar eRAID . For mor e information about Open So urce and Linux at HP, go t o http://h10018. www1.hp. com/wwsolutions/ linux/index.html . Softwar e RAID solution 91
C System bo ard designat or s SFF work station system board de signators Designator Silk screen Componen t/Description E15 E15 BBR Crisis rec overy header /jumper E49 E49 PSWD Cl ear password he ader /jumper J9 RJ45/USB LAN/DUAL USB 3.0 J10 J10 USB2/USB3 Quad USB 3.0 J31 J31 X1PCIEXP1 PCIe3 x1 slot (bl ack) J32 J32 X1PCIEXP2 PCIe3 x1 slot (bl ack) J41 J41 X16PCIEXP PCIe3 x16 slot (bl ack) J42 J42 X4PCIEXP PCIe3 x16(4) sl ot (black) J63 J63 DISPLA Y PORT Dual-Mode DisplayPort c onnector J64 J64 DISPLA Y PORT DisplayPort connector J68 PS2 Mouse connect or stacked o ver k eyboard connect or J78 IN/ OUT Audio line in stack ed over audio line out J86 M.2 SSD M.2 connector JZ87/88 J Z87/88 Slo t1/4 PCIe x16 retention clip SW50 SW50 CMOS Clear CM OS switch/push b utton P1 PWR P ower supply, 6-pin ( white) P2 PWRCMD Pow er command, 6-pin (white) P3 PWRCPU Power supply, 4-pin ( white) P5 P5 PB/LED Fr ont power button/LED (black) P6 SPKR Internal s peaker ( white) P8 CPU F AN CPU fan header P23 FRONT AUD Front audio (blue ) P24 FRONT USB F ront I/ O USB ( yell ow) P52 COMB Serial port P124 HLCK Hood l ock solenoid (black) P125 HSENSE Hood sensor P150 Media int-Media (6-pin) P152 SD RDR USB 3.0 Media card r eader 92 Appendix C System boar d designators
Designator Silk screen Componen t/Description P26 FRONT USB3.0 Front I/O USB 3.0 (bl ue) P160 SA T APWR0 HDD power (black) XBT1 XBT1 BA T Battery holder XMM1 - XMM4 XMM1 - XMM4 DIMM1 - DIMM4 Memory slots XU1 XU1 CPU sock et T ower work station system bo ard designat or s Designator Silk screen Component E15 E15 Crisis reco very header /jumper E49 E49 Clear p assword header /jumper J9 J9 RJ/USB LAN/DUAL USB 2.0 J10 J10 QUAD USB Quad USB 3.0 J31 SLO T3 PCIe3 x4 PCIe3 x4 connector J33 SLO T1 PCIe3 x1 PCIe3 x1 connector J41 SLO T2 PCIe3 x16 PCIe3 x16 c onnector J42 SLO T4 PCIe3 x16 (4) PCIe3 x16 (4) connector J63 DP Dual -Mode DisplayPort c onnector J65 DVI DVI-D connector J68 J68 PS2 Stacked k eyboard/mo use connector J78 J78 T riple stack ed audio jacks J86 M.2 SSD M.2 connector J87/88 J87/88 Sl ot2/4 PCIe x16 ret ention clip MT G1-MT G10 N/ A Mounting holes P1 P1 Power suppl y connector (6-pin) P2 PWRCMD Power c ommand, white (6-pin) P3 P3 CPU PWR CPU power connect or (4-pin) P5 P5 Power b utton/HDD LED/P ower LED switch/Side acce ss panel sensor /T emperatur e header P6 SPKR Speak er P8 CPU F AN CPU fan header P11 CHF Fan Rear syst em fan P23 P23 FRONT AUD Fron t audio header P24 P24 FRONT USB Front panel USB header T ower work station system bo ard designat ors 93
Designator Silk screen Component P26 P26 FRONT USB3 Front panel USB3 he ader (blue) P52 CO MB Serial por t header P60-P62 SA T A0-SA T A2 SA T A connectors P63 SA T A3 SA T A/ eSA T A connector P70 EXT ST ONE card connect or P124 P124 HOOD LOCK Side access p anel solenoid lock header P125 HSENSE Hood sensor connector (3 pin) P129 TBT TBT connect or (2x4-pin) P150 Media int-Media connect or (6-pin) P152 Media USB 3.0 Media card reader P160 SA T A PWR0 SA T A Pow er connector (2x3 pin) SW50 SW50 CMOS Clear CM OS switch/push b utton XBT1 XBT1 BA T Battery holder XMM1 - XMM4 XMM1 - XMM4 DIMM1 - DIMM4 Memory slots XU1 XU1 P rimary CPU socket 94 Appendix C System boar d designators
Index A audible c odes 80 B beep codes 80 BIOS cle aring and resetting 83 BIOS RO M 17 booting op tions Ful l Boot 75 Quick Boot 75 C Cable manag ement 45 CMOS 82 components SFF 2 SFF front p anel 2 SFF re ar panel 3 tow er 8 tow er front panel 8 tow er rear panel 9 ConîÂÂguring RAID devices 88 maximum hard driv es all owed 88 SA T A R AID 89 Customer Sel f Repair 65 D Deskt op management 29 Al tiris Client Management Solutions 31 F ailSafe Boot B lock ROM 32 F ault notiîÂÂcation and r ecov ery 39 HP Client Manager So ftware 31 HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager 32 HPQFlash 32 Initial conîÂÂguration 30 progr ammable power b utton 40 Remot e ROM Flash 32 Remot e system ins tall 30 ROM Flash 32 Syst em Software Man ager 32 Updating softwar e 31 Work station security 33 Diagnostics 60 Diagnostics and tro ubleshoo ting Diagnosis guidelines 61 diagnostics and tro ubleshoo ting locating ID l abels 61 locating w arranty info 61 dimensions, worksta tion 14 DIMM conîÂÂgurations, supported 53 DIMM install ation order SFF worksta tion 54 T ower work station 55 E environmen tal speciîÂÂcations 14 error codes 80 messages 75 Expansion card sl ot identiîÂÂcation SFF Work station 48 T ower W orkstation 50 F î¯ashing LEDs 80 H HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) downl oading 74 L links Contact inf ormation for HP US 63 HP Chat Support 63 HP Customer Sel f Repair 65 M Memory DIMM install ation guidelines 53 N numeric error c odes 75 O Operating syst em setup 85 P Passw ord conîÂÂguration 82 Pow er supply Expansion card conîÂÂguration res trictions 47 power c onsumption 57 resetting 57 speciîÂÂcations 56 Product f eatur es Comput er components 4 ERP complianc e mode 16 Hyper- threading 17 Physical charact eristics 7, 13 SA T A Power Managemen t 17 Syst em board ar chitecture 6, 12 T urbo Boost 17 Product o verview 1 R Replacing c omponents Battery 45 cable manag ement 45 Component l ocations 5, 11 CPU (proc essor ) and CPU heatsink 46 expansion slo ts 47 guidelines 44 hard driv e 51 information and guideline s 41 Memory 53 power suppl y 56 Service consider ations 42 warnings and cautions 41 S SFF components 2 environmen tal speciîÂÂcations 14 front p anel components 2 re ar panel components 3 weights and dimensions 14 Index 95
speciîÂÂcations environmen tal 14 worksta tion 14 support advisories 63 befor e calling 60 calling 60 customer b ulletins 63 customer no tices 63 HP Chat Support 63 HP Support Cent er 63 online 63 security bull etins 63 Syst em board c omponents 5 Syst em board designa tors 92 Syst em management 16 T tow er components 8 environmen tal speciîÂÂcations 14 front p anel components 8 re ar panel components 9 weights and dimensions 14 troubl eshooing Customer Sel f Repair 65 suggestions 64 suggestions, a t startup 64 suggestions, during o peration 64 T roubl eshooting 60 troubl eshooting locating ID l abels 61 locating w arranty info 61 reso urces and t ools 63 U urls Contact inf ormation for HP US 63 HP Chat Support 63 HP Customer Sel f Repair 65 W weights, work station 14 Work station setup Ensuring proper v entilation 15 96 Index
Copyright Inf ormation é Cop yright 2015 HP Developmen t Company, L.P . First Edition: October 2015 Part number: 81947 5-001 Warran ty The information c ontained herein is subject to change without notic e. The only w arranties for HP products and services ar e set forth in the express w arranty statements ac companying such products and services. No thing herein should be c onstrued as constituting an additional warran ty . HP shall not be liabl e for technical or editorial err ors or omissions contained her ein. Not all f eatures ar e available in al l editions of Windows. This comput er may require upgr aded and/ or separa tely pur chased hardwar e, drivers, and/ or softwar e to tak e full advantage o f Windows functionality . See http://www .microsoft. com for details. Trademark Credits ENERG Y ST AR is a regis tered trademark o wned by the U .S. Environmental Pr otection Agency (EP A). Intel, C ore, Pentium, and X eon are trademarks are trademark s of Intel Corpor ation in the U.S. and other co untries. Windows is a U.S . register ed trademark of Microsoft C orporation. NVIDIA and the NVIDIA logo ar e trademarks and/ or regis tered trademark s of NVIDIA Corporation in the U .S. and other co untries.
About this guide This guide pro vides service and maintenanc e information, t echnical details, and conîÂÂguration guidance for your w orkstations. IMPORT ANT : Removal and replacemen t procedures are now av ailable in videos on the HP website. Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / sml . Guide topics Hardwar e overview on page 1 Syst em management on page 16 Component r eplacement information and guideline s on page 41 Diagnostics and tro ubleshooting on page 60 ConîÂÂguring passwor d security and resetting CMOS on page 82 ConîÂÂguring RAID devices on page 88 Syst em board designators on pag e 92 NO TE: View the HP Workst ation User Guide for y our worksta tion at http://www .hp. com/support/ worksta tion_manuals . iii
iv About this guide
T able o f con tents 1 Hardware overview ........................................................................................................................................ 1 HP Z240 SFF Work station components ................................................................................................................. 2 HP Z240 SFF Work station front panel ................................................................................................ 2 HP Z240 SFF Work station rear p anel .................................................................................................. 3 Chassis c omponents ............................................................................................................................ 4 Syst em board c omponents ................................................................................................................. 5 Syst em board ar chitecture .................................................................................................................. 6 Work station speciîÂÂcations .................................................................................................................. 7 HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents ............................................................................................................. 8 HP Z240 T ower W orkstation fr ont panel ............................................................................................ 8 HP Z240 T ower W orkstation r ear panel .............................................................................................. 9 Chassis c omponents .......................................................................................................................... 10 Syst em board c omponents ............................................................................................................... 11 Syst em board ar chitecture ................................................................................................................ 12 Work station speciîÂÂcations ................................................................................................................ 13 Product speciîÂÂcations ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Work station weights and dimensions .............................................................................................. 14 Environmen tal speciîÂÂcations ............................................................................................................ 14 Ensuring proper v entilation ................................................................................................................................. 15 2 System management ................................................................................................................................... 16 Pow er management and performance f eature s ................................................................................................. 16 ERP complianc e mode ....................................................................................................................... 16 Hyper - Threading T echnology (HTT) .................................................................................................. 17 SA T A Power Managemen t ................................................................................................................. 17 Intel T urbo Boost T echnology ........................................................................................................... 17 Non-Uniform Memory Acc ess (NUMA) .............................................................................................. 17 BIOS RO M ............................................................................................................................................................. 17 Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities ............................................................................................................................ 18 Using Comp uter Setup (F10) Utilities ................................................................................................ 18 Comput er SetupâÂÂMain ....................................................................................................................... 20 Comput er SetupâÂÂSecurity ............................................................................................................... 22 Comput er SetupâÂÂAdvanc ed ............................................................................................................. 24 Deskt op management ......................................................................................................................................... 29 Initial comput er conîÂÂguration and deplo yment ............................................................................... 30 Installing a r emote sys tem ............................................................................................................... 30 v
Cop ying a setup conîÂÂguration to another c omputer ....................................................................... 30 Updating and managing softwar e .................................................................................................... 31 HP Client Management Sol utions ..................................................................................................... 31 Al tiris Client Management Sol utions ................................................................................................. 31 HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager ........................................................................................................ 32 Syst em Software Man ager ................................................................................................................ 32 ROM Flash .......................................................................................................................................... 32 Remot e ROM Flash .......................................................................................................... 32 HPQFlash ......................................................................................................................... 32 F ailSafe Boot B lock ............................................................................................................................ 32 Rec overing the comp uter by using F ailSafe Boo t Block r ecov ery mode ........................ 33 Work station security ......................................................................................................................... 33 Asset tracking ................................................................................................................. 33 SA T A hard drive security ................................................................................................. 34 DriveLock ap plications ................................................................................. 34 Using DriveL ock ............................................................................................ 35 Passw ord security ........................................................................................................... 36 Establishing an administr ator passwor d using Comput er Setup (F10) Utility ............................................................................................................ 36 Establishing a power -on passw ord using Comput er Setup (F10) Utility ..... 37 Entering a po wer-on pas sword .................................................................... 37 Entering an adminis trator pas sword ........................................................... 38 National k eyboar d delimiter charact ers ...................................................... 38 Cle aring passwor ds ...................................................................................... 38 Chassis security .............................................................................................................. 39 Smart Cov er Sensor (option al) ..................................................................... 39 Side acc ess panel sol enoid lock ................................................................... 39 Cable l ock (op tional) ..................................................................................... 39 F ault notiîÂÂcation and r ecov ery ......................................................................................................... 39 EC C faul t prediction ......................................................................................................... 40 Thermal sensors ............................................................................................................. 40 Progr ammable pow er button (Windows onl y) .................................................................................. 40 Changing the power b utton conîÂÂguration (Windows onl y) ........................................... 40 3 Component replacemen t information and guidelines ...................................................................................... 41 Warnings and cautions ........................................................................................................................................ 42 Service consider ations ......................................................................................................................................... 42 T ools and softwar e requiremen ts ..................................................................................................... 42 El ectrostatic dischar ge (ESD) inf ormation ........................................................................................ 43 Product r ecycling ................................................................................................................................................. 44 Component r eplacement guidelines ................................................................................................................... 44 vi
Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 45 Cable manag ement ........................................................................................................................... 45 CPU (proc essor ) and CPU heatsink .................................................................................................... 46 Expansion slo ts ................................................................................................................................. 47 Card conîÂÂguration r estrictions for pow er supplies ........................................................ 47 Choosing an expansion card sl ot .................................................................................... 47 SFF worksta tion slot identiîÂÂcation and descrip tion ...................................................... 48 SFF worksta tion installation sequenc e recommendations ............................................ 49 T ower work station slo t identiîÂÂcation and description .................................................. 50 T ower work station install ation sequence rec ommendations ....................................... 51 Hard driv es and optical disc drive s ................................................................................................... 51 Handling hard driv es ....................................................................................................... 51 Remov al and replac ement tips ....................................................................................... 52 Drive instal lation and cabling scenarios ......................................................................... 52 SFF worksta tionsâÂÂSA T A cable c onnection guidelines ................................ 52 T ower work stationsâÂÂSA T A cable connection guidelines ............................ 52 Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 53 Supported DIMM conîÂÂgurations ..................................................................................... 53 BIOS errors and w arnings ............................................................................................... 53 DIMM install ation guidelines .......................................................................................... 53 SFF worksta tion DIMM installation or der ....................................................................... 54 T ower work station DIMM install ation order ................................................................... 55 Pow er supply ..................................................................................................................................... 56 Pow er supply speciîÂÂcations ........................................................................................... 56 Pow er consumption and hea t dissipation ...................................................................... 57 Resetting the pow er supply ............................................................................................ 57 Syst em board .................................................................................................................................... 57 Syst em cabling ................................................................................................................ 58 SFF worksta tion system cabling .................................................................. 58 T ower work station system cabling .............................................................. 59 4 Diagnostics and tro ubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 60 Calling support ..................................................................................................................................................... 60 Locating ID labels ................................................................................................................................................ 61 Locating w arranty information ........................................................................................................................... 61 Diagnosis guidelines ............................................................................................................................................ 61 Diagnosis at startup .......................................................................................................................... 61 Diagnosis during operation ............................................................................................................... 62 T roubl eshooting check list ................................................................................................................................... 62 HP troubl eshooting r esourc es and tools ............................................................................................................. 63 Online support ................................................................................................................................... 63 vii
HP Support Cent er .......................................................................................................... 63 HP Chat Support .............................................................................................................. 63 Customer A dvisories, Customer and Security Bull etins, and Customer No tices ........... 63 Product Ch ange NotiîÂÂcations ....................................................................... 64 Helpful hin ts ...................................................................................................................................... 64 At s tartup ........................................................................................................................ 64 During operation ............................................................................................................. 64 Customer Sel f Repair ...................................................................................................... 65 T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions ........................................................................................................... 66 Solving minor pr oblems .................................................................................................................... 66 Solving h ard drive pr oblems ............................................................................................................. 67 Solving dis play probl ems .................................................................................................................. 69 Solving audio pr oblems ..................................................................................................................... 71 Solving prin ter probl ems ................................................................................................................... 72 Solving po wer supply pr oblems ........................................................................................................ 72 T esting pow er supply ...................................................................................................... 72 Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) ........................................................................................................... 73 Downl oading HP PC Hardwar e Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB devic e .................................................. 74 POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes ....................................................... 74 POST numeric c odes and text me ssages .......................................................................................... 75 Interpr eting system validation diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes ................................................ 80 5 ConîÂÂguring password security and resetting CMO S ........................................................................................ 82 Prep aring to conîÂÂgure passwor ds ...................................................................................................................... 82 Resetting the pas sword jumper .......................................................................................................................... 82 Cle aring and resetting the BIOS ........................................................................................................................... 83 Appendix A Linux technical notes .................................................................................................................... 85 Syst em RAM ......................................................................................................................................................... 85 Audio .................................................................................................................................................................... 85 Network cards ...................................................................................................................................................... 86 Hyper - Threading T echnology .............................................................................................................................. 86 NVIDIA Graphics W orkstations ............................................................................................................................. 86 AMD Graphics W orkstations ................................................................................................................................ 87 Appendix B ConîÂÂguring RAID devices ............................................................................................................... 88 RAID hard drive maximum and as sociated st orage contr oll er options .............................................................. 88 Supported RAID conîÂÂgurations ........................................................................................................................... 89 ConîÂÂguring Intel SA T A RAID ................................................................................................................................. 89 ConîÂÂguring system BIO S ................................................................................................................... 89 viii
ConîÂÂguring RAID with the Intel utility .............................................................................................. 90 Softwar e RAID solution ........................................................................................................................................ 90 Softwar e RAID considerations .......................................................................................................... 90 Performanc e considerations ............................................................................................................. 91 ConîÂÂguring softwar e RAID ................................................................................................................ 91 Appendix C System board designat ors ............................................................................................................. 92 SFF worksta tion system boar d designators ....................................................................................................... 92 T ower work station system bo ard designat ors ................................................................................................... 93 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 95 ix
x
1 Hardw are overview This chapt er presents an o verview of works tation hardwar e components. T opics HP Z240 SFF Works tation components on page 2 HP Z240 T ower Worksta tion components on page 8 Product speciîÂÂcations on pag e 14 Ensuring proper v entilation on page 15 1
HP Z240 SFF W orkstation c omponents This section describes the HP Z240 Small F orm F actor (SFF) Work station components. For c omplete and curr ent information on sup ported acce ssories and components f or the comput er, see http://p artsur fer .hp .c om . HP Z240 SFF W orkstation fron t panel 1 Power b utton 6 USB 2.0 port, charging (1, black) 2 HDD LED 7 USB 2.0 port (1, black) 3 Optional op tical disc drive (not shown) 8 USB 3.0 ports (2) (blue) 4 Optional har d disk drive (not shown) 9 Microphone or he adphones connector (softwar e selectable, def ault mode is microphone) 5 Optional media car d reader (shown) 10 Headphones connect or 2 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
HP Z240 SFF W orkstation rear panel 1 Power c ord connect or 6 USB 3.0 ports (6) (blue) 2 Audio line-in connect or (blue) 7 Serial port 3 RJâÂÂ45 network connector 8 DisplayP ort (DP) (3) 4 PS/2 mouse c onnector (green) 9 PS/2 k eyboard c onnector (purple) 5 Audio line-out connect or (green) NOTE: The labels for the r ear panel connectors use industry-s tandard icons and col ors. NO TE: The DP ports are not supported when the sys tem is conîÂÂgured with Intelî Xeon E3-12x0 v5 pr ocessors. For al l other processors, these DP ports ar e disabled by def ault when a discrete gr aphics card is install ed. NO TE: Simultaneous usage o f integrated Int el HD graphics and discrete gr aphics cards (in order to drive mor e than three displays) can be en abled using the C omputer (F10) Setup Utility . Howe ver, HP recommends using onl y discrete graphics cards when attaching f our or more displays. HP Z240 SFF Work station components 3
Chassis c omponents For c omplete and curr ent information on sup ported acce ssories and components f or the comput er, go to http:// partsur fer .hp .c om . The fol lowing image shows the c omponents of a typical SFF comp uter layo ut. Drive conîÂÂgurations can vary . Item Description Item Description 1 Acc ess panel 6 Slim optical drive 2 Power sup ply 7 Front bez el 3 Chassis 8 Airî¯ow guide 4 Syst em board 9 Optional memory card r eader or second hard driv e 5 F an baî±e 10 Hard drive 4 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
System board c omponents The fol lowing il lustration and tabl e identify the system boar d components f or the SFF workstation. I/O SA T A P ower 1 Dual-Mode Dis playPort 16 USB 3.1 (op tion) 26 Battery 2 DisplayP ort SA T A 27 Proc essor power 3 Front audio 17 AHCI 6Gb/ s 28 Fron t power button/LED 4 Front s peak er PCI/PCIe 29 Main power 5 Front USB 2.0 18 PCIe3 x16 30 Pow er COMM 6 Front USB 3.0 19 PCIe3 x1 31 SA T A power 7 Internal USB 2.0 20 PCIe3 x1 Security 8 Internal USB 3.0 21 PCIe3 x16 (4) 32 Chassis sol enoid lock 9 Keyboar d / mouse 22 Z turbo drive LED (E19) 33 Hood sensor 10 Network / re ar USB 3.0 NO TE: For rel ated expansion card slot in formation, see Expansion slo ts on page 47 Service 11 Thunderbolt ( option) M.2 34 Cle ar CMOS button 12 Rear audio 23 PCIe3 x4 35 ME/ AMT î¯ash override 13 Rear USB 3.0 Cooling 36 Passw ord jumper 14 Serial 24 Proc essor fan 15 Serial (op tion) 25 Rear f an HP Z240 SFF Work station components 5
System board architecture The fol lowing îÂÂgure shows the typical syst em board bl ock diagram. NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe lanes supported. 6 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
W orkstation speciîÂÂcations SFF Processor technology Intel Series C236 chipset: â Support for the Intelî X eonî Proc essor E3 v5 Famil y, sixth-generation Int el Core⢠pr ocessors up to 95 W, or Intel P entiumî processors â Integra ted 2-channel memory control ler â Microar chitecture impro vements â Integra ted graphics (some models) â Advanced V ector Ext ensions (AVX) t o increase î¯oating point performanc e â Intel DMI3 int erface connecting the pr ocessor t o the I/O contr oller Power supply â 240 W, 92% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T ARî Version 6.1 r equirements â 200 W, 85% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T AR Version 6.1 r equirements â Supports European Union ERP L ot 6 tier 2 power limit of l ess than 0.5W in oî« mode Memory technology â Dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) based on DDR4 2133 MHz t echnology â Supports error checking and corr ecting (ECC) and non-E CC DIMMs â Tw o direct-attach memory channels enabl e low-lat ency access and f ast data transfer f or improved performance â Up to 64 GB syst em memory (16 GB DIMMs) â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB EC C unbuî«ered DIMM â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB non EC C unbuî«ered DIMM Graphics cards Supports: â Up to PCIe Gen 3 bus s peeds. â PCIe x16 cards ar e supported in both x16 mechanical slo ts. Multiple gr aphics cards are support ed, provided their t otal power consump tion is less than 45W . â Up to three dis plays with integrat ed Intel HD graphics ( depending on proces sor type) â The total number o f displays supported depends on the number of gr aphics cards present, and the number of outputs on e ach card. â Windows 10 supports display outp ut from both int egrated graphics capabl e proces sors and discrete graphics cards. This f eature is enabl ed by defaul t, and can be changed through the C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . NOTE: Most supported Int el Core pr ocessors pro vide Intel HD Graphics 510/530; Intel X eon proces sors with model designations that end in "___5" pr ovide Intel HD Graphics P530. NOTE: T o drive more than three dis plays, use Comput er Setup (F10) Utility to intermix integr ated Intel HD graphics and discret e graphics cards (with f our or more displays, HP r ecommends using only discr ete graphics cards ). I/O technol ogy â RAID conîÂÂgurations for SA T A RAID levels 0, 1 â Tw o external and one intern al USB 2.0 ports (includes front char ging port) â Eight extern al USB 3.0 ports and one internal USB 3.0 port â Three Displa yPort 1.2 connectors â Serial header that can be used with an op tional PCI bulkhead connect or â Native M.2 connect or with PCIe x4 interface HP Z240 SFF Work station components 7
HP Z240 T o wer W orkstation c omponents This section describes the HP Z240 T ower Works tation components. For c omplete and curr ent information on sup ported acce ssories and components f or the comput er, see http:// partsur fer .hp .c om . HP Z240 T ower W orkstation fron t panel 1 Optional har d disk / optical disc drive (not shown) 7 USB 2.0 ports (1) (black) 2 Optional har d disk / optical disc drive (not shown) 8 USB 3.0 ports (2) (blue) 3 Optical disc drive 9 Microphone or he adphones connector (softwar e selectable, def ault mode is microphone) 4 Power butt on 10 Headphone connect or 5 Hard disk drive activity light 11 Optional media car d reader (shown) 6 USB 2.0 port, charging (1, black) 8 Chapt er 1 Hardwar e overview
HP Z240 T ower W orkstation rear panel 1 Power c ord connect or 8 Audio line-out connect or (green) 2 PS/2 k eyboard c onnector (purple) 9 PS/2 mouse c onnector (green) 3 USB 2.0 ports (2) (black) 10 RJ-45 network connector 4 Display P ort (DP) connectors (2) 11 Cabl e lock sl ot 5 DVI-D connect or 12 Padl ock loop 6 USB 3.0 ports (4) (blue) 13 Audio line-in connector (bl ue) 7 Microphone c onnector (pink) NOTE: The labels for the r ear panel connectors use industry-s tandard icons and col ors. NO TE: The DP and DVI-D ports are not sup ported when the system is conîÂÂgured with Intel X eon E3-12x0 v5 processors. Also, if a discret e graphics card is install ed the se ports are disabled b y default. NO TE: Simultaneous usage o f integrated Int el HD graphics and discrete gr aphics cards (in order to drive mor e than three displays) can be en abled using the C omputer (F10) Setup Utility . Howe ver, HP recommends using onl y discrete graphics cards when attaching f our or more displays. HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents 9
Chassis c omponents The fol lowing îÂÂgure shows the chas sis components of a typical t ower worksta tion layout. Drive conîÂÂgurations can vary . Item Description Item Description 1 Power suppl y 6 Slim optical drive 2 Side access p anel 7 Hard drive 3 Cooler 8 Optional second o ptical drive 4 System boar d 9 Optional solid state drive 5 Chassis 10 Front bez el 10 Chapter 1 Hardw are ov erview
System board c omponents The fol lowing il lustration and tabl e identify the system boar d components f or the tower work station. I/O SA T A Power 1 Dual-Mode Dis playPort 15 AHCI 6Gb/ s 25 Battery 2 DVI video PCI/PCIe 26 Proc essor power 3 Front audio 16 Z turbo drive LED (E19) 27 Front power butt on/LED 4 Front s peak er 17 PCIe3 x1 28 Main power 5 Front USB 2.0 18 PCIe3 x16 29 SA T A power 6 Front USB 3.0 19 PCIe3 x4 30 Power C OMM 7 Internal USB 2.0 20 PCIe3 x16 (4) Security 8 Internal USB 3.0 21 PCI (op tional) 31 Chassis sol enoid lock 9 Keyboar d / mouse NOTE: For related exp ansion card slot in formation, see Expansion slo ts on page 47 32 Hood sensor 10 Network / re ar USB 2.0 M.2 Service 11 Thunderbolt ( optional) 22 PCIe3 x4 33 Cle ar CMOS button 12 Rear audio Cooling 34 ME / AMT î¯ash o verride 13 Rear USB 3.0 23 Proc essor fan 35 Passwor d jumper 14 Serial (op tional) 24 Rear f an HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents 11
System board architecture NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe lanes supported. 12 Chapter 1 Hardw are ov erview
W orkstation speciîÂÂcations T ower Processor technology Intel Series C236 chipset: â Support for the Intel X eon Proc essor E3 v5 Famil y or sixth-generation Int el Core pr ocessors up to 95 W â Integra ted 2-channel memory control ler â Microar chitecture impro vements â Integra ted graphics (some models) â Advanced V ector Ext ensions (AVX) t o increase î¯oating point performanc e â Intel DMI3 int erface connecting the pr ocessor t o the I/O contr oller Power supply â 400 W, 92% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T AR Version 6.1 r equirements â 280 W, 90% eî°cient, compatibl e with ENERGY S T AR Version 6.1 r equirements â Supports European Union ERP L ot 6 tier2 power limit of l ess than 0.5 W in oî« mode Memory technology â Dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) based on DDR4 2133MHz t echnology â Supports error checking and corr ecting (ECC) and non-E CC DIMMs â Tw o direct-attach memory channels enabl e low-lat ency access and f ast data transfer â Up to 64 GB syst em memory (16 GB DIMMs) â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB EC C unbuî«ered DIMM â 2133 MHz 4, 8, 16 GB non EC C unbuî«ered DIMM Graphics cards Supports: â Up to PCIe Gen 3 bus s peeds. â PCIe x16 cards ar e supported in both x16 mechanical slo ts. Multiple gr aphics cards are support ed, provided their t otal power consump tion is less than 45W . â Up to three dis plays with integrat ed Intel HD graphics ( depending on proces sor type). â The total number o f displays supported depends on the number of gr aphics cards present, and the number of outputs on e ach card. â Windows 10 supports display outp ut from both int egrated graphics capabl e proces sors and discrete graphics cards. This f eature is enabl ed by defaul t, and can be changed through the C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . NOTE: Most supported Int el Core pr ocessors pro vide Intel HD Graphics 510/530; Intel X eon proces sors with model designations that end in "___5" pr ovide Intel HD Graphics P530. NOTE: T o drive more than three dis plays, use Comput er Setup (F10) Utility to intermix integr ated Intel HD graphics and discret e graphics cards (with f our or more displays, HP r ecommends using only discr ete graphics cards ). I/O technol ogy â RAID conîÂÂgurations for SA T A RAID levels 0, 1 â Supports eSA T A (3.0 Gbps) at only one SA T A por t (P3) using an optional adap ter â Four ext ernal and two internal USB 2.0 ports â Six external and one in ternal USB 3.0 port â Tw o DisplayPort 1.2 connect ors â One DVI-D connect or â Serial header that can be used with an op tional PCI bulkhead connect or HP Z240 T ower W orkstation c omponents 13
T ower â Native M.2 connect or with PCIe x4 interface Product speciîÂÂcations W orkstation weights and dimensions Characteristic HP Z240 SFF HP Z240 T ower Weight Standar d conîÂÂguration 6.7 k g (14.86 lb.) 9.4 k g (20.79 lb) Minimum conîÂÂguration 5.7 k g (12.66 lb) 8.6 kg (18.95 lb ) Maximum conîÂÂguration 7.7 k g (16.93 lb) 11.9 kg (26.20 lb ) Chassis dimensions T ower conîÂÂguration Height 33.8 cm (13.3 in) 39.9 cm (15.7 in) Width 10.0 cm (3.95 in) 17.0 cm (6.7 in) Depth 38.1 cm (15.0 in) 44.2 cm (17.4 in) Chassis dimensions Converted deskt op conîÂÂguration Height 10.0 cm (3.95 in) 17.0 cm (6.7 in) Width 33.8 cm (13.3 in) 39.9 cm (15.7 in) Depth 38.1 cm (15.0 in) 44.2 cm (17.4 in) Envir onmental speciîÂÂcations Characteristic HP Z240 SFF and Z240 T ower Workstations Temperature Operating : 5ðC to 35ðC (40ðF t o 95ðF) Non-operating : -40ðC to 60ðC (-40ðF t o 140ðF) NOTE: Derate b y 1ðC (1.8ðF) for every 305 m (1,000 ft) altitude o ver 1,524 m (5,000 ft). Humidity Operating : 8% to 85% r elative humidity, non-condensing Non-operating : 8% to 90% r elative humidity, non-condensing Al titude Operating: 0 to 3,048 m (10,000 ft) Non-operating : 0 to 9,144 m (30,000 ft) Shock Operating : ý-sine: 40g, 2-3ms Non-operating : â ý-sine: 160 cm/ s, 2-3ms (~100 g) â square: 422 cm/ s, 20 g NOTE: Val ues repre sent individual shock events and do not indicat e repetitive shock ev ents. Vibration Operating Random : 0.5 g (rms), 5-300 Hz Non-Operating : random: 2.0 g (rms), 10-500 Hz NOTE: Val ues do not indicate c ontinuous vibration. 14 Chapter 1 Hardw are ov erview
Ensuring pro per ventilation Pro per ventilation f or the system is important for work station operation. F oll ow these guidelines: â Operat e the workstation on a stur dy, lev el surface. â Pro vide at le ast 15.24 cm (6 inches) of cl earanc e at the front and back o f the workstation. (W orkstation models vary .) â Be sure that the ambien t air temperatur e falls within the envir onmental speciîÂÂcations listed in this documen t. NOTE: The ambient upper limit of 35ðC (95ðF) is onl y good up to 1524 m (5000 ft) el evation. Ther e is a 1ðC (33.8ðF) per 304.8 m (1000 f t) derating abo ve 1524 m (5000 ft). So, at 3,048 m (10,000 ft), the upper ambient air temper ature limit is 30ðC (86ðF). â For cabinet instal lation, be sure tha t adequate cabinet ventila tion and the ambient temperatur e within the cabinet doe s not ex ceed speciîÂÂed limits. â Never r estrict the incoming or o utgoing airî¯ow of the w orkstation by bl ocking any vents or air intak es, as sho wn in the fol lowing îÂÂgure. Ensuring proper v entilation 15
2 System man agement This section describes the tools and utilitie s that provide sys tem management f or the workstation. T opics Power man agement and performance fe atures on page 16 BIOS ROM on pag e 17 Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities on page 18 Deskto p management on page 29 P ower management and performance fe atures ERP compliance mode This comput er provide s ERP compliance mode capability . When enabled, the c omputer shuts do wn to the low est possibl e power stat e. The comput er must then be turned on with the power butt on. One of the eî«ects is that "wak e on L AN" is disabled. When disabled, the c omputer pow ers down conven tionall y . Enabling ERP compliance mode 1. Press F10 during startup. 2. Using the arrow k eys, select the Advanced > P ower Management Options , and then select S5 Maximum Power Savings . 3. Select Main > Save Change and Exit, and then press en ter to acc ept the change. 4. If using Windows 8 or Windows 8.1, boot to Windows and sear ch in the Start Menu for the setting Choose what the power buttons do. Uncheck T urn on fast startup (recommended) . If the checkbox is not a vailable, sel ect Change settings that are currently unavailable at the top of the windo w. If using Windows 10, use the taskbar sear ch îÂÂeld to search f or Power Options. Sel ect Choose what the power button does , then sel ect Turn on fas t startup (recommended) . Disabling ERP compliance mode 1. Press F10 during startup. 2. Using the arrow k eys, select Advanced > P ower Management Options , then clear S5 Maximum Power Savings . 3. Select Main > Save Change and Exit, and then press en ter to acc ept the change. 4. If using Windows 8 or Windows 8.1, boot to Windows and sear ch in the Start Menu for the setting Choose what the power buttons do. Check T urn on fast startup (recommended) . If the check box is not a vailable, sel ect Change settings that are currently unavailable at the top of the windo w. If using Windows 10, use the taskbar sear ch îÂÂeld to search f or Power Options. Sel ect Choose what the power button does , then sel ect Turn on fas t startup (recommended) . 16 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
Hyper- Threading Technol ogy (HT T) This comput er supports HTT, an Intel-pr oprietary technol og y that impr oves pr ocessor perf ormance through paral lelization of c omputations (doing mul tipl e tasks at once). The operating sys tem tre ats an HTT -enabl ed proces sor as two virtual proces sors, and shares the work load between them when possibl e. This featur e requir es that the operating sys tem support multipl e proc essors and be speciîÂÂcally optimiz ed for HTT . Use Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility to enabl e HTT . Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to determine if y our CPU supports HTT . SA T A Po wer Management SA T A Power Managemen t enables or disabl es SA T A bus and/ or devic e power management. Intel T urbo Boost Technol ogy Y our workstation supports Int elî Turbo Boos t T echnology . This fe ature enabl es the CPU to run at a higher than normal r ate. When al l CPU core s are not nec essary for the work load, inactiv e cores ar e turned oî« and power is divert ed to the active c ores to incr ease their performance . T urbo Boost is enabl ed and disabled with Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to determine if y our CPU supports T urbo Boost. Non-Uniform Memory Acces s (NUMA) Non-uniform memory acc ess (NUMA) is avail able on some works tations. NUMA can improv e memor y bandwidth and lat enc y for mul ti-proc ess or mul ti-thre aded applications or workl oads. Observed performanc e impro vements depend on the operating sys tem, customer w orkl oad, system conîÂÂguration, and the degr ee to which the applications used are de signed to be NUMA-aware/eî°cient. NUMA requir es that both pr ocessor sock ets be popul ated. Instal led memory should be b alanced between both proc essors for maximum performanc e. NUMA is enabled if Memory Node Int erlea ve is disabled in the syst em BIOS. T o do this, press F10 during startup to ent er Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . Select Adv anced > Chipset/Memory . Use the arrow k eys t o set Memory Node Interleave t o Disable. Pre ss F10 to exit the menu, and then sel ect Main > Save Changes and Exit . Y our change tak es eî«ect when the comput er restarts. BIOS R OM The BIOS RO M is a coll ection of machine language applications s tored as îÂÂrmware in R OM. It includes functions such as Pow er-On Sel f- T est (POST), PCI devic e initialization, Plug and Pl ay support, power management, and C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to re view the lates t BIOS ROM speciîÂÂcations. BIOS RO M 17
C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities Use Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility to do the f ollowing: â Change settings from the de faults or r estor e the settings to defaul t val ues. â View the syst em conîÂÂguration, including settings for pr ocessor, gr aphics, memor y, audio, st orage, communications, and inp ut devices. â Modify the boot order o f bootable de vices such as har d drives, optical driv es, or USB î¯ash media devices. â (Windows 7 onl y) Establish an Ownership T ag, the tex t of which is display ed each time the system is turned on or res tarted. â Enter the As set T ag or property identiîÂÂcation number assigned by the c ompany to this c omputer . â Enable the po wer -on password pr ompt during syst em restarts (warm boo ts) as well as during po wer -on. â Establish an administr ator passwor d that con trols acc ess to the C omputer Setup (F10) Utility and the settings described in this section. â Establish minimum requir ements for v alid passwords, incl uding length and requir ed types of charact ers. â Secure int egrated I/ O functionality, including the serial, USB, or audio, or embedded NIC, so tha t they cannot be used until they ar e unsecured. â Enable or disabl e diî«erent types of boot so urces. â ConîÂÂgure fe atures such as Secure Boo t, power management, virtualization support, and language and k eyboard type used in Setup and POS T . â Replicat e the system setup by saving sys tem conîÂÂguration informa tion on a USB device and re storing it on one or more c omputers. â Enable or disabl e DriveLock security or secur ely er ase a hard drive ( when supported by drive ). Using C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities Comput er Setup can be acc essed only b y turning the comput er on or restarting the syst em. T o acces s the Comput er Setup Utilities menu, compl ete the fol lowing s teps: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. Repe atedly pr ess F10 when the monit or light turns on to acc ess the utility . Y ou can also press Esc t o a menu that all ows you t o acces s diî«erent options availabl e at startup, including the C omputer Setup utility . NO TE: If you do not pr ess F10 at the appr opriate time, yo u must restart the c omputer and again repe atedl y press F10 when the monit or light turns green to ac cess the utility . 3. A choice o f four headings ap pears in the Comput er Setup Utilities menu: Main, Security, Advanced, and UEFI Drivers. NO TE: Selecting UEFI Drivers r estarts the comput er into the 3rd p art y option R OM management application. Y ou can acce ss this application directl y by pr essing F3 during startup. 4. Use the arr ow (left and right) k eys t o select the appr opriate heading. U se the arrow (up and do wn) ke ys to sel ect the option yo u want, then pres s Enter. T o return to the Comp uter Setup Utilities menu, pre ss Esc . 5. T o appl y and save changes, sel ect Main > Save Changes and Exit. 18 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
â If you h ave made changes that y ou do not wan t applied, select Ignore Changes and Exit. â T o res tore settings fr om the Advanced and Main menus t o original values, sel ect Apply F actory Defaul ts and Exit . â T o res tore settings fr om the Advanced and Main menus t o those previousl y saved b y Save Custom Defaul ts , select Apply Cus tom Defaul ts and Exit . If no custom def aults hav e been saved, then fact or y defaul ts are used. NOTE: Settings in the Security menu are no t modiîÂÂed by Apply Defaul ts . Those values ar e reset b y Restore Security Settings t o Fact ory Defaul ts at the bottom o f the Security menu. NOTE: Not al l settings shown in the foll owing sections are av ailable f or all models CAUTION: Do NOT turn the c omputer pow er OFF while the BIOS is saving the C omputer Setup (F10) change s because the settings coul d become c orrupted. It is saf e to turn oî« the comput er only aft er exiting the F10 Setup screen. Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 19
Computer SetupâÂÂMain NOTE: Support for speciîÂÂc C omputer Setup options ma y vary depending on the hardwar e conîÂÂguration. T able 2-1 Computer SetupâÂÂMain Option Description System Information Lists all information in f ollo wing list if Advanced System Information is sel ected. Lists small er subset if Basic System Information is sel ected. â Product name â Install ed memory size â Proc essor type â Proc essor cache size (L1/L2/L3) â Proc essor speed â MicroCode R evision â Proc essor Step ping â Memory Speed â DIMM size (f or each install ed module) â Syst em BIOS version â ME Firmware v ersion (Intel only ) â Video BIOS version â Super I/O Firmw are version â Born On Date â Serial Number â SKU number â UUID (Universall y Unique IdentiîÂÂer) â Asset T racking Number â Featur e Byte â Build ID â Product F amily â Syst em Board ID â Syst em Board CT â Integra ted MAC Addre ss System Diagnostics If the har d drive has the HP Advanc ed Diagnostics installed, the ap plication will launch. If HP Advanc ed Diagnostics is not instal led, then a basic version buil t into the BIOS wil l provide the capability to perf orm the foll owing functions: â Memory T est â Hard Drive Check â Language Update System BIOS Lets y ou update the syst em BIOS from www .hp.c om or another network server, from a r emovable USB drive, or from a îÂÂle l ocated on the har d drive. â âÂÂCheck HP . com for BIOS Updat esâ or âÂÂCheck the Network for BIO S Updatesâ 20 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-1 Computer SetupâÂÂMain (continued) The string that appe ars here depends on the setting in âÂÂBIOS Update Pr eferenc esâÂÂ. â Lock BIOS V ersion If this option is check ed, the system is l ocked t o the current BIOS version and updat es are not all owed. â BIOS Update P referenc es All ows the administrat or to select the sour ce of network update s (www.hp .com or ano ther network server) and al lows conîÂÂguration of a periodic check f or updates, including policies f or: â Check for update s and prompt the user to ac cept or r eject the update at that time â Check for update s and install all new v ersions â Check for update s and install only ne w versions marked important â Network ConîÂÂguration Settings â Update BIOS Using L ocal Media Lets you ac cess îÂÂles on either USB st orage or the hard driv e. The HP BIOS Update and Rec overy application included in BIOS So ftpaqs at www.hp .com wil l copy the BIOS îÂÂle t o the correct l ocation on the hard driv e or USB device. System IDs Lets you set the f ollo wing values: â Asset T racking Number â Ownership T ag Replicated Setup Backup current settings to USB de vice Saves syst em conîÂÂguration to a formatt ed USB î¯ash media device. Restore current settings fr om USB device Rest ores system conîÂÂguration fr om a USB î¯ash media device. Save Custom De faults Saves the curr ent system conîÂÂguration settings as the custom de fault set. Apply Custom Def aults and Exit Applies the cust om default settings to the c omputer after r ebooting. Does not appl y to op tions in the Security menu. Apply F actory Defaul ts and Exit Rest ores the fact ory system conîÂÂguration settings to the comput er after rebooting . Does not apply t o options in the Security menu. Ignore Changes and Exit Exits Comput er Setup without applying or saving an y changes. Save Changes and Exit Sa ves changes to curr ent system conîÂÂguration, exits C omputer Setup, and reboo ts. Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 21
Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity NOTE: Support for speciîÂÂc C omputer Setup options ma y vary depending on the hardwar e conîÂÂguration. T able 2-2 Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity Option Description Set up BIOS Administrator P assword Lets you set and en able a BIOS administrat or password, which incl udes the foll owing privileges: â Manage other BIOS users â Full ac cess t o BIOS policy and settings â Unlock the c omputer when other BIOS users fail the pr eboot authentication. NOTE: Creating a BIO S user disables the F ast Boot option. NOTE: If the passwor d is set, it is required to ch ange Computer Setup op tions, update the BIOS, and mak e changes to certain pl ug and play settings under Windows. Change BIOS Administrator P assword (This selection is active only if a BIOS administrat or password is set.) Lets you ch ange the BIOS administrator p assword. Y ou must know the curr ent passwor d to be able to ch ange it. Password P olicies Let you set the guideline s for a valid passwor d. Options include: â Passwor d minimum length â Require s at least one symbol â Require s at least one number â Require s at least one upper case char acter â Require s at least one l ower case charact er â All ow spaces Clear Pas sword Jumper Select âÂÂHonorâ to al low or âÂÂIgnore â to not all ow the absence of the p assword jumper to cl ear the passwor ds at boot up . Default is âÂÂHonorâÂÂ. Security ConîÂÂguration TPM Embedded Security â TPM Device Lets you set the T rust ed Platform Modul e as available or hidden. â TPM State Select t o enable the TPM. â TPM Clear Select t o reset the TPM to an uno wned state. Aft er the TPM is clear ed, it is also turned oî«. T o temporaril y suspend TPM oper ations, turn the TPM oî« instead o f clearing it. CAUTION: Clearing the TPM r esets it to fact ory defaults and turns it oî«. Y ou wil l lose all cr eated k eys and data prot ected by those k eys. BIOS Sure Start â Verify Boot Block on e very Boot Select t o check validity of boot block r egion each boot. If not sel ected, boot bl ock region will be validated on po wer cycles. 22 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-2 Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity (continued) â Data Recovery P olicy Select â Automaticâ or âÂÂManualâ t o set data recov ery polic y . âÂÂManualâ lets y ou select whether or not t o execut e recov ery of a corrupted r egion if it is detected. Dynamic Runtime Scanning of Boo t Block VeriîÂÂes the integrity of the BIO S boot block region se veral times each hour whil e the system is running. Set Up BIOS Power -On Password Lets you set and en able a BIOS power -on passwor d. The power-on pas sword promp t appears after a power cycl e or reboot. If the user does not en ter the correct po wer-on passw ord, the unit will not boo t. Change BIOS Power -On Password (This selection is active only if a BIOS po wer-on passwor d is set.) Lets you ch ange the BIOS power -on password. Y ou must know the curr ent passwor d to be able to ch ange it. DriveLock Allows y ou to assign or modify a mast er or user password f or hard drives. When this f eature is enabl ed, the user is prompt ed to pro vide one of the DriveLock passw ords during POST . If neither is succes sfully enter ed, the hard drive will r emain inacce ssible until one of the pas swords is succ essfull y provided during a subsequent col d-boot sequence. NOTE: This selection wil l only appear when at l east one drive that sup ports the DriveLock featur e is attached to the syst em. CAUTION: Be aware that these settings tak e place immediat ely . A save is not neces sary . CAUTION: Be sure to document the Driv eLock password. L osing a DriveLock passwor d will render a driv e permanently l ocked. After y ou select a drive, the f ollowing op tions are availabl e: Set DriveLock Master P assword . Sets the driveâ s mast er password but does no t enable DriveL ock. Enable DriveLock . Sets the drive âÂÂs user p assword and enabl es DriveLock. Secure Erase Lets you sel ect a hard drive t o complet ely erase. Once a har d drive has been erased with a progr am that utilizes Secure Er ase îÂÂrmware commands, no îÂÂle reco very program, partition r ecovery progr am, or other data reco very method will be able t o extract data from the drive . Save/Rest ore MBR of the system hard drive NOTE: Windows 8.1 and Windows 10 syst ems are generall y not formatt ed to include an MBR. Inst ead they use GUID Partition T able (GPT) f ormat, which better supports large h ard drives. Enabling this fea ture will save the Mas ter Boot Rec ord (MBR) of the system h ard drive. If the MBR gets changed, the user will be pr ompted to r estor e the MBR. Default is disabl ed. The MBR contains inf ormation needed to succ essfull y boot from a disk and to ac cess the data s tored on the disk. Master Boot R ecord Security may pr event unintention al or malicious changes to the MBR, such as those caused by some viruses or by the inc orrect use of c ertain disk utilities. It also allows y ou to rec over the "last known good" MBR, sho uld changes to the MBR be det ected when the system is r estarted. NOTE: Most operating sys tems contr ol access t o the MBR of the current bootabl e disk; the BIOS cannot prev ent changes that may occur whil e the operating syst em is running. Rest ores the backup Mas ter Boot Rec ord to the current boo table disk. Defaul t is disabled. Only appe ars if all of the fol lowing conditions ar e true: â MBR security is enabled â A backup c opy of the MBR has been pre viously sav ed â The current boo table disk is the same disk from which the back up copy was sav ed Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 23
T able 2-2 Computer SetupâÂÂSecurity (continued) CAUTION: Restoring a pr eviously sav ed MBR after a disk utility or operating syst em has modiîÂÂed the MBR, may cause the data on the disk to bec ome inacces sible. Only r estor e a previousl y saved MBR if you are conîÂÂdent that the curr ent bootable disk' s MBR has been corrup ted or infect ed with a virus. Smart Cover Cover L ock (Lock/Unlock) Defaul t is âÂÂUnlockâÂÂ. Cover Remo val Sensor (Disabled/Notify user / Administrator pas sword) Lets you disabl e the cov er sensor or conîÂÂgure what action is taken if the c omputer co ver was remo ved. Defaul t is âÂÂDisabledâÂÂ. NOTE: Notify user alerts the user with a POS T error on the îÂÂrst boot aft er the sensor detects remov al of the cov er . If the passwor d is set, Administrator Pas sword requires tha t the password be ent ered to boot the comput er if the sensor detects that the co ver has been remov ed. System Management Command All ows authorized personnel to r eset security settings during a ser vice ev ent. Defaul t is enabled. Restore Security Settings to Defaul t This action resets security devic es, clears BIOS pas swords (not incl uding DriveLock), and rest ores settings in the Security menu to fact ory defaults. Computer SetupâÂÂAdv anced NOTE: Support for speciîÂÂc C omputer Setup options ma y vary depending on the hardwar e conîÂÂguration. T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) Option Heading Display Language Lets you sel ect the language of the menus in F10 Setup and the k eyboard lay out. Scheduled Power-On This featur e wak es the system up from a po wered oî« state a t a speciîÂÂed date and time. Boot Options Select the devic es that the comput er can boot from, as wel l as other options, including: â Startup Menu Delay(sec). Enabling this f eature will add a user-speciîÂÂed del ay to the POST pr ocess. One purpose for the delay is t o provide additional time t o activate hotk eys such as Esc for the Startup Menu or F10 for C omputer Setup. â F ast Boot. Defaul t is enabled for Windo ws 8.1 or later, and disabled f or Windows 7 systems. â CD-ROM Boot. Def ault is enabl ed. â Network (PXE) Boo t. Default is enabl ed. â Promp t on Memory Size Change. Defaul t is enabled. â Promp t on Fixed St orage Change. Defaul t is disabled. â After P ower Loss. Defaul t is Power Oî«. â Power oî«âÂÂcauses the c omputer to r emain powered oî« when pow er is restor ed. â Power onâÂÂcause s the computer t o power on automaticall y as soon as power is res tored. â Previo us stateâÂÂcauses the c omputer to power on aut omatically as soon as po wer is rest ored, if it was on when power w as lost. NOTE: If the system is conîÂÂgured t o âÂÂPower On from K eyboard P ortsâ (see Power Management Options), then this setting is f orced to âÂÂP ower OnâÂÂ. â Audio Al erts During Boot. Default is enabl ed. When disabled, most audibl e beeps from errors, warnings, and passw ord prompts during boo t up are suppres sed. â UEFI Boot Order . 24 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) Defaul t is enabled. Specify the order in which UEFI boo t sources ( such as a internal hard driv e, USB hard driv e, USB optical drive, or intern al optical drive) ar e checked for a boo table operating sys tem image. UEFI boot sour ces alw ays have prec edence over l egacy boot sourc es. â Legacy Boot Or der Specify the order in which l egacy boot source s (such as a network interface car d, internal hard driv e, USB optical drive, or in ternal optical drive ) are check ed for a bootable o perating system image. Specify the order of attached har d drives. The îÂÂrst har d drive in the order will ha ve priority in the boot sequence and wil l be recogniz ed as drive C (if any devices ar e attached). NOTE: T o drag a device to a pr eferred plac e, press Ent er . NOTE: MS-DOS drive l ettering assignments may not appl y after a non-MS-DOS oper ating system has started. Shortcut to Temporarily Override Boot Order T o boot one time from a device o ther than the defaul t device speciîÂÂed in Boot Or der, restart the comput er and press Esc (t o acces s the Startup menu) and then F9 (Boot Menu), or only F9 (skip ping the Startup menu) when the monitor light turns gr een. After POST is c ompleted, a list o f bootable devic es is displayed. Use the arrow k eys t o select the pref erred bootable de vice and press En ter . The computer then boo ts from the sel ected non-defaul t device for this one time. Secure Boot ConîÂÂguration ConîÂÂgure Legacy Support and Secure Boot Legacy Support â Lets yo u turn oî« all legacy support on the comput er, including booting t o DOS, running legacy graphics car ds, booting to l egacy devices, and so on. Windows 7 for ins tance require s legacy support, whereas Windows 8 doe s not. Secure Boot â L ets you mak e sure an operating syst em is legitimate be fore booting t o it, making Windows resistan t to malicious modiîÂÂcation from pr eboot to full OS boo ting, preventing îÂÂrmware a ttacks. UEFI and Windows Secure Boo t only all ow code signed by pr e-approv ed digital certiîÂÂcates to run during the îÂÂrmware and OS boot pr ocess. Defaul t is âÂÂLegacy Support Enable and Secure Boo t Disableâ f or Windows 7 and other non-Windo ws conîÂÂgurations. Defaul t is âÂÂLegacy Support Disable and Secure Boo t Enableâ f or Windows 8.1 and later conîÂÂgurations. Secure Boot Key Management Lets you man age the custom k ey settings. Clear Secure Boot Keys Lets you del ete any pr eviously l oaded custom boot k eys. Cl earing ke ys will disable secure boo t. Default is disabled. Reset Secure Boot keys to f actory defaul ts Defaul t is disabled. Enable MS UEFI CA key Disabling this setting alt ers the Secure Boot k ey list to further res trict the allow ed software components. Set this op tion to â disableâ t o support Device Guard. System Options ConîÂÂgure Stor age Control ler for RAID (enable/ disable) Lets you en able onboard RAID . Default is disabl ed. POST Pr ompt for RAID ConîÂÂguration (Intel only ) When disabled, the pr ompt for âÂÂRAID option RO Mâ in legacy mode is suppre ssed. Virtualization Technology (VTx) (Intel onl y) Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 25
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) Contr ols the virtualization features o f the proces sor . Changing this setting requires turning the c omputer oî« and then back on. Defaul t is disabled. Virtualization Technology for Directed I/ O (VTd) (Intel only ) Contr ols virtualization DMA remapping fea tures of the chipset. Changing this setting r equires turning the comput er oî« and then back on. Default is disabl ed. PCI Express Slo t x (enable/ disable) Lets you disabl e individual expansion slo ts. All ow PCIe/PCI SERR# Interrupt (enabl e/ disable) All ows PCI devices t o report PCI/PCIe System Err or signals, such as address parity err ors, data parity errors, and critical errors o ther than parity . Defaul t is enabled. Power Button Override ( disable/4 sec/15 sec) Lets you disabl e or enable and sel ect the number of seconds yo u have to hol d down the power button f or it to for ce the system t o power oî«. Defaul t is âÂÂ4 secâÂÂ. Built -In Device Options Embedded LAN Controller Select t o show the device in the operating sys tem. Defaul t is enabled. Wake On LAN Lets you either disabl e the Wak e On LAN featur e, or conîÂÂgure where the comput er boots, including the network or hard driv e. Default is Boo t to Network. Dust Fil ter (select models only ) Select t o enable the Dust Fil ter replac ement reminder, which can be set for 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, or 180 days. The reminder wil l show during POST after the r eminder timer has expired. Video Memory Size Use this option t o manage graphics memory alloca tion. The value you choose is al located permanentl y to graphics and is unavail able to the oper ating system. Audio Device Select t o show the device in the operating sys tem. Defaul t is enabled. Internal Speakers ( does not aî«ect external s peak ers) Clear t o disable the chassis s peaker . This function is applicable t o normal audio playback in the operating system and does no t aî«ect the error or warning beeps during POS T . Defaul t is enabled. Integrated Micro phone Clear t o disable the integr ated microphone . This does not aî«ect devices pl ugged into audio jacks. Def ault is enabled. Integrated Camera Clear t o disable the integr ated webcam. Defaul t is enabled. Increase Idle F an Speed(%) Sets idle fan s peed percentage . This setting only changes the minimum fan s peed. The fan is still automaticall y contr olled. Fingerprint Device Select t o show the device in the operating sys tem. Defaul t is enabled. T ouch Panel Clear t o disable the display p anel touch fea ture. Defaul t is enabled. 26 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) Port Options All ows you to hide the f ollo wing ports from the operating system: â Serial port A â Serial port B â SA T A0 â SA T A1 â SA T A2 â SA T A3 â Front USB ports â Rear USB ports â USB charging port function â Media card r eader Restrict USB Devices Specify the foll owing categories o f USB devices to en able: â All ow all USB devic es â All ow only k eyboard and mo use â All ow all but st orage devices and hubs. When some devices ar e restrict ed, the system will disabl e USB ports that do not meet the allo wed criteria. This fe ature is usuall y combined with similar policies within the oper ating system since USB devices can be mo ved to diî«erent ports. The ports disabled by the BIO S will remain disabl ed until the system is r estarted. Option ROM Launch Policy These policies contr ol whether Legacy Option ROMs or UEFI driv ers are loaded. Def ault is â Al l legacyâ for Windows 7 and non-Windo ws conîÂÂgurations. Default is â All UEFIâ for Windows 8.1 or lat er . ConîÂÂgure Option ROM Launch P olicy â All l egacy â All UEFI â All UEFI ex cept video Slot settings Lets y ou enable or disabl e any PCIe slot. Power Management Options Runtime Power Managemen t (enable/ disable) All ows certain operating syst ems to reduc e processor v oltage and fr equency when the current software load does no t require the ful l capabilities of the proc essor . Defaul t is enabled. Extended Idle Power S tates (enabl e/ disable) All ows certain operating syst ems to decre ase the processors pow er consumption when the proc essor is idle. Def ault is enabl ed. S5 Maximum Power Savings ( enable/ disable) Enabling this fea ture reduce s the power of the system as much as pos sible in the S5 state . Power is remov ed from the wak e up circuitry, the expansion slo ts, and any management fe atures while in S5. Defaul t is disabled. SA T A Power Management ( enable/ disable) Enables or disabl es SA T A bus and/ or devic e power management. Defaul t is enabled. Unique Sleep State Blink Rates ( enable/ disable) Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities 27
T able 2-3 Computer SetupâÂÂAdvanced (for adv anced users) (continued) This featur e is designed to pro vide a visual indication of what sleep s tate the system is in. Each sl eep state has a unique blink p attern. Defaul t is disabled. NOTE: A normal shutdown goes t o the S4 state for Windo ws 8 or later . S0 (On) = Solid white LED . S3 (Stand By)= 3 blink s at 1Hz (50% duty cycle) fol lowed b y a pause of 2 seconds (whit e LED) â repeat ed cycles o f 3 blinks and a pause. S4 (Hibernation)= 4 blinks at 1Hz (50% duty cycl e) foll owed by a pause of 2 sec onds (white LED) â repeat ed cycles of 4 blink s and a pause. S5 (Soft Oî«) = LED is oî«. Remote Management Options Active Management (AMT) ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. All ows you to disc over, r epair, and protect network ed comp uting devices. USB Key Provisioning Support ( enable/ disable) Defaul t is disabled. USB Redirection Support (enabl e/ disable). Def ault is enabl ed. USB redir ection allows USB devic es plugged int o a client computer t o be transparen tly redir ected to the guest opera ting system. UnconîÂÂgure AMT on next boo t (Do Not Apply / Apply). Def ault is âÂÂDo Not Appl yâÂÂ. SOL Terminal Emulation Mode (ANSI / VT100). Defaul t is ANSI. SOL terminal emulation mode is onl y activated during r emote AMT r edirection operations. The emula tion options all ow administrat ors to select which mode work s best with their console . Show UnconîÂÂgure ME ConîÂÂrmation Prompt ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. Verbose Boot Messages ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. Verbose boo t shows additional logging inf ormation during the boot. mainly f or debugging if something goes wrong during boo tup. Watchdog Timer ( enable/ disable). Defaul t is enabled. All ows you to set amo unt of time for a oper ating system and BIOS wat chdog alert to be sent if the timers are not de activated. BIOS w atchdog is deactivat ed by BIOS and woul d indicate that a hal t occurred during execution if the al ert is sent to the management consol e. An operating syst em alert is deactivat ed by the operating syst em image and would indicat e that a hang occurr ed during its initialization. â OS Wat chdog Timer (min.) â (5/10/15/20/25). Default is 5 min. â BIOS Wat chdog Timer (min.) â (5/10/15/20/25). Default is 5 min. CIRA Timeout (min.) (1/2/3/4/Never ) CIRA is Customer Initiated R emote Assistanc e, an Intel service t o help users employing Activ e Management T echnology (AMT). 28 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
Desk top managemen t This section summarizes capabilitie s, featur es, and k ey components of c omputer manag ement. T opics Initial comput er conîÂÂguration and deployment on page 30 Installing a r emote syst em on page 30 Cop ying a setup conîÂÂguration to another comput er on page 30 Updating and managing softwar e on page 31 HP Client Management Sol utions on page 31 Al tiris Client Management Solutions on page 31 HP SoftPaq Downl oad Manager on page 32 Syst em Software Manager on pag e 32 ROM Flash on pag e 32 F ailSafe Boot Bl ock on page 32 Works tation security on page 33 F ault notiîÂÂcation and rec overy on page 39 Progr ammable power butt on (Windows only) on p age 40 NO TE: Support for speciîÂÂc featur es described in this guide can vary by model and so ftware version. Deskt op management 29
Initial computer conîÂÂguration and depl oyment The comput er includes a pr einstall ed system softwar e image. Aft er a brief software unb undling proces s, the comput er is ready t o use. If you pr efer t o replace the pr einstall ed software imag e with a customized set o f system and application softwar e, you can depl oy a customiz ed software image b y: â Installing addition al software applications a fter unbundling the preins talled so ftware image â Using a disk -cl oning proces s to cop y the conten ts from one hard driv e to another The HDD-based HP Reco very Manager ROM -based setup, and ACPI har dware pr ovide further assistance with rec overy of syst em softwar e, conîÂÂguration management and troubl eshooting, and pow er management. Support for speciîÂÂc fe atures described in this guide can v ary by model and software v ersion. The best depl oyment method depends on the inf ormation technology envir onment and proc esses. Instal ling a remote system Remot e system ins tallation enabl es starting and setting up the comput er using software and conîÂÂguration information on a network serv er . This feature is usual ly used f or system setup and conîÂÂguration and can be used to: â Deplo y a software image on ne w PCs â Format a har d drive â Install ap plication software or driv ers â Update the oper ating system, application so ftware, or drivers T o initiate a r emote sys tem installa tion, press f12 when f12=Network Service Boot appe ars in the lower - right corner o f the HP logo scr een. Foll ow the on-screen instructions t o continue the instal lation proc ess. The defaul t boot or der is a BIOS conîÂÂguration setting that can be changed to al ways att empt a network boot. Co pying a setup conîÂÂguration to another c omputer This section pro vides information about r eplicating the comput er setup. CAUTION: Setup conîÂÂguration is model-speciîÂÂc. File syst em corruption can r esult if so urce and tar get comput ers are not the same model. T o cop y a setup conîÂÂguration: 1. Select a setup conîÂÂguration t o cop y, and then restart the comp uter . 2. As soon as you s tart or restart the comp uter, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . If necessary, pres s enter to b ypass the title scr een. NO TE: If you do not pr ess F10 at the appr opriate time, yo u must restart the c omputer, and then pr ess and hold F10 ag ain to acc ess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. Select Main > Replicated Setup > Back up current settings to USB device . F ollo w the instructions on the screen t o creat e the conîÂÂguration îÂÂle cpqsetup. txt and write it to a USB st orage device . 4. T urn oî« the comput er you ar e conîÂÂguring and insert the removabl e USB media device c ontaining the conîÂÂguration îÂÂle. 30 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
5. T urn on the comput er you ar e conîÂÂguring. 6. Pr ess and hold the F10 k ey until y ou enter C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . If neces sar y, pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen. 7. Select Main > Replicated Setup > Re store current settings from USB device , and then f oll ow the instructions on the screen. 8. Res tart the computer when the conîÂÂguration is c omplete . Updating and managing softw are HP pro vides several t ools for managing and updating so ftware on deskt ops and comput ers: â HP Client Manager So ftware â Al tiris Client Management Sol utions â HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager â Syst em Software Man ager HP Client Management Sol utions HP Client Management Sol utions (CMS), avail able for downl oad from h ttp://www .hp. com/go / easydepl oy , are standards -based solutions for man aging and control ling comput ers in a networked en vironment. HP Client Management Sol utions oî«ers these services: â Detailed vie ws of hardw are inven tory for asset managemen t â PC heal th-check monitoring and diagnostics â Pro active notiîÂÂcation of change s in the hardwar e environment â Web-ac cessibl e reporting of b usiness-critical details such as thermal warnings and memory alerts â Remot e updating of syst em software such as de vice drivers and RO M BIOS â Remot e changing of boot or der â ConîÂÂguration of syst em BIOS settings Al tiris Client Managemen t Solutions Al tiris and HP have partner ed to pro vide comprehensiv e, tightly int egrated sys tems management sol utions to reduc e the cost of o wning HP client PCs. The HP CMS is the foundation f or additional Al tiris Client Management Sol utions that address the f oll owing topics. â Inven tory and asset management â Deplo yment and migration â Help desk and pr oblem re solution â Softwar e and operations management Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / Al tiris _Solutions for inf ormation about: Deskt op management 31
â How HP CMS works â Which solutions ar e compatibl e with the operating syst em â How to do wnload a full y functional, 30-day ev aluation version of A ltiris sol utions HP SoftP aq Download Man ager HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager is a fr ee, easy-t o-use interfac e for locating and do wnloading softwar e updates f or the HP client PC models in your en vironment. By specifying your models, o perating system, and language, yo u can quickl y locat e, sort, and select the softpaqs yo u need. For more inf ormation, go to http:// ww w .hp. com/go / sdm . System So ft ware Man ager Syst em Software Man ager (SSM) is a utility availabl e on WindowsâÂÂbased comp uters that enabl es you t o update sys tem-lev el software on mul tipl e systems simul taneously . When execut ed on a PC client system, SSM detects h ardwar e and software v ersions and then updates the softwar e from a c entral reposit ory, known as a îÂÂle st ore . Driver versions supported b y SSM are no ted with a special icon on the so ftware, the driver downl oad website, and on the Support Softwar e CD . T o downl oad the utility or to obtain mor e information about S SM, see http://www .hp. com/go / ssm . RO M Flash BIOS settings are s tored on a pr ogrammable î¯ash R OM. By establishing an administra tor passwor d in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility, you can pr otect unauthoriz ed users from modifying the BIOS settings. T o upgrade the BIOS, downl oad the lat est SoftPaq imag es from http:// ww w .hp .c om/support/ worksta tion_swdrivers . Remote R OM Flash Remot e ROM Flash al lows sys tem administrat ors to safel y upgrade the RO M on remot e HP computers fr om a centr alized network management c onsole, r esulting in a c onsistent depl oyment of, and gr eater c ontrol o ver, HP PC ROM image s over the network. T o use Remot e ROM Flash, the c omputer must be po wered on, or turned on using Remo te W akeup . For mor e information about R emote R OM Flash and HPQFlash, see the HP Client Manager So ftware or Syst em Softwar e Manager sections at http:// ww w .hp. com/g o/ ssm . HPQFlash The HPQFlash utility is used to l ocall y update or res tore the sys tem ROM on PCs using a Windo ws operating system. F or more inf ormation about HPQFlash, see http:// ww w .hp .com/g o/ ssm , and ent er the name of the comput er . F ailSafe Boo t Block F ailSafe Boot B lock enabl es BIOS rec overy in the unlik ely ev ent of a RO M î¯ash failur e. For exampl e, if a power fail ure occurs during a RO M upgrade, Boot Bl ock uses a î¯ash-protected section of the RO M to verify a valid system R OM î¯ash when power is r estor ed to the comp uter . If the system R OM is valid, the comp uter starts normall y . If the system R OM fails the validation check, F ailSafe Boot Bl ock provides eno ugh support to start the comput er from a BIOS image CD cr eat ed from a SoftPaq . The BIOS image CD progr ams the system RO M with a valid image. 32 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
When Boot Bl ock detects an inv alid system RO M, the computer po wer LED blinks red eight time s and the comput er beeps eight times; then the comp uter pauses for tw o seconds. On some models, a Boot Bl ock rec overy mode message ap pears. In prepar ation for syst em reco very, use the BIOS CD media îÂÂle in the SoftPaq t o creat e a BIOS image CD or USB k ey . Reco vering the computer by using F ailSafe Boot B lock reco very mode T o rec over the c omputer after it en ters Boot Bl ock reco very mode: 1. Remo ve any media such as USB k eys or disks in the op tical disk drives. 2. Insert a BIOS image CD int o the DVD drive or insert a USB BIOS image î¯ash driv e, such as an HP DriveKey, into a USB port. 3. T urn oî« the comput er, and then turn it back on. If no BIOS image CD or USB media is f ound, you ar e prompt ed to insert one and restart the c omputer . If an administrat or passwor d has been established, the caps l ock light is illumina ted and you ar e promp ted for the pas sword. 4. Enter the adminis trator pas sword. If the comput er starts from the CD or î¯ash drive and suc ces sfull y reprogr ams the ROM, three k eyboard lights are il luminat ed and a rising-tone series o f beeps signals succe ssful rec overy . 5. Remo ve the CD or î¯ash drive and turn oî« the comp uter . 6. Res tart the computer . W orkstation security This section pro vides information about pr oviding syst em security through asset tr acking, password security, hard driv e locking, and chassis l ocks. Asset tracking Asset tracking f eature s provide asset tr acking data that can be managed using HP S ystems Insight Manager (HP SIM), HP Consol e Management Con troll er (CMC), or other sys tems-management applica tions. Seaml ess, automatic int egration between asset tr acking featur es and these products enabl es yo u to choose the management t ool that is best suited t o the environment and t o lev erage inv estments in existing t ools. HP also oî«ers sever al solutions for c ontrolling ac ces s to valuabl e components and in formation: â HP Pro tectT ools Embedded Securit y prev ents unauthorized ac cess t o data, checks system in tegrity, and authenticate s third-party users attempting syst em acce ss. â Security featur es such as Pr otectT ools and the Smar t Co ver Sensor (side acc ess panel sensor ) help prev ent unauthorized ac cess t o the data and to the int ernal components of the c omputer . â By disabling paral lel, serial, or USB ports, or by disabling remo vable-media boo t capability, you can pro tect valuabl e data assets. â Memory Change and Side acc ess panel sensor (Smart Co ver Sensor) al erts can be forwar ded to system management applications t o deliver pro active notiîÂÂcation of tampering with a c omputerâ s internal components. Pro tectT ools, the Smar t Co ver Sensor, and the side acc ess panel solenoid l ock (Hood Lock) are av ailable as options on sel ect systems. Deskt op management 33
Y ou can manage security settings as foll ows: â Locall y with Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility â Remot ely with HP CMS or HP S ystem Softw are Manager (SSM), which en able the secure, c onsistent deplo yment and contr ol of security settings from a simpl e command line utility The fol lowing C omputer Setup (F10) Utility fe atures l et you manage c omputer security . Feature Purpose Remov able Media Boot Con trol Prev ents booting from r emovable media driv es Serial, Paral lel, USB, or Infrar ed Interfac e Control Prev ents transfer o f data through the int egrated serial, paral lel, USB, or infrar ed interfac e Power -On Passwor d Prev ents use of the comput er until the passwor d is entered (ap plies to initial system startup and restarts) Ddministrat or Password Prev ents reconîÂÂguration of the comput er (through the Setup utility) un til the passwor d is entered Network Server Mode Provide s unique security features f or computers used as servers SA T A hard drive security HP comput ers include the HP DriveL ock facility for SA T A hard drive s to prev ent unauthorized ac cess t o data. WARNING! Enabling DriveL ock can render a SA T A hard drive permanentl y inacc essibl e if the master passwor d is lost or f orgo tten. No method exists to r ecov er the passwor d or acces s the data. DriveLock h as been implemented as an ex tension to C omputer Setup (F10) Utility functions. It is onl y availabl e when hard driv es that support the A T A securit y command set ar e detected. On HP c omputers, it is not av ailable when the SA T A emulation mode is RAID AHCI or RAID. DriveLock is f or HP customers f or whom data security is a paramount c oncern. For such cust omers, the cost of a har d drive and the los s of the data st ored on it is inconsequential when c ompared t o the damage that coul d resul t from un authorized acc ess to its c ontents. T o balance this l evel o f security with the need to addres s the issue of a for gott en password, the HP implementa tion of DriveLock empl oys a two-passw ord security scheme. One passwor d is intended t o be set and used by a syst em administrat or, while the other is typicall y set and used by the user . No "back door" can be used to unl ock the drive if both p asswords ar e lost. Ther efore, Driv eLock is most saf ely used when the data contained on the h ard drive is r eplicated on a corpor ate information sys tem or is regularl y back ed up. If both DriveL ock passwor ds are los t, the hard drive is r endered unusabl e. For users who do not îÂÂt the previo usly deîÂÂned cust omer proîÂÂle, this might not be acc eptabl e. For users who îÂÂt this proîÂÂle, it might be a tol erable risk, giv en the nature o f the data stor ed on the hard drive. DriveLock applications The most practical use o f DriveLock is in a c orporate envir onment. The system administr ator wo uld be res ponsible for conîÂÂguring the h ard drive, which inv olv es setting the DriveLock mast er passwor d and a temporary user pas sword. If yo u forget the user p assword or if the equipment is p assed on to another emplo yee, the master p assword can be used t o reset the user pas sword and reg ain acces s to the har d drive. HP rec ommends that corporat e system administr ators who enabl e DriveLock also establish a c orporate policy for setting and maintaining mast er passwor ds. This should be done t o prev ent a situation where an empl oyee 34 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
sets both DriveL ock passwor ds before l eaving the c ompany . In such a scenario, the hard driv e is unusable and requir es replac ement. Lik ewise, by not setting a mast er passwor d, system administr ators might îÂÂnd themselv es lock ed out o f a hard drive and un able to perform r outine checks f or unauthorized softwar e, other asset con trol functions, and support. For users with l ess stringent security r equirements, HP does no t recommend enabling Driv eLock. Users in this category incl ude personal users, or user s who do not maintain sensitiv e data on their hard driv es as a common pr actice. For these users, the po tential l oss of a har d drive resul ting from f orgetting both p asswords is much gre ater than the val ue of the data DriveL ock prot ects. Acc ess to C omputer Setup (F10) Utility and DriveL ock can be restrict ed through the administr ator passw ord. By specifying an administrat or passwor d and not giving it to users, syst em administrators can r estrict users from enabling Driv eLock. Using DriveLock When hard driv es that support the A T A security command set are detect ed, DriveLock appe ars under the Security menu in the Comput er Setup (F10) Utility menu. Y ou are pr esented with o ptions to set the mast er passwor d and to enabl e DriveLock. Y ou must pro vide a user passwor d to enable Driv eLock. Because the initial conîÂÂguration of DriveL ock is typically perf ormed by a system adminis trator, a mast er passwor d should be set îÂÂrst. HP encour ages system adminis trators t o set a master passw ord whether they plan t o enable DriveL ock or not. This give s the administrator the ability t o modify DriveLock settings if the drive is l ocked in the futur e. After the mas ter passwor d is set, the system adminis trator can enabl e DriveLock or l eave it disabl ed. If a lock ed har d drive is presen t, POST requir es a passwor d to unl ock the device. If a po wer-on pas sword is set and it matches the de viceâ s user password, POS T does not pr ompt the user to r e-enter the passwor d. Otherwise, the user is prompt ed to ent er a DriveLock passw ord. For a c old start, use the mast er or user password. F or a warm start, ent er the same password used t o unlock the drive during the pr eceding col d start. Users have two a ttempts to en ter a corr ect passwor d. During cold s tart, if neither attempt succ eeds, POST continues b ut the drive remains inac ces sible. During a warm-s tart or restart from Windows, if neither a ttempt succ eeds, POST hal ts and the user is instructed t o cycle pow er . Enabling DriveLock T o enable and set the Driv eLock user passw ord: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. As soon as you turn on the c omputer, r epeatedl y pres s the F10 k ey until you ent er Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er, then repeat edly pr ess F10 again to ac cess the utility . 3. Select Security > DriveL ock Security . 4. For e ach DriveLock -capabl e drive, select a driv e by pre ssing F10 to acc ept. 5. T o enabl e DriveLock for a speciîÂÂc driv e, select Enable DriveL ock NOTE: T o set the DriveLock mas ter passwor d, select Set DriveL ock Master Password . CAUTION: If you for get the DriveLock p assword, the driv e is unusable. 6. Enter a ne w user passwor d (1 to 32 charact ers long), and then pres s F10 to acc ept. Deskt op management 35
7. Enter the p assword ag ain in the Enter New Pas sword Ag ain îÂÂeld. If you for get this passwor d, the drive is render ed permanently disabl ed. 8. Select File > Sa ve Changes and Exit , and then press en ter to ac cept the chang es. After yo u press ent er , the comput er performs a col d start befor e invoking the DriveL ock function. When the comput er starts, you ar e prompt ed to enter the Driv eLock passwor d for each Driv eLock - capable driv e for which yo u have set a passw ord. Y ou have two attemp ts to ent er the password corr ectly . If the passwor d is not enter ed corr ectly, the comp uter attemp ts to start anyway . Howev er, the boot pr ocess most lik ely fails because data fr om a lock ed drive cannot be ac ces sed. In a single driv e comput er, if the drive has DriveLock en abled, the comp uter might not be abl e to boot t o the operating sys tem, and might try to boot fr om the network or from another s torage de vice (depending on the boo t ordering options ). Regardl ess o f the outcome o f the start attempts, the driv e- lock ed drive r emains inacc essible witho ut the DriveLock pas sword. In a two-drive comp uter that has a boo t drive and a data drive, yo u can apply the Driv eLock fea ture to the data drive onl y . In this case, the computer can al ways start, but the data driv e is acce ssible onl y when the DriveLock p assword is ent ered. When you s tart or restart the comput er, you must en ter DriveLock p asswords. F or example, if y ou boot to DOS and pr ess ctrl al t del , you must en ter the DriveLock pas sword bef ore the comp uter compl etes the next start cycl e. This restart -start behavior is consist ent with the DriveLock f eature . Pas sword security This comput er supports security password f eatur es, which can be established thro ugh the Computer Setup Utilities menu. This comput er supports two security passwor d featur es that are es tablished through the C omputer Setup Utilities menu: administra tor passwor d and power -on passwor d. When you establish onl y an administrat or passwor d, any user can acc ess all the inf ormation on the comput er exc ept Comput er Setup. When y ou establish onl y a power -on passwor d, the power -on password is r equired t o acces s Computer Setup and an y other inf ormation on the comput er . When you establish bo th passwords, onl y the administra tor passwor d will give yo u acce ss to Comp uter Setup. When both pas swords are set, the adminis trator pas sword can also be used in plac e of the power -on passwor d as an override t o log in to the c omputer . This is a useful f eature f or a network administrat or . If you f orget one or bo th passwords, y ou can cle ar all passwor ds by powering oî« the sys tem, opening the co ver, temporaril y remo ving the PSWD jumper, and booting onc e. This will erase the administr ator and power -on passwor ds. Y ou must r est ore the jumper to cr eate new p asswords. CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button with po wer remov ed will re set the BIOS settings to fact or y defaul ts. It may be useful to b ack up the BIOS settings or save them as cust om defaults be fore r esetting them in case they are needed l ater . Back up can be performed in Comp uter Setup or using the BiosConîÂÂgUtility tool availabl e from www .hp. com. See C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities on pag e 18 for information on backing up the BIOS settings. Establishing an administr ator password using C omputer Setup (F10) Utility Establishing an administr ator passwor d through C omputer Setup (F10) Utility pr events reconîÂÂguration of the comput er (through the use o f Comput er Setup (F10) Utility) until the passwor d is enter ed. T o establish an administr ator passw ord using Comp uter (F10) Setup menu: 36 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. As soon as the comp uter is turned on, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen, if neces sary . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er, and then press and hol d F10 again to ac cess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. Select Security > Set Up BIO S Administrator P assword and then fol low the on-scr een instructions. 4. Befor e exiting, select Main > Save Change s and Exit . Establishing a power-on passw ord using Computer Setup (F10) Utility Establishing a power -on passw ord thro ugh Computer Setup (F10) Utility pr events ac cess t o the comput er when power is c onnected, unle ss the passwor d is entered. When a po wer-on p assword is set, C omputer Setup (F10) Utility presents P asswor d Options in the Security menu. The passwor d options include Network Server Mode and Passw ord Pr ompt on Warm Boo t. When Network Server Mode is disabled, y ou must ent er the password when the c omputer is turned on, when the k ey icon appe ars on the monitor . When Passwor d Promp t on Warm Boo t is enabled, yo u must enter the passwor d. The passwor d must also be enter ed each time the comp uter is res tarted. When Network Server Mode is enabled, the p assword pr ompt is not pr esented during POS T, but an attached PS/2 k eyboar d remains lock ed until y ou enter the pow er-on pas sword. T o enable Netw ork Ser ver Mode, y ou must set a power -on passwor d under Security > Set Up BIOS Po wer-On Passw ord . This option enabl es the comput er to start without r equiring the power -on password, b ut the k eyboard and mo use are lock ed until you enter the pas sword. The k eyboar d LEDs rotat e constantl y when the comput er is in lock ed mode. T o establish a pow er-on pas sword thro ugh the Comput er Setup (F10) Utility menu: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer . 2. As soon as the comp uter is turned on, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen, if neces sary . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er and then press and hol d F10 again to ac cess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. Select Security > Set Up BIO S Power-On P assword and then fol low the onscr een instructions. 4. Befor e exiting, select Main > Save Change s and Exit . Entering a power-on passw ord T o enter a po wer-on pas sword: 1. Res tart the computer . 2. When the k ey icon appe ars on the monitor, enter the curr ent passwor d, and then pres s enter. T ype carefull y . For security reasons, the ch aracters you en ter do not appe ar on the screen. If you en ter the passwor d incorrectl y, a brok en k ey ic on appears. T ry again. After thr ee unsucces sful tries, you will ent er the F10 setup screen with re ad-only permission. (See the Setup Br owse Mode option under the Pow er-On op tions.) Deskt op management 37
Entering an administrat or password If an administrat or passwor d has been established on the comp uter, you wil l be prompt ed to ent er it each time you run C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . T o enter an adminis trator pas sword: 1. Res tart the computer . 2. As soon as the comp uter is turned on, pres s and hold F10 until yo u enter Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . Pre ss enter t o bypass the titl e screen, if neces sary . If you do no t press F10 at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er and press and hol d F10 again to ac cess the utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3. When the k ey icon appe ars on the monitor, enter the adminis trator pas sword, and pr ess enter. T ype carefull y . For security reasons, the ch aracters you en ter do not appe ar on the screen. If you en ter the passwor d incorrectl y, a brok en k ey ic on appears. T ry again. After thr ee unsucces sful tries, you must re start the computer be fore y ou can continue. National keyboard delimiter characters Each k eyboar d meets country-speciîÂÂc requirements. The syn tax and ke ys you use for changing or del eting passwor ds depend on the k eyboard incl uded with the computer . Language Delimiter Language Delimiter Language Delimiter Arabic / Greek - Russian / Belgian = Hebrew . Slo vakian - BHCSY * - Hungarian - Spanish - Brazilian / Italian - Swedish/Finnish / Chinese / Japanese / Swiss - Czech - Kor ean / T aiwanese / Danish - Latin American - Thai / French ! Norwegian - Turkish . French Canadian é Polish - U.K. English / German - Portuguese - U.S. English / * Bosnia-Herzegovin a, Croatia, Slo venia, and Yug oslavia Clearing passw ords If you f orget the pas sword, yo u cannot acc ess the comput er . For instructions abo ut clearing pas swords, see ConîÂÂguring pas sword security and resetting CM OS on page 82 . 38 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
Chassis security Smart Cover Sensor ( optional) The optional Smart C over Sensor is a c ombination of har dware and softw are technol ogy that alerts you when the side panel of the c omputer is r emoved (pr ovided the sensor has been conîÂÂgured in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility). Three l evels of pr otection ar e availabl e *: Level Setting Description Level 0 Disabled Sensor * is disabled ( default). Level 1 Notify User When the comput er restarts, a message indicat es that the comput er has been o pened or the acce ss panel has been remov ed. Level 2 Adminis trator Pas sword When the comput er restarts, a message indicat es that the comput er has been opened or the acc ess panel has been remo ved. Y ou must ent er the administrator passwor d to continue. * Smart Cover Sensor settings ar e changed using Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . Setting the protection le vel T o set the Smart Cov er Sensor prot ection lev el: 1 . T urn on or res tart the computer . 2 . During startup, pre ss and hold the F10 k ey until y ou enter C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . Pres s enter to bypass the titl e screen, if nec essary . NOTE: If you do no t press the F10 k ey at the ap propriate time, y ou must r estart the comput er, and then pr ess and hol d the F10 k ey again to ac cess C omputer Setup (F10) Utility . If you ar e using a PS/2 k eyboar d, you might see a k eyboar d error message . Disregar d it. 3 . Select Security > Smart C over > Co ver Removal Sensor , and fol low the on-scr een instructions. 4 . Befor e exiting, select Main > Save Change s and Exit . Side access panel solenoid l ock The side acc ess panel sol enoid lock (av ailable onl y on speciîÂÂc workstations ) secures the side acc ess panel t o the chassis. The sol enoid is contr olled b y a local or remo te signal. T o lock the sol enoid, set a passwor d for the solenoid l ock in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . T o unlock the solenoid, r emove the sol enoid lock pas sword in Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility . The solenoid l ock F ailSafe Ke y (availabl e from HP) is is a de vice for manual ly disabling the sol enoid lock. Y ou will need the F ailSafe K ey in case of a f orgott en passwor d, power los s, or computer mal function. Cable lock ( optional) T o prev ent theft, you can attach a k ey ed cable lock t o the rear ch assis panel. This cable l ock attaches to the chassis and secur es it to the work ar ea. F aul t notiîÂÂcation and reco very F ault notiîÂÂcation and rec overy fe atures c ombine innovative h ardwar e and software t echnology to pr event the los s of critical data and minimize unplanned do wntime. Deskt op management 39
If the comput er is connected t o a network that is managed b y HP CMS, the computer sends a f ault no tice to the network management applica tion. With HP CMS, you can also remo tel y schedule diagnostics t o run on managed PCs and cr eate a summary report of f ailed te sts. ECC faul t prediction When the comput er encount ers an exce ssive number of err or checking and correcting (E CC) memory errors, it displays a l ocal alert messag e. This message con tains information about the err ant DIMM, enabling you t o tak e action befor e you experience nonc orrectabl e memor y errors. E CC DIMMs ar e standard on this c omputer . Thermal sensors Sever al thermal sensors in the HP workstation r egulate comp uter fans t o maintain an accep table, eî°cient chassis t emperature. Progr ammable power button (Windows only) With ACPI (Adv anced ConîÂÂguration and Pow er Interfac e) enabled, y ou can customiz e the behavior of the power butt on so that rather than po wering down, the workstation en ters sleep mode (l ow power stat e), or hibernate mode ( very low po wer state ). This lets yo u go to standby witho ut closing applications, and then return t o the same operational stat e without any data l oss. Changing the power button conîÂÂguration (Windo ws only) Windows 7 or Windows 10 1. Select S tart , and then select Con trol Panel > System and Security > P ower Options . 2. On the le ft side of the screen, sel ect Choose What the Power Buttons Do. 3. Select the de sired options. If you choose Sl eep or Hibernate, y ou can pres s the power button t o initiate standb y, and then press it again to exit standb y and return to y our work. T o compl etel y turn oî« the workstation, sel ect Start > Shut Down. CAUTION: T o reduce the risk o f data loss, do no t use the power button t o turn oî« the comput er unless the system is no t unresponsiv e. NOTE: If the comput er is unres ponsive, pres s and hold the power b utton for fo ur seconds to c ompletel y turn oî« power t o the computer . Windows 8.1 1. Point t o the upper -right or low er-right c orner of the Start scr een to display the ch arms. 2. In the Sear ch îÂÂeld, type control. 3 . On the le ft side of the screen sel ect Control P anel , and then select System and Security > P ower Options . 4 . In Po wer Options Pr operties, select Choose What the Po wer Button Does . 5 . Select the de sired options. 40 Chapter 2 Sys tem management
3 C omponent replacement in formation and guidelines This chapt er provides w arnings, cautions, information, and guidelines f or remov al and replacemen t proc edures. It does no t document the step-by -step proc edures. IMPORT ANT : Removal and replacemen t procedures are now av ailable in videos on the HP website. Go to the HP Cust omer Self R epair Services Media Library at http:// www.hp .c om/go/ sml . This chapt er includes these t opics: T opics Warnings and cautions on page 42 Service considera tions on page 42 Product r ecycling on page 44 Component r eplacement guidelines on page 44 41
W arnings and cautions WARNING! These symbols on any surfac e or area o f the equipment indicate the fol lowing: Pre sence of a ho t surface or hot c omponent. If this surface is c ontacted, the pot ential for injury exists. T o reduc e the risk of injury from a hot c omponent, let the surfac e cool befor e you t ouch it. Pre sence of an el ectric shock hazard. T o reduce the risk of injury fr om electric shock, do not open an y enclosed ar ea mark ed with this symbol. T o reduc e the risk of personal injury, product must al ways be lifted b y two persons. WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of electric shock or damage t o your equipment: â Do not disabl e the power cor d grounding pl ug. The grounding pl ug is an important safety fe ature. â Plug the po wer cor d in a grounded ( earthed) outlet that is e asily ac cessibl e at all times. â Disconnect pow er from the equipment by unpl ugging the power c ord from the el ectrical outlet. WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of serious injury, read the Saf ety & Comfort Guide . It describes pr oper comput er setup, posture, he alth, and work h abits for comput er users, and provides important el ectrical and mechanical safety inf ormation. This guide is locat ed at http://www .hp .com/er go . WARNING! Do not use the fr ont bezel as a handl e or lifting point when lifting or moving the comput er . Lifting the comput er from the fron t bezel, or lifting it incorrectl y, might cause the comp uter to f all, causing possibl e injury to you and damage t o the computer . T o properl y and safel y lift the computer, lift fr om the bottom o f the comput er . CAUTION: Static el ectricity can damage the electronic c omponents of the comp uter . T o prev ent damage to the comput er, observe the fol lowing El ectrostatic Disch arge (ESD) pr ecautions while servicing the comput er: â Befor e you begin, dischar ge yoursel f of static el ectricity by brieî¯y touching a gr ounded metal object. â Work on a s tatic- free mat. â We ar a static strap t o make sur e that any ac cumulated el ectrostatic char ge is discharged fr om your body t o the ground. â Cre ate a common gr ound for the equipment y ou are working on b y connecting the static -fr ee mat, static strap, and peripher al units to that piec e of equipment. NOTE: HP acc essories are f or use in HP Works tation products. They hav e been extensiv ely te sted for reliability and ar e manufactured t o high quality standards. Service consider ations T ools and software requirements The tools nec essary for comp uter component r emoval and instal lation are: â T orx T -15 driver â Flat blade and cr oss-tip scr ewdrivers â Diagnostics softwar e 42 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Electr ostatic discharge (ESD) information Generating static Diî«erent activities generat e diî«erent amounts of static el ectricity through electr ostatic discharge (ESD ). Static el ectricity increases as humidity decre ases. CAUTION: Static electricity in the amoun t of 700 volts migh t degrade a product. Event Relative humidity 55% 40% 10% Walking acr oss carpet Walking acr oss vinyl î¯oor Motions of bench work er 7,500 V 3,000 V 400V 15,000 V 5,000 V 800 V 35,000 V 12,000 V 6,000 V Removing bubbl e pack from PCB Packing PCBs in f oam-lined box 7,000 V 5,000 V 20,000 V 11,000 V 26,500 V 21,000 V Preventing ESD equipment damage Many electr onic components are sensitiv e to ESD. Cir cuitry design and structure determine the degr ee of sensitivity . The fol lowing packaging and gr ounding precautions are nec essary to pre vent damage to electr onic components and acc essories: â T ransport products in static -safe c ontainers such as tubes, bags, or boxe s, to avoid hand con tact. â Pro tect electr ostatic parts and assemblies with nonconductive or ap proved c ontainers or packaging. â Keep el ectrostatic -sensitive parts in their containers until they arriv e at static- free stations. â Place it ems on a grounded surfac e before remo ving them from containers. â Befor e handling or touching a sensitive c omponent or assembly, gr ound yourself b y touching a grounded metal object. â Avoid c ontact with pins, leads, or cir cuitry . â Place r eusable electr ostatic -sensitive parts from assemblies in pr otective pack aging or nonconductive f oam. Personal grounding methods and equipment Use the fol lowing items t o help preven t ESD damage: â Wrist straps â These ar e î¯exible straps with a maximum of one megohm ñ 10% r esistance in the ground c ords. T o provide a pro per ground, wear the str ap against bare skin. The gr ound cord mus t be connected and îÂÂt snugl y into the banan a plug connector on the gr ounding mat or comput er . â Heel straps, toe s traps, and boot straps â These can be used a t standing computers and ar e compatibl e with most types of shoes or boots. On c onductive î¯oors or dissipative î¯oor mats, use them on both feet with a maximum o f one megohm ñ 10% resistanc e between the operator and ground. Static shielding materials Static shiel ding materials provide the f ollo wing levels of pr otection. Method Antistatic plastic Carbon-loaded plas tic Metalized laminat e Vol tage 1,500 V 7,500 V 15,000 V Grounding the work area to preven t static damage â Cov er the work surface with appr oved static -dissipative material. Use a wris t strap connected t o the work surface, and pr operly grounded t ools and equipment. â Use static -dissipative mats, f oot straps, or air ionizers to giv e added protection. â Disconnect power and inp ut signals before inserting and removing c onnectors or test equipment. â Use îÂÂxtures made of static -safe mat erials when îÂÂxtures must directl y contact dissipa tive surfaces. Service consider ations 43
â Handle el ectrostatic -sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCB laminate . Handle them only in sta tic-fr ee work are as. â Keep work ar ea free of c onductive materials, such as plastic assembl y aids and Styro foam. â Use îÂÂeld service tools (such as cutt ers, screwdriv ers, and vacuums) that are non- conductive . Recommended ESD prevention materials and equipment â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, apr ons, and sleeve prot ectors â Non-conductive bins and o ther assembly or soldering aids â Non-conductive f oam â Non-conductive tabl etop comp uters with a ground c ord of one megohm ñ 10% resistanc e â Static -dissipative tabl e or î¯oor mats with a hard-tie t o ground â Field service kits â Static awar eness labels â Wrist str aps and footwear str aps providing one megohm ñ 10% resis tance â Material -handling packages â Non-conductive plas tic bags â Non-conductive plas tic tubes â Non-conductive t ote box es â Opaque shielding bags â T ransparen t metallized shielding bags â T ransparen t shielding tubes Product recycling HP encour ages customers t o recycl e used electronic h ardwar e, HP original print cartridges, and rechar geabl e batteries. For inf ormation about recycling HP c omponents or products, see http:// www .hp. com/go /r ecycle . C omponent replacement guidelines This section pro vides information and guidelines f or remov al and replacemen t procedur es. It does not document the st ep-by-step pr ocedur es. IMPORT ANT : Removal and replacemen t procedures are now av ailable in videos on the HP website. Go to the HP Cust omer Self R epair Services Media Library at http:// www.hp .c om/go/ sml . In Media Selection, choose the Deskt ops & Workstations pr oduct category and the Personal Work stations product famil y, then choose your pla tform This chapt er provides guideline s for remo val and replac ement proc edures. Battery on page 45 Cable managemen t on page 45 CPU (proc essor) and CP U heatsink on page 46 Expansion slo ts on page 47 Hard drive s and optical disc drives on page 51 Memory on page 53 Power sup ply speciîÂÂcations on page 56 Syst em board on page 57 44 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Battery The battery that c omes with the comput er provides po wer to the r eal- time clock and has a minimum lifetime of about thr ee years. Observe the f ollo wing warning and caution when replacing the ba ttery . WARNING! HP Z Series Work stations use lithium batteries. Ther e is a risk of îÂÂre and chemical burn if the battery is handl ed improperl y . Do not disassemble, crush, p uncture, short external c ontacts, dispose of in wat er or îÂÂre, or expose battery to temper atures higher than 60ðC (140ðF). CAUTION: Before r emoving the batt er y, back up the CMOS settings in case the y are los t when the battery is remo ved. Use Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility to back up the settings. NO TE: Do not dispose of ba tteries, battery packs, and ac cumulators with gener al household w aste. Cable management Pro per routing of the in ternal cable s is critical to the operation o f the workstation. F ollo w good cable management pr actices when remo ving and installing c omponents. â Handle cabl es with care t o avoid damage. â Appl y only the tension r equired t o seat or unseat cabl es during insertion or remov al from the connect or . â When possibl e, handle cabl es by the connect or or pull -strap . â Rout e cables in such a w ay that they cannot be caught or sn agged by parts being remo ved or replac ed. â Keep cabl es away fr om direct con tact with major heat sourc es, such as the heatsink. (Some air î¯ow guides hav e a cable guide that l ets you ro ute cable s safel y around the heatsink.) â Do not jam cabl es on top o f expansion cards or DIMMs. Circuit car ds and DIMMs are not de signed to tak e exc essive pr essure . â Keep cabl es cle ar of movabl e or ro tating parts (such as the power suppl y and drive cage) t o preven t them from being cut or crimped when the c omponent is low ered into its normal position. â In all cases, av oid bending or twisting the cables. Do no t bend any cable sharpl y . A sharp bend can break the internal wir es. â Never bend a SA T A data cabl e tighter than a 30 mm (1.18 in) radius. â Never cr ease a SA T A data cable. â Do not r ely on componen ts like the driv e cage, power suppl y, or comput er cov er to push cabl es down into the chas sis. Alw ays position the cables t o lay properl y by themsel ves or in the cabl e guides and chassis ar eas designed for cabl e routing . When remo ving the power suppl y power cable fr om the connector on the sys tem board, al ways f ollo w these steps: 1. Squeeze on the t op of the retaining l atch attached to the cabl e end of the connect or . 2. Gras p the cable end of the c onnector and pull it s traight out. CAUTION: Alw ays pull the c onnector â NEVER pull on the cabl e. Pulling on the cabl e coul d damage the cable and r esult in a f ailed pow er supply . Component r eplacement guidelines 45
CPU (pr ocessor ) and CPU heatsink CAUTION: Observe the foll owing cautions when remo ving or replacing the heatsink. â When remo ving the heatsink, loosen al l screws a littl e at a time to mak e sure the CPU r emains lev el. Do not full y loosen one scr ew, and then move on t o the next. â After y ou remo ve the CPU heatsink fr om the chassis, use al cohol and a soft cl oth to cl ean the thermal compound r esidue from the CP U and the heatsink, all owing the alc ohol on the CPU and CPU heatsink t o dry compl etel y . â If you ar e reusing the original he atsink, apply thermal c ompound to the c enter of the CPU t op surface. â If you ar e using a new CPU heatsink, do no t apply thermal c ompound to the CPU because the ne w heatsink alre ady has thermal compound applied t o the heatsink surface . Instead, r emove the thermal c ompound pro tective liner fr om the bottom of the ne w heatsink. â Do not ov ertighten the heatsink scr ews. Overtightening can s trip the threads in the chas sis. â Do not ful ly tight en one screw and then mov e on to the next. Inst ead, tighten al l screws a littl e at a time, ensuring that the CPU r emains lev el. CAUTION: Observe the foll owing cautions when remo ving or replacing the CPU . â If you ar e installing a sec ond CPU, it must be of the same type as the îÂÂrst CPU . â Internal c omponents might be power ed even when the c omputer is oî«. T o prevent damage, disc onnect the comput er power cor d befor e you r emove or instal l a component. â The CPU sock et contacts and p ads are extremel y fragil e. Do not to uch the CPU sock et contacts or the gol d pads underneath the CP U. Use extr eme care and handl e the CPU onl y by the edges. â The CPU sock et contacts ar e delicate and bend easil y . T o avoid bending the contacts, use ex treme care when installing the CP U in the socket. â Installing a pr oces sor incorrectl y can damage the system bo ard. Contact an HP authoriz ed resel ler or service pro vider to instal l the proces sor . If you plan to ins tall the proc essor yo urself, view the entir e remov e and replac e video befor e you begin. â F ailure t o foll ow the comp uter prepar ation instructions can resul t in an impro perly instal led proc essor, causing extensiv e comput er damage. 46 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Expansion slo ts This section identiîÂÂes and describes comp uter expansion car d slots, and pr esents card conîÂÂguration information. Go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs to le arn which graphics cards ar e supported in the works tation, how much memory each graphics car d includes, and graphics car d power requir ements. Card conîÂÂguration restrictions f or power supplies CAUTION: T o preven t damage, the over all power c onsumption of the comp uter (including I/ O cards, CP U, and memory) must not ex ceed the maximum r ating of the comput er power suppl y . For power suppl y information, see P ower suppl y speciîÂÂcations on page 56 . Choosing an expansion card slo t Whenever pos sible, use the fol lowing tips t o help you sel ect the proper sl ot for an exp ansion card: â Use the PCIe x16 sl ot for the primary graphics car d. If you do not use this sl ot for the gr aphics card, onl y cards certiîÂÂed as A fter Mark et Options are support ed. â Install a sec ond graphics card in the o ther PCIe x16 slot. â Install a car d in a slo t that most closel y matches its in terface t echnology: ⦠Install a PCIe Gen1 x16 or a PCIe Gen1 x8 car d in the PCIe Gen3 x16 slo t. ⦠Install a PCIe Gen1 x4 car d in the PCIe Gen2 x4 slo t. ⦠Install a PCIe Gen1 x1 car d in the PCIe Gen2 x1 slo t. ⦠Install a PCI car d in the PCI slo t. ⦠Whenever pos sible, instal l a PCIe x1 card in an x1 slo t. â Lea ve as much spac e as possible between car ds (especial ly gr aphics cards) to al low he at to dissipa te more eî°ciently. â For bes t operational eî°ciency, sel ect a slot tha t: ⦠El ectrically mat ches the number of PCIe car d lanes (for ex ample, x1 in an x1 sl ot). ⦠Has more lane s electricall y . ⦠Has few er lanes, but is closer t o your needs. F or example, plac e an x16 card in an x4 sl ot, and an x4 card in a an x1 sl ot. â An x1 connect or supports an x1 card only . While an x1 card can be inserted int o a larger sl ot, this may limit pot ential future card pl acement. Component r eplacement guidelines 47
SFF works tation slot identiîÂÂcation and description Maximum power used b y all slo ts must not ex ceed total sys tem power and is subject t o conîÂÂguration limitations. Slot Type Mechanical compatibility Electrical compatibility 4 PCIe3 x16 x16 x16 3 PCIe3 x1 x1 x1 2 PCIe3 x1 x1 x1 1 PCIe3 x16(4) x16 x4 NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe3 lanes supported. 48 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
SFF works tation installation sequence rec ommendations Load order Card description Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Native M.2 1 PCIe graphic card Only 2 Second PCIe graphic card Only 3 Internal PCIe stor age Only 4 Second internal PCIe st orage Only 5 Thunderbolt card Onl y 6 PCIe NIC card 1st 2nd 3rd 7 Serial port (cable) 3rd 2nd 1st 8 HP USB 3.1 T ype- C PCI-E x1 card 2nd 1st 3rd 9 PCIe parall el port card 1st 2nd 3rd 10 1394b FireWir e PCIe Card 1st 2nd 3rd NOTE: Slot sequenc ed from the re ar I/O aperture t o the board edge. Component r eplacement guidelines 49
T ower workstation sl ot identiîÂÂcation and description Maximum power used b y all slo ts must not ex ceed total sys tem power and is subject t o conîÂÂguration limitations. Slot Type Mechanical compatibility Electrical c ompatibility 5 PCIe3x1 x1 x1 4 PCIe3x16 x16 x16 3 PCIe3x4 x4 x4 2 PCIe3x16(4) x16 x4 1 PCI ( optional) PCI PCI NOTE: The PCIe designat ors indicate the mechanical connect or size and number of el ectrical PCIe lanes rout ed to an expansion sl ot. For ex ample, x16(4) means that the exp ansion slot is mechanical ly a x16 l ength connect or, with 4 PCIe3 lanes supported. Slo t two is the primary graphics slot; sl ot f our is the secondary graphics sl ot. 50 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
T ower workstation instal lation sequence recommendations Load order Card description Slot 1 (x1) Slot 2 (x16) Slot 3 (x4) Slot 4 (x16[x4]) Slot 5 (PCI) Native M. 2 (x4) 1 PCIe graphic card Only 2 Second PCIe graphic car d Onl y 3 Internal PCIe s torage Only 4 Second int ernal PCIe storage Only 5 Thunderbolt car d 2nd 1st 6 PCIe NIC card 1st 3rd 2nd 7 PCIe NIC card â 10G Only 8 Serial port (cabl e) 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 9 eSA T A kit (cable ) 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 10 PCIe parall el port card 1st 3rd 2nd 11 1394b FireWire PCIe car d 1st 3rd 2nd NOTE: Slot sequenc ed from the re ar I/O aperture t o the board edge. Hard drives and optical disc drives Handling hard drives CAUTION: T ake pr oper precautions when handling h ard drives t o preven t loss o f work and damage to the comput er or drive. â Do not r emove har d drives from the ship ping package for s torage. K eep hard driv es in their prot ective packaging until the y are mount ed in the computer . â Al ways shut down the oper ating system, turn oî« the power, and unpl ug the power cor d. Never r emove a drive whil e the comput er is on or in standby mode. â Befor e handling a drive, mak e sure y ou discharge s tatic electricity . While handling a drive, a void touching the connect or . â Handle a driv e carefull y . Do not drop it fr om any height. â T o prev ent possibl e ESD damage when the drive is install ed, connect the driv e power cable bef ore connecting the data cabl e. This discharg es accumulat ed static electricity thr ough the drive power cabl e to the c omputer chassis. â Do not use ex cessiv e forc e when inserting a drive. â Av oid exposing a hard drive t o liquids, temperatur e extremes, or pr oducts that have magnetic îÂÂelds such as monitors or spe akers. â If you mus t mail a drive, use a bubbl e-pack mailer or other pr otectiv e packaging and label the packag e âÂÂFragil e: Handle With Car e.â Component r eplacement guidelines 51
Remov al and replacement tips â T o verify the type, size, and capacity of the st orage devic es install ed in the comput er, run Computer Setup (F10) Utility . â Adding a new drive ma y require tha t you mak e new connections fr om the drive to the sys tem board. Not e that: ⦠The primary Serial A T A (SA T A) hard driv e must be connected t o the dark blue primary SA T A connect or on the system boar d labeled SA T A0. ⦠Connect a sec ondary hard drive t o SA T A1. ⦠Connect SA T A optical driv es to the black SA T A2 connect or . ⦠Connect an op tional eSA T A adapter cable t o the black ESA T A connector SA T A3 on the system boar d. (T ower onl y) ⦠Connect a media car d reader USB cabl e to the USB connect or on the system boar d labeled MEDIA. If the media card r eader has a 1394 port, connect the 1394 cabl e to the 1394 PCI card. Drive instal lation and cabling scenarios This section presen ts cabling guidelines for the most c ommon maximum storage conîÂÂgurations. If y ou add or remo ve drives, HP r ecommends you f oll ow these guidelines for highes t drive performance and eî°cient cabl e routing . SFF workstationsâÂÂS A T A cable connection guidelines ConîÂÂguration / PCA SA T A connector SA T A 0 SA T A 1 SA T A 2 SA T A 3 HDD x1 ODD x1 1st HDD 1st ODD HDD x2 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD HDD x3 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD 3rd HDD T ower workstationsâÂÂS A T A cable connection guidelines ConîÂÂguration / PCA SA T A connector SA T A 0 SA T A 1 S A T A 2 SA T A 3 HDD x1 ODD x1 1st HDD 1st ODD e-SA T A HDD x1 ODD x2 1st HDD 1st ODD 2nd ODD HDD x2 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD e-SA T A HDD x2 ODD x2 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD 2nd ODD HDD x3 ODD x1 1st HDD 2nd HDD 1st ODD 3rd HDD 52 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Memory Supported DIMM conîÂÂgurations NO TE: Mirroring and DIMM sparing ar e not supported. Platform ConîÂÂguration SFF â Four DIMM sl ots â Unbuî«ered EC C/nEC C DIMMS only â Maximum capacity: 64 GB T ower â Four DIMM sl ots â Unbuî«ered EC C/nEC C DIMMS only â Maximum capacity: 64 GB BIOS errors and w arnings The BIOS genera tes warnings/ errors on in valid memory conîÂÂgurations: â If the BIOS can îÂÂnd a valid memory conîÂÂguration by disabling pl ugged-in memory, it does so and reports a warning during PO ST . the workstation can s till be started. The w arning will indicate the location o f the failed DIMM on the sys tem board. â If there is no w ay for the BIOS t o obtain a valid memory conîÂÂguration by disabling plug ged-in memory, the BIOS hal ts with a diagnostics 2006 code f or memory error (îÂÂve beeps and blinks). DIMM instal lation guidelines â Install onl y HP-appr oved DDR3 DIMMs CAUTION: HP ships only DIMMs that ar e electrical ly and thermall y compa tible with this works tation. Because third-party DIMMs might not be el ectricall y or thermall y compatibl e, they are no t supported by HP . â Install onl y HP-appr oved DDR3 DIMMs. See h ttp://www .hp. com/go / quickspecs to îÂÂnd DIMMs that ar e compatibl e with the worksta tion. â Do not int ermix DIMMs of diî«erent technol ogies. EC C Unbuî«ered DIMMs (UDIMMs), Regist ered DIMMs (RDIMMs), and Load R educed DIMMs (LRDIMMs) ar e supported on your w orkstations. Supported DIMM conîÂÂgurations on page 53 speciîÂÂes which technol ogies are sup ported on each platform. CAUTION: DIMMs and their sockets ar e k eyed for pr oper install ation. T o preven t socket or DIMM damag e, align these guides pr operly when instal ling DIMMs. Component r eplacement guidelines 53
SFF works tation DIMM installation order Install DIMMs in this or der . NOTE: If you ins tall DIMMs of diî«erent size s, load them in or der of size, starting with lar gest and îÂÂnishing with the small est (lar gest in DIMM 1, small est in last l oaded DIMM). 54 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
T ower workstation DIMM instal lation order Install DIMMs in this or der . NO TE: If you instal l DIMMs of diî«erent sizes, l oad them in order of siz e, starting with large st and îÂÂnishing with the small est (lar gest in DIMM 1, small est in last l oaded DIMM). Component r eplacement guidelines 55
Po wer supply Po wer supply speciîÂÂcations All po wer supplies hav e these speciîÂÂcations: â Wide-ranging, active P ower F actor C orrection (PFC) â ENERG Y ST ARî qualiîÂÂed â FEMP Standb y Power c ompliant @115V (<1W in S5 â Power Oî«) â Surge t oleran t (withstands power sur ges up to 2000V) SFF T ower SFF T ower Power sup ply 240 W 92% eî°cient 400 W 92% eî°cient 200 W 85% eî°cient 280 W 90% eî°cient Operating vol tage range 90âÂÂ264 VA C 90âÂÂ264 VA C 90âÂÂ264 VA C 90âÂÂ264 VA C Rated vol tage range 100âÂÂ240 VA C 100âÂÂ240 VA C 100âÂÂ240 VAC 100âÂÂ240 VA C Rated line fr equency 50âÂÂ60 Hz 50âÂÂ60 Hz 50âÂÂ60 Hz 50âÂÂ60 Hz Operating line frequency rang e 47âÂÂ63 Hz 47âÂÂ66 Hz 47âÂÂ63 Hz 47âÂÂ63 Hz Rated input curr ent 4A @100âÂÂ240 VA C 5.2A @ 100âÂÂ240 VA C 3A @100âÂÂ240 VA C 3.6A @ 100âÂÂ240 VA C Heat dissipation, typical (conîÂÂguration and software dependent) 423.5 btu/hr (106.8 k cal /hr) 782.6 btu/hr (197.4 k cal /hr) 423.5 btu/hr (106.8 k cal /hr) 782.6 btu/hr (197.4 k cal /hr) Heat dissipation, maximum (conîÂÂguration and software dependent) 645.79 btu/hr (162.87 k cal /hr) 996.16 btu/hr (251.23 k cal /hr) 645.79 btu/hr (162.87 k cal /hr) 996.16 btu/hr (251.23 k cal /hr) Power sup ply fan All fans are variable speed One fan, 70mm x 25mm One fan, 80mm x 25mm One fan, 70mm x 25mm One fan, 80mm x 25mm Built -in Self T est LED No Y es No No Power c onsumption in sleep mode <5 W <5 W <5 W <5 W IMPORT ANT : If you ins tall a discret e graphics card in the unit, y ou must use the 400 W power suppl y . The P6 connect or on this power suppl y must be inserted into the gr aphics card. 56 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
Po wer consumption and heat dissipation Pow er consumption and hea t dissipation speciîÂÂcations are av ailable f or multipl e conîÂÂgurations. T o review availabl e speciîÂÂcations, go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quickspecs . T o re ach zero pow er consumption, unpl ug the workstation fr om the power outl et or use a power strip with an on/oî« switch. F or additional information about po wer-sa ving featur es, see the operating syst em installation instructions. This product is in c ompliance with U .S. Executive Or der 13221. Resetting the power supply If an overl oad triggers the pow er supply ov erload pr otection, pow er is immediatel y disconnected. T o reset the po wer supply: 1. Disconnect the po wer cord fr om the workstation. 2. Determine wha t caused the overl oad and îÂÂx the probl em. For troubl eshooting inf ormation, see Diagnostics and tro ubleshoo ting on page 60 . 3. Rec onnect the power cor d and restart the work station. When you turn oî« the w orkstation thro ugh the operating syst em, power consump tion falls bel ow what is consider ed low pow er consumption but doe s not reach z ero . This low pow er consumption f eature ex tends the life o f the power suppl y . System board If you r eplace the syst em board: â Mak e a note o f the cable connections be fore disc onnecting them from the system bo ard. â Fol low good cabl e management practic es. See Cable manag ement on page 45 . The fol lowing tabl es show system cabling f or the workstations. Component r eplacement guidelines 57
System cabling SFF workstation sys tem cabling See Syst em board c omponents on page 5 to det ermine the location of sys tem board c onnectors. Cable T o Cable designator on system bo ard PSU cable PCA (Main power ) P1 (White) PSU cable PCA (PWR CO MM) P2 (White) PSU cable PCA (CPU pow er) P3 (White) SA T A power cable PCA P160 (Black) SA T A power cable First ODD P12 (Black) SA T A power cable Other drive P13 (Black) SA T A power cable SSD P15 (Black) SA T A power cable First HDD P16 (Black) Speak er PCA P6 (White) Cool er fan cable PCA P8 (White) Syst em fan cable PCA P11 (Brown) Front audio cabl e PCA P23 (Blue) LED/P ower button cabl e PCA P5 (Black) Front USB 2.0 cabl e-1 PCA P24 ( Y ell ow) Front USB 3.0 cabl e-2 PCA P26 (Blue) Serial cable PCA P52 (Black) Chassis sol enoid lock PCA P124 (Black) Hood sensor PCA P125 (White) SA T A cable First HDD SA T A0 (Blue) SA T A cable Second HDD SA T A1 (Black) SA T A cable First ODD SA T A2 (Black) SA T A cable Third HDD SA T A3 (Black) 58 Chapter 3 Componen t replacemen t information and guidelines
T ower workstation sys tem cabling See Syst em board c omponents on page 11 to det ermine the location of sys tem board c onnectors. Cable T o Cable designator on system bo ard PSU cable PCA (Main Power ) P1 (White) PSU cable PCA (PWR CO MM) P2 (White) SA T A power cable PCA (CPU Pow er) P3 (Whit e) SA T A power cable First hard drive (Bay 4) P15 (Black) SA T A power cable Second hard driv e (Bay 5) P16 (Black) SA T A power cable Third hard driv e (Bay 6) P17 (Bl ack) SA T A power cable First optical drive (Bay 3) P12 (Black) SA T A power cable Other drive (Bay 2) P13 (Black) PSU cable Second op tical drive (Bay 1) P14 (Black) PSU cable First graphics card P4 (Black) Speak er PCA P6 (White) Cool er fan cable PCA P8 (Whit e) Syst em fan cable PCA P11 (Br own) Front audio cabl e PCA P23 (Blue) Front LED /Pow er button cable PCA P7 (B lack) Front USB 2.0 cabl e PCA P24(Y ellow) Front USB 3.0 cabl e PCA P26 (Bl ue) Serial cable ( optional) PCA P52 (Black) Hood sensor PCA P125 (White) Chassis sol enoid lock PCA P124 (Black) SA T A cable First HDD SA T A0 (Blue) SA T A cable Second HDD SA T A1 (Black) SA T A cable FIrst ODD SA T A2 (Black) SA T A cable Third HDD SA T A3 (Black) eSA T A brack et cable (op tional) First external S A T A devic e SA T A3 (Black) SA T A power cable SA T A device P160 (Black) Component r eplacement guidelines 59
4 Diagnostics and tr ouble shooting This chapt er describes the tools av ailable for diagnosing and tr ouble shooting system is sues. T opics Calling support on page 60 Locating ID labels on page 61 Locating warr anty information on page 61 Diagnosis guidelines on page 61 T rouble shooting checklist on pag e 62 HP troubl eshooting reso urces and t ools on page 63 T rouble shooting scenarios and solutions on p age 66 Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 73 Interpreting sys tem validation diagnostic fr ont panel LEDs and audible code s on page 80 Cal ling suppor t At time s you might enco unter an issue tha t requires sup port. Before yo u call support, do the fol lowing: â Have the work station re adily acc essibl e. â Write do wn the workstation serial numbers, product numbers, model name s, and model numbers and have them in fr ont of yo u. â Not e any applicable err or messages. â Not e any add-on options. â Not e the operating syst em. â Not e any third-party hardw are or softwar e. â Not e the details of any blinking LEDs on the fron t of the workstation (t ower and deskt op conîÂÂgurations) or on the side of the work station (all -in-one conîÂÂgurations). â Not e the applications you wer e using when you enc ounter ed the problem. NOTE: When calling in f or service or support, you might be ask ed for the pr oduct number (exampl e: PS988A V) of the workstation. If the w orkstation has a pr oduct number, it is generall y locat ed next to the 10- or 12-digit serial number of the works tation. NOTE: On most models, the serial number and product number l abels can be found on the to p or side panel and at the re ar of the worksta tion (tower and desk top conîÂÂgurations) or on a pul l-out car d on the side of the display ( all -in-one conîÂÂgurations). 60 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
For a listing o f all worl dwide support phone numbers, go to http:// ww w .hp .com/sup port and select your region. Under C ontact HP , select Al l HP Contacts . F ollo w the instructions to loca te the appro priate phone number . Locating ID labels T o assist in tr oubleshoo ting, identiîÂÂcation labels are av ailable on each w orkstation. â All w orkstations hav e a serial number (unique for each w orkstation) and product number . Hav e these numbers availabl e when you c ontact support. â The CertiîÂÂcate of Authentica tion (CO A) is used for Windows 7-pr einstall ed systems onl y . â A service label shows the b uild ID and Fe ature Byte strings, which ar e needed for syst em board replac ement. NO TE: Y our works tation may look slightl y diî«erent from the il lustra tion in this section. Locating w arran ty information T o locat e warranty inf ormation, go to http:// www .hp. com/support/w arranty-look uptool . T o locat e an existing Care P ack, go to http:// www.hp .c om/go /lookupt ool . T o extend a s tandard product w arranty, go to h ttp://www .hp. com/hps/ carepack . HP Car e Pack Services oî«er upgraded service l evels t o extend and expand a standar d product warr anty . Diagnosis guidelines If you enc ounter a pr oblem with the c omputer, monitor, or so ftware, the fol lowing sections pr ovide a list o f general sugg estions that help y ou isolate and f ocus on the problem be fore taking further action. Diagnosis at startup â V erif y that the c omputer and monitor ar e plugged in to a working electrical o utlet. â Remov e all CDs, or USB drive k eys fr om your syst em befor e turning it on. Locating ID labels 61
â V erif y that the c omputer is turned on and the blue po wer light is blue (normal oper ation) and not red (err or state ). â If you h ave install ed an operating sys tem other than the f actory-install ed operating syst em, check to be sure that it is sup ported on your syst em, go to http:// www .hp. com/go / quicks pecs . â V erif y that the monit or is turned on and the green monitor light is on. No te that no t all monitors are equipped with LED lights to indica te their functionality . â T urn up the brightness and c ontrast c ontrols of the monit or if the monitor is dim. Diagnosis during operation â Look for blinking LEDs on the side o f the comput er . The blinking lights are error c odes that will hel p you diagnose the probl em. Refer t o the Interpreting sys tem validation diagnostic fr ont panel LEDs and audible c odes on page 80 section of this document f or information on int erpreting diagnostic lights and audible c odes. â Check all cabl es for l oose or incorrect c onnections. â Wak e the c omputer by pr essing any k ey on the k eyboar d or the power butt on. If the system remains in suspend mode, shut down the syst em by pr essing and holding the pow er button for at l east f our seconds, then pr ess the power b utton again to r estart the system. If the syst em does not shut down, unplug the pow er cord, w ait a few seconds, then pl ug it in again. If it does not r estart, pres s the power button t o start the comput er . â ReconîÂÂgure the comput er after instal ling a nonâÂÂplug and play expansion boar d or other option. â Be sure that al l requir ed device drivers hav e been install ed. For exampl e, if you hav e connected a prin ter, you mus t install a print er driver . â If you ar e working on a network, plug ano ther computer with a diî«erent cabl e into the network connection. Ther e might be a probl em with the network plug or cable . â If you r ecentl y added new hardw are, r emove the har dware and v erify if the computer functions pr operly . â If you r ecentl y install ed new softwar e, uninstall the softw are and verify if the comput er functions properl y . â If the screen is blank, pl ug the monitor int o a diî«erent video port on the computer if one is av ailable. Al ternativ ely, repl ace the monitor with a monit or that you know is w orking properl y . â Upgrade the BIOS . A new rel ease of the BIOS might ha ve been rel eased that supports new f eatures or îÂÂxes your pr oblem. â Pre ss the caps lock k ey . If the caps lock LED t oggles on or oî«, the k eyboar d is operating c orrectl y . Tro ubleshooting check list Befor e running diagnostic utilities, mak e sure that the f oll owing conditions are met: â The comput er is connected t o a working electrical o utlet and power ed on, and the power light is ill uminated. â The monitor (f or tower or de sktop conîÂÂgurations) is c onnected to a working el ectrical outl et and power ed on, and the power light is ill uminated. â The monitor brightnes s and contras t are pro perly adjust ed. â The k eyboard is o perating corr ectly (pr ess and hold any k ey and listen for a beep ). â All cabl es are pr operly c onnected. 62 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
â All nec essary device driv ers are install ed. â All ex ternal media (such as op tical disks or USB drive k eys) ar e remov ed before s tartup. â The late st version of BIOS, driv ers, and software ar e install ed. HP tro ubleshooting re sources and t ools This section pro vides information t o guide you in tro ubleshooting y our system. Online support Online support reso urces incl ude web-based troubl eshooting t ools, technical knowl edge databases, driver and patch do wnloads, online c ommunities, and product change notiîÂÂcation service s. The fol lowing websit es are also av ailable to y ou: â http:// ww w .hp. com âÂÂP rovides useful pr oduct information. â http:// ww w .hp. com/support/ workstation_manuals âÂÂPr ovides the lat est online documentation. â http:// ww w .hp. com/go /w orkstationsupport âÂÂPr ovides technical support inf ormation for works tations. â http:// ww w8.hp. com/us/ en/ contact -hp/ phone-assist.h tml âÂÂProvide s a listing of the worl dwide technical support tel ephone numbers. Select y our region. â http:// ww w .hp. com/support/ workstation_swdriv ers âÂÂProvide s acces s to softwar e and drivers for worksta tions. HP Support Center T o help yo u troubl eshoot probl ems yoursel f, HP pro vides the HP Support Center . The HP Support C enter is a portal to an ext ensive selection o f online tools. T o acc ess the HP Support Cent er, compl ete the fol lowing steps: 1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/go /work stationsupport . 2. Sear ch for your pr oduct. HP Chat Support HP Chat Support is a set of web-b ased support tools that automat e and speed up the resol ution of probl ems conc erning desktop c omputing, tape st orage, and printing. HP Chat Support enabl es you t o electronical ly submit a support tick et to HP o ver the web . When you submit a support tick et, HP Chat Support coll ects information abo ut the workstation and pas ses it to an online support specialist. The c ollection o f information might tak e up to 30 seconds, depending on the works tation conîÂÂguration. When you submit a support tick et, yo u receiv e a conîÂÂrmation message con taining your case ID, the support hours for y our location, and the es timated time of r esponse. For mor e information about HP Cha t Support, go to http://instantsupport.hp .c om/ . NO TE: This featur e is not availabl e for Linux. Customer Advisorie s, Customer and Security Bul letins, and Customer Notice s T o îÂÂnd advisories, bul letins, and notic es: HP troubl eshooting r esourc es and tools 63
1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/go /work stationsupport . 2. Sear ch for your pr oduct. 3. On the product p age, select the tab T op Issues and Sol utions . Product Change NotiîÂÂcations Product Ch ange NotiîÂÂcations (PCNs) are pr oactive notiîÂÂcations for pr oduct changes oc curring within a 30- to 60-day window of the eî«ective dat e of the change in the manuf acturing proces s. PCNs give customers advance no tice of ch anges to their pr oduct, such as an updated BIOS version that the y might need to decide whether to downl oad prior to the chang e taking place. T o view a list of PCNs, go to the Advisorie s, Bulletins & Notices pag e for your pr oduct. Helpful hin ts If you enc ounter a pr oblem with the work station, monitor, or softw are, the fol lowing gener al suggestions might help y ou isolate and f ocus on the problem be fore taking further action. At s tartup â V erif y that the work station is plugged in to a functional AC o utlet. â Remov e all optical discs and USB î¯ash driv es befor e starting the workstation. â V erif y that the work station is on and the power light is on. â If you h ave install ed an operating sys tem other than the f actory-install ed operating syst em, conîÂÂrm that it is supported on y our system b y going to http:// www.hp .c om/go/ quickspecs . â V erif y that the int ernal display panel is lit. â If the internal dis play panel is dim, turn up the brightnes s. â If you h ave an extern al monitor: ⦠V erif y that the monit or is plugged int o a functional AC outl et. ⦠V erif y that the monit or is on and the green monitor light is on. ⦠If the monitor is dim, turn up the brightnes s and contras t controls. During operation â Beeps and blinking lights on the works tation are error c odes that can help y ou diagnose probl ems. For more inf ormation on interpr eting these codes, see the Diagnostic LED and audibl e (beep) codes section in the Maintenance and Service Guide f or your work station. â Pre ss and hold any k ey . If the syst em beeps, your k eyboar d is operating corr ectly . â Check all cabl es for l oose or incorrect c onnections. â Wak e the work station by pre ssing the power butt on or any k ey on the k eyboard. If the syst em remains in suspend mode, shut down the syst em by pr essing and holding the pow er button for at l east f our seconds. Then pr ess the power b utton again to r estart the system. If the system doe s not shut down, unplug the po wer cord, w ait a few sec onds, and then plug it in again. If the system doe s not res tart, press the power b utton. â After ins talling a non-PnP expansion boar d or other option ( such as a diskett e drive), re start the worksta tion. 64 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
â Be sure that al l requir ed device drivers hav e been install ed. For exampl e, if you hav e connected a prin ter, you mus t install a print er driver . â If you ar e working on a network, use another cabl e to plug y our workstation in to the network connection. If y ou still canno t connect, there might be a pr oblem with the network pl ug. â If you r ecentl y added new hardw are, r emove the har dware t o see whether the workstation functions properl y . â If you r ecentl y install ed new softwar e, uninstall the softw are to see whether the work station functions properl y . â If the internal dis play panel on an all -in-one workstation is bl ank, open the workstation and be sur e that both ends of the cabl e between the syst em board and the intern al display panel ar e connected. If y ou are using a gr aphics card, verify that the car d is properl y install ed. â Upgrade the BIOS . A new rel ease of the BIOS might ha ve been rel eased that supports new f eatures or îÂÂxes your pr oblem. â For mor e detailed inf ormation, see the troubl eshooting chapt er in the Maintenance and Service Guide at http:// ww w .hp. com/support/ workstation_manuals . Customer Sel f Repair Under the Customer Sel f Repair pr ograms, yo u can order a replac ement part and install the part without on- site HP t echnical assistance. Cus tomer Sel f Repair might be requir ed for some c omponents. For more information, g o to http:// ww w .hp. com/go / sel frepair and sel ect your product. NO TE: Some components are no t eligible for Cus tomer Sel f Repair and must be r eturned to HP for service. Call support f or further instructions before att empting to r emove or r epair these components. HP troubl eshooting r esourc es and tools 65
Tro ubleshooting scen arios and solutions This section presen ts troubl eshooting scenarios and pos sible solutions f or a Windows-based syst em. Sol ving minor problems Problem Cause Possible Solution Works tation appears froz en and does not shut down when the power butt on is pressed. Software c ontrol of the po wer switch is not functional. 1. Press and hold the po wer button for at l east fo ur seconds until the comput er shuts down. 2. Disconnect the electrical plug fr om the outlet. 3. Restart the computer . Works tation seems to be froz en. Progr am in use has stopped responding t o commands. 1. If possible, use the Windows T ask Manager to isolate and terminat e the oî«ending process. 2. Attempt the normal Windows shut down procedur e. 3. Restart the computer using the pow er button. Works tation date and time display is inc orrect. Real -time clock (R TC) batt ery might need replac ement. 1. Reset the date and time in the Contr ol Panel. 2. Replace the RT C battery . Works tation appears to pause periodicall y . Network driver is l oaded and no network connection is established. Establish a network connection, or use C omputer Setup (F10) Utility or Microsoft Windows De vice Manager to disabl e the network contr oller . Cursor does not mov e using the arrow k eys on the k eypad. num lock is on. Press num l ock . The num lock k ey can be disabled or enabl ed in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . Poor performanc e is experienced. Proc essor is hot. 1. Verify that airî¯ow to the comp uter is not bl ocked. 2. Verify that chassis fans ar e connected and working properl y . Some fans oper ate only when needed. 3. Verify that the proces sor heatsink is install ed properl y . Hard drive is ful l. T ransfer data fr om the hard drive t o create mor e space on the hard driv e. Works tation powered oî« automaticall y and the Power LED î¯ashes red 2 times ( once every second), f ollow ed by a 2- second pause, and then two simultaneo us beeps sounded. Proc essor thermal prot ection is activated. A fan might be bl ocked or not turning. OR The proce ssor heatsink is not properl y attached to the proc essor . 1. Verify that the comput er air vents are not bl ocked. 2. Open the access panel and pr ess the comput er power button. 3. Verify that the system fan is running . 4. Verify that the proces sor heatsink fan spins. If the f an is not spinning, v erify that the heatsink fan cable is pl ugged into the syst em board connect or and that the heatsink is properl y seated. 5. Replace the proc essor heatsink. Syst em does not turn on, and the LEDs on the front o f the comput er are not î¯ashing. Syst em cannot power on. Pr ess and hold the pow er button for l ess than four sec onds. If the hard driv e LED turns green: 1. T o îÂÂnd a faul ty device, remov e all devices one at a time : a. Disconnect AC po wer to the comput er . b. Remove a device . c. Reconnect AC pow er and turn on the computer . 66 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Problem Cause Possible Solution 2. Repeat this proce ss until the faulty de vice is identiîÂÂed. Remov e the graphics card last. R eplace the faul ty device. 3. If no faulty device is f ound, replace the sys tem board. OR 1. Press and hold the po wer button for l ess than four seconds. If the har d drive LED does not ill uminate: a. Verify that the c omputer is plugged in to a working AC outl et. b. Verify that the power button h arness is connected t o the inline front panel I/ O device assembl y connector . 2. Verify that the power suppl y unit (PSU) cables ar e connected t o the system boar d. 3. Verify power supply unit PS U functionality (T ower onl y): a. Disconnect the AC po wer . b. Unplug cables connect ed to the system boar d. c. Reconnect AC pow er â If the PSU fan spins and the BIS T LED illumin ates, the PSU is good; repl ace the system boar d. â If the PSU fan does no t spin or the LED does not ill uminate, replac e the PSU. Sol ving hard drive problems Problem Cause Solution Hard drive err or Hard drive has bad sect ors or has fail ed. Locate and bl ock the usage of bad sectors. If nec essary, ref ormat the hard drive. If the drive is detect ed by the UEFI, run F2 Diagnostics Drive T est. Disk transaction probl em The direct ory structure is bad, or there is a pr oblem with a îÂÂle. 1. Open Windows Explorer and sel ect a drive. 2. Right click on the drive and select Properties > T ools . 3. Under Error-checking, sel ect Check Now. Drive not f ound (identiîÂÂed) Improper cabl e connection On computers with discr ete data and power cabl es, make sur e that the data and power cabl es are securel y connected t o the hard driv e. (See the Hard drive section of this guide for connection details.) Improperl y seated har d drive On systems with blind-mate driv e connections, check for connector damag e on the drive and in the chassis. Reseat the h ard drive and its carrier in the chassis t o make sure that a pr oper connection. (See the Hard drive section of this guide for connection details.) T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions 67
Problem Cause Solution The system might no t have automaticall y rec ognized a newly ins talled devic e. 1. Run Computer Setup (F10) Utility . 2. If the system does not rec ognize the new device, v erify that the device is lis ted in Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . If it is listed, the pr obable cause is a driver pr oblem. If it is not list ed, the probable cause is a har dware pr oblem. 3. If this drive is newly instal led, enter Setup and try adding a POST delay under Adv anced > Boot Options . Drive re sponds slowl y immediatel y after power -up. Run Comput er Setup (F10) Utility and increase the POST Del ay in Advanced.> Boot Options Non-system disk or NTLDR missing message Syst em is trying to start from nonbootable media. Remov e the optical disc or USB drive. Syst em is trying to start from a damaged hard driv e. 1. Inser t a bootabl e system optical disc or USB driv e and restart the c omputer . 2. If the hard drive is still inac cessibl e and MBR Security is enabled, try re storing the previo usly saved MBR image by entering Setup and sel ecting Security > Save/ Restore MBR o f the system hard drive . Syst em îÂÂles missing or not properl y install ed. 1. Inser t a bootabl e system optical disc or USB driv e and restart. 2. Verify that the hard drive is p artitioned and formatted. 3. Install the system îÂÂles for the ap propriate oper ating system, if nec essary . Hard drive boo t disabled in Comput er Setup. Run Comput er Setup (F10) Utility and enable the hard driv e entry in the Advanced > Boot Options list. Works tation will not start. Hard drive is damag ed. Replac e the hard drive. 68 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Sol ving display problems These sugges tions apply t o monitors connected t o deskt op and tower conîÂÂgurations, and t o external monitors connect ed to all -in-one conîÂÂgurations. Problem Cause Solution Blank screen (no video ). The cable connections ar e not correct. Verify the cabl e connections from the monitor t o the comput er and to a working electrical o utlet. The monitor is oî«. T urn the monitor on (LED is on). Y ou might need t o refer to the monitor manual for an expl anation of LED signals. Screen blanking utility instal led or energy saver f eatures enabled. Pres s a key or the mo use button and, if set, enter y our passwor d. Syst em ROM is bad; system is running in F ailSafe Boot Bl ock mode (indicated by 8 beeps ). Reî¯ash the ROM using a SoftP aq. Fixed-sync monit or does not sync at the resol ution speciîÂÂed. Verify that the monit or can accept the same horiz ontal scan rate as the r esolution speciîÂÂed. Comput er is in Hibernate mode. Press the power butt on to resume fr om Hibernate mode. Works tation monitor settings are not c ompatible with the monitor . 1. When you see Press f8 in the bottom-righ t corner of the screen, r estart the computer and pr ess f8 during startup. 2. Using the keyboar d arrow k eys, select Enable VGA Mode , and then press en ter . 3. For Windows, double-click the Display ic on in the Contr ol Panel and then select the Settings tab . 4. Use the sliding control to r eset the resol ution. The display work s properly during the POST but g oes blank when the operating syst em starts. The display settings in the operating syst em are incompatibl e with your graphics card and monitor . 1. For Windows, restart yo ur computer in V GA mode. 2. After the operating syst em starts, change the display settings to match those sup ported by your graphics car d and monitor . 3. Refer to yo ur operating system and gr aphics card documentation for inf ormation about changing display settings. Power LED î¯ashes r ed 6 times (once every second), f ollow ed by a two- second pause, and then the comput er beeps 6 times. Pre-video gr aphics error . F or systems with a graphics card: 1. Reseat the graphics card. 2. If the card requires ex ternal power, mak e sure the power cable is pr operly connect ed. 3. Replace the graphics card. 4. Replace the system boar d. For syst ems with no graphics card instal led, the CPU may hav e no integra ted graphics capability . Monitor does not function when used with Energy Saver f eatures. Monitor without Ener gy Saver capabilities is being used with Energy Saver f eatures enabl ed. Disable the monit or Energy Saver featur e. Dim characters The brightness and c ontrast contr ols are not set pro perly . Adjust the monitor brigh tness and contras t controls. T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions 69
Problem Cause Solution Cables ar e not properl y connected. Verify that the gr aphics cable is connected t o the graphics card and the monitor . Blurry video or reques ted resol ution cannot be set. If the graphics contr oller w as upgraded, the corr ect video drivers might not be l oaded. Install the video driv ers included in the upgrade kit, or download and ins tall the lates t drivers for your gr aphics card from http:// welcome .hp.c om/country / us/ en/ support.html . Monitor cannot dis play request ed resolution. Change the reques ted resol ution. The picture is br oken up, rol ls, jitters, or î¯ashes. The monitor connections migh t be faul ty, or the monitor might be incorrectl y adjusted. 1. Be sure the monitor cable is secur ely connect ed to the comput er . 2. In a multiple CRT monit or system, mak e sure that the monitors' el ectromagnetic îÂÂelds are not int erfering with each other . Move them apart if nece ssary . 3. Move î¯uorescent lights or fans that ar e too close to the CRT monitor . Monitor must be degaus sed. Degauss the monit or . Vibrating or rattling noise c oming from inside a CRT monit or when powered on. Monitor degaussing c oil has been activated. None. It is normal for the degaus sing coil to be activat ed when the monitor is turned on. Clicking noise coming from inside a CRT monitor . Electr onic relays hav e been activated inside the monit or . None. It is normal for some monit ors to make a clicking noise when turned on and oî«, when going in and out of S tandby mode, and when changing resol utions. High pitched noise coming fr om inside a î¯at-panel monitor . Brightness and c ontrast settings are too high. Lower brightne ss and contrast settings. Fuzzy focus; s treaking, ghosting, or shadowing eî«ects; horizontal scrolling line s; faint vertical bars; or unable t o center the pictur e on the screen (î¯at-panel monitors using an analog V GA input connection onl y .) Flat-p anel monitorâÂÂs int ernal digital conv ersion circuits might be unable t o correctl y interpret the output synchr onization of the graphics card. 1. Select the monitorâÂÂs Aut o-Adjustment option in the monitorâ s onscreen display menu. 2. Manually synchroniz e the Clock and Clock Phase onscreen displa y functions. 3. Download SoftPaq SP22333 t o assist with the synchronization). Some typed symbols do not appear correctl y . The font yo u are using does not support that symbol. Use the Charact er Map to locat e and select the appropriat e symbol. For Windows 7, sel ect Start > All Progr ams > Accessories > System T ools > Character Map . Y ou can cop y the symbol from the Char acter Map into a document. For Windows 8.1, fr om the Start screen, type character map . The application appears under the Apps he ading. (Windows 10) T ype character in the taskbar search bo x, and then select Character Map . 70 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Sol ving audio problems Problem Cause Solution Sound does not c ome out of the speak er or headphones. Software v olume contr ol is turned down. Double-click the Spe aker icon on the taskbar, and then use the volume slider t o adjust the volume. The external s peakers ar e not turned on. T urn on the external spe akers. External s peakers pl ugged into the wrong audio jack. See your sound car d documentation for pro per speak er connection. Digital CD audio is not enabl ed. Enable digital CD audio: 1. From the Control P anel, select System. 2. On the Hardware tab, sel ect the Device Manager button. 3. Right-click the CD/DVD device and sel ect Properties. 4. On the Properties tab, select Enable digital CD audio f or this CD-ROM device . Headphones or devic es connected t o the line-out connector h ave muted the internal s peaker . T urn on and use headphones or external s peak ers, if connected, or disc onnect headphones or extern al speak ers. Vol ume is muted. 1. From the Contr ol Panel, select Sound, S peech and Audio Devices , and then select So unds and Audio Devices . 2. Deselect the Mute checkbox. Comput er is in Standby mode. P ress the power b utton to resume fr om Standby mode. Noise or no sound comes o ut of the speak ers or headphones. 1. If you are using digital speak ers that hav e a stereo jack and you w ant the system to aut oswitch to digital, use a ster eo-to-mono adapter t o engage the auto sense featur e, or use multimedia devic e properties to swit ch the audio signal from anal og to digital. 2. If the headphones have a mono jack, use the mul timedia device pr operties to switch the syst em to analog o ut. NOTE: If you set digital as the Output Mode, the internal s peaker and ex ternal analog s peakers no l onger output audio until y ou switch back to an aut o sense or analog mode. If you set anal og as the Output Mode, external digital speak ers do not function until yo u change the output mode back to an aut o-sense or digital mode. Sound occurs int ermittently . Processor r esourc es are being used by other open ap plications. Shut down all open pr ocessor -intensive ap plications. Works tation appears to be lock ed up while r ecording audio . The hard driv e might be full. 1. Before rec ording, be sure there is eno ugh free spac e on the hard driv e. 2. Try recor ding the audio îÂÂle in a compres sed format. T roubl eshooting sc enarios and solutions 71
Sol ving printer problems Problem Cause Solution Printer doe s not print. Printer is no t turned on and online. T urn the printer on and be sure it is online. The correct prin ter driver for the application is not instal led. 1. Install the correct print er driver for the application. 2. Try printing using the MS-DOS command: DIR C:\> [printer port] Replace print er port with the address o f the printer used. If the printer work s, reload the print er driver . If you ar e on a network, you might not hav e made a connection to the prin ter . Mak e the proper network connection t o the printer . Printer migh t have failed. Run printer self -test. Printer doe s not turn on. The cables might not be connected pr operly . Sol ving power supply problems This section presen ts power suppl y troubl eshooting scenarios. Testing power supply Befor e replacing the pow er supply unit (PSU), use the Buil t-In Sel f - T est (BIST) fe ature t o learn if the pow er suppl y still works. NOTE: Not al l PSUs have the BIS T functionality . Refer to the Rear panel c omponents section of this document to det ermine BIST avail ability for your work station. T o tes t the power suppl y: 1. Unplug the A C power . 2. Unplug al l power cable s to the system bo ards. 3. Pl ug in AC power and verify the f ollo wing: â If the green BIS T LED on the rear o f the workstation is il luminated and the f an is spinning, the PSU is functional. â If the green BIS T LED is not ill uminated or the fan is no t spinning, replac e the PSU . See the Rear panel components section of this documen t to locat e the BIST LED on yo ur workstation. Problem Cause Solution PSU shuts down int ermittently . Power supply f ault. Replac e the PSU. Works tation powers oî« and the Power LED î¯ashes r ed 2 times (once every second), f ollow ed by a two- second pause. Proc essor thermal prot ection is activated. A fan might be bl ocked or not turning. 1. Make sure that the w orkstation air vents ar e not block ed. 2. Open the access panel and pr ess the workstation pow er button. 72 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Problem Cause Solution OR The proce ssor heatsink fan assembl y is not properl y attached to the proc essor . 3. Verify that the system fan is running . 4. Verify that the proces sor heatsink fan spins. If the heatsink fan is no t spinning, verify that the fan cable is pl ugged into the syst em board connector . Verify that the fan is pr operly seat ed. 5. Replace the proc essor heatsink. Power LED î¯ashes r ed (once e very 2 seconds). Power f ailure (power sup ply is overl oaded). 1. Determine whether a device is causing the probl em by performing the fol lowing: a. Disconnect AC po wer . b. Remove all attached devic es. c. Turn on the work station. If the system ent ers the POST, perform the fol lowing: a. Power oî« the w orkstation. b. Replace one device at a time and r epeat this procedur e until a failur e occurs. c. Replace the devic e causing the failure. d. Continue adding devices one at a time t o verify that all devic es are functioning. 2. Verify power supply function ality (T ower onl y). a. Disconnect AC po wer . b. Unplug all system boar d power cables. c. Plug in AC pow er . â If the PSU fan spins and the LED is illumin ated (see T esting power suppl y on page 72 ), the power suppl y is good. Replace the sys tem board. â If the PSU fan does no t spin or the LED does not ill uminate (see T esting power suppl y on page 72 ), replac e the power suppl y . Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics is a UniîÂÂed Ext ensible Firmwar e Interfac e (UEFI) that all ows you t o run diagnostic tes ts to determine whether the c omputer har dware is functioning pr operly . The tool runs outside the operating sys tem so that it can isolat e hardwar e failur es from issue s that are caused by the o perating system or other softw are components. When HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a f ailure th at require s hardwar e replac ement, a 24-digit F ailure ID is g enerated. This ID can then be pr ovided to support to hel p determine how t o correct the pr oblem. T o start HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI), fol low the se steps: 1. T urn on or res tart the computer, and quick ly pr ess esc 2. Pr ess F2. The BIOS sear ches three plac es for the diagnostic t ools, in the foll owing order: Using HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) 73
a. Connected USB driv e NO TE: T o download the HP PC Har dware Diagnos tics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Do wnloading HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB de vice on page 74 . b. Hard driv e c. BIOS 3. When the diagnostic t ool opens, select the type of diagnostic t est you w ant to run, and then f ollo w the on-screen instructions. NOTE: If you need t o stop a diagnos tic test, pr ess esc. Downl oading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) t o a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) downl oad instructions are pr ovided in English onl y, and you must use a Windows c omputer to do wnload and cr eate the HP UEFI support envir onment because only . exe îÂÂles are oî«ered. There ar e two options to do wnload HP PC Har dward Diagnostics t o USB device. Download the late st UEFI version 1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/go /techc enter /pcdiags . The HP PC Diagnostics home p age is displayed. 2. In the HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics section, click the Dowl oad link, and then select Run . Download any version o f UEFI for a speciîÂÂc product 1. Go to http ://www .hp. com/support , and then select y our coun try . The HP Support page is displa yed. . 2. Click Drivers & Downloads. 3. Use the cat egories listed t o îÂÂnd your pr oduct. â or â Click Find Now to l et HP automatical ly detect y our product. 4. Select y our comput er, and then select y our operating syst em. 5. In the Diagnostic section, f ollow the on-scr een instructions to sel ect and downlo ad the UEFI version you want. POS T error me ssages and diagnostic fr ont panel LEDs and audible c odes This appendix lists the err or codes, error me ssages, and the various indica tor light and audible sequenc es that yo u may encount er during Power -On Self - T est (POS T) or comput er restart, the pr obable sour ce of the probl em, and steps y ou can tak e to resol ve the err or condition. POST Me ssage Disabled suppr esses most sys tem message s during POST, such as memory coun t and non- error t ext messages. If a PO ST error oc curs, the screen will displ ay the error messag e. T o manuall y switch to the POST Me ssages Enabl ed mode during POST, pre ss any k ey (ex cept F10, F11, or F12). The de fault mode is POST Me ssage Disabled. The speed at which the c omputer l oads the operating syst em and the extent t o which it is test ed are determined b y the POST mode sel ection. 74 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Quick Boot is a fas t startup proce ss that does not run al l of the system l evel t ests, such as the memory test. Ful l Boot runs all of the R OM-based syst em tests and tak es l onger to compl ete. Ful l Boot may also be enabl ed to run every 1 to 30 days on a r egularl y scheduled basis. T o establish the schedule, reconîÂÂgure the c omputer t o the Full Boo t Every x Days mode, using Comput er Setup. NO TE: For more inf ormation on Comput er Setup, see Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities on page 18 . POS T numeric codes and tex t messages This section co vers those POST err ors that have numeric c odes associated with them. The section also includes some t ext messages th at may be encount ered during POS T . NO TE: The computer wil l beep once after a PO ST text me ssage is display ed on the screen. Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 002-Option ROM Checksum Err or Sys tem ROM or expansion boar d option ROM checksum. 1. Verify the correct RO M. 2. Flash the ROM if needed. 3. If an expansion board was rec ently added, remov e it to see if the probl em remains. 4. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 5. If the message disappears, there may be a probl em with the expansion card. 6. Replace the system boar d. 003-S ystem Boar d Failur e DMA or timers. 1. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 2. Remove expansion boar ds. 3. Replace the system boar d. 005-Real - Time Cl ock Power Loss Invalid time or dat e in conîÂÂguration memory . RT C (real -time clock) batt ery may need to be replac ed. Reset the dat e and time under Control Panel (Comp uter Setup can also be used). If the probl em persists, replace the R TC batt ery . See the Remov al and Replacement section for instructions on installing a ne w battery . 008âÂÂMicrocode P atch Error Proc essor is not supported b y the BIOS. 1. Upgrade BIOS to pr oper version. 2. Change the processor . 009âÂÂPMM Al location Error during MEBx Download Memory error during POST ex ecution of the Management Engine (ME) BIOS Ext ensions option RO M. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the c omputer, res tore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00A-Pr oduct Information Not V alid The pr oduct information progr ammed into the system boar d is missing or invalid. Use Comput er Setup to update this inf ormation. POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 75
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 00B-MEBx Module did no t checksum correctl y Memory error during POS T execution of the Management Engine (ME) BIOS Ext ensions option RO M. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the pow er cord, r estore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00C -PMM Deal location Error during MEBx Cleanup Memory error during POST ex ecution of the Management Engine (ME) BIOS Ext ensions option RO M. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the pow er cord, r estore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00D-Setup Err or during MEBx Execution MEBx selection or exit r esulted in a setup failur e. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. Unplug the power cord, r e-seat the memory modules, and reboo t the comput er . 3. If the memor y conîÂÂguration was rec ently changed, unplug the pow er cord, r estore the original memory conîÂÂguration, and reboot the c omputer . 4. If the error persists, replace the sys tem board. 00E-Inven tory Error during MEBx Execution BIOS information p assed to the MEBx resul ted in a failur e. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. If the error persists, update to the lat est BIOS version. 3. If the error still persists, repl ace the system boar d. 00F-Interfac e Error during MEBx Execution MEBx oper ation experienced a hardw are error during communication with the ME. 1. Reboot the computer . 2. If the error persists, update to the lat est BIOS version. 3. If the error still persists, repl ace the system boar d. 100-Front A udio Not Connected F ront audio cable has been detached or unseated fr om system boar d. Reconnect or r eplace front audio cabl e. 2E1-MemorySize Error Memory amount has changed since the l ast boot (memory added or remov ed). The system memory size is diî«erent fr om the last startup . The most common re ason is the remov al of memory from the system boar d. Pres s the F1 key t o save the memory changes. If this message persists, v erify that the memory modules are ins talled c orrectly . 76 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 2E2-Memory Error Memory module conîÂÂguration fail ed during boot up . 1. Ensure memory modules are c orrectly install ed. 2. Verify proper memory module type. 3. Remove and replac e the identiîÂÂed faulty memory module(s). 4. If the error persists after replacing memory modules, repl ace the system board. 2E3-Incompatibl e Memory Module in Memory Sock et(s) X, X, ... A memory module in memory sock et identiîÂÂed in the error messag e is missing critical SPD information, or is inc ompatible with the chipset. 1. Verify proper memory module type. 2. Try another memory sock et. 3. Replace with a supported modul e. 2E4-DIMM ConîÂÂguration Warning The current memory conîÂÂguration is not optimized. Rearr ange the DIMMs so that each channel has the same amount of memory . 2E5-EC C Memory Module Detected on Unsupported Platf orm Recentl y added memory module(s) support EC C memory error corr ection. 1. If additional memor y was r ecently added, remov e it to see if the probl em remains. 2. Check product documentation for memory support information. 2E6âÂÂMemory Not ConîÂÂgured Corr ectly for Proper MEB x Execution DIMM1 is not instal led. Mak e sure there is a memory module in the DIMM1 sock et and that it is properl y seated. 300âÂÂConîÂÂguration Change Warning The stor age device conîÂÂguration will be updated as shown. Not applicabl e 301-Hard Disk 1: SMART Har d Drive Detects Imminent F ailure Hard drive is abo ut to fail. (Some hard driv es have a har d drive îÂÂrmware patch tha t will îÂÂx an erroneous err or message.) 1. Determine if hard drive is giving c orrect error messag e. Run the Drive Pro tection Syst em test under using F2 Diagnostics when booting the comp uter . 2. Apply hard driv e îÂÂrmware patch if applicable. (A vailable at http://www .hp. com/support .) 3. Back up contents and replac e hard drive . 302-Hard Disk 2: SMART Har d Drive Detects Imminent F ailure Hard drive is abo ut to fail. (Some hard driv es have a har d drive îÂÂrmware patch tha t will îÂÂx an erroneous err or message.) 1. Determine if hard drive is giving c orrect error messag e. Run the Drive Pro tection Syst em test under using F2 Diagnostics when booting the comp uter . 2. Apply hard driv e îÂÂrmware patch if applicable. (A vailable at http://www .hp. com/support .) 3. Back up contents and replac e hard drive . 309 â 30C: Hard Disk 3âÂÂ6: SMART Har d Drive Detects Imminent F ailure Hard drive is abo ut to fail. (Some hard driv es have a har d drive îÂÂrmware patch tha t will îÂÂx an erroneous err or message.) 1. Determine if hard drive is giving c orrect error messag e. Run the Drive Pro tection Syst em test under using F2 Diagnostics when booting the comp uter . 2. Apply hard driv e îÂÂrmware patch if applicable. (A vailable at http://www .hp. com/support .) 3. Back up contents and replac e hard drive . 3F0âÂÂBoot Devic e Not Found Boot device not fo und. Insert boot device or l oad operating syst em. POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 77
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 3F1âÂÂHard Disk 1 Err or Hard disk 1 error . 1. Check and/ or replace cabl es. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. Replace the hard disk driv e. 3F2âÂÂHard Disk 2 Err or Hard disk 2 error . 1. Check and/ or replace cabl es. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. Replace the hard disk driv e. 400-Serial P ort A Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both external and intern al serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 401-Serial P ort B Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both external and int ernal serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 402-Serial P ort C Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both extern al and internal serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 403-Serial P ort D Address Conî¯ict Detect ed Both external and in ternal serial ports are assigned to the same r esource s. 1. Remove any serial port expansion cards. 2. Clear CMOS. (See Cl earing and resetting the BIOS on page 83 .) 3. ReconîÂÂgure card resour ces and/ or run Comput er Setup or Windows utilities. 419-Out of Memory Space f or Option ROMs Recentl y added PCI expansion card con tains an option RO M too large t o download during POS T . â² If a PCI expansion card w as recentl y added, remov e it to see if the probl em remains. 41A-Fr ont USB1/USB2 Not Connected Front USB cable has been detached or unse ated from syst em board. Reconnect or r eplace front USB cabl e. 41B-Device in PCI Expr ess Slot F ailed T o Initialize There is an incomp atibility or problem with a PCIe device and the syst em or PCIe link coul d not be conîÂÂgured to a v alid bus width or speed. T ry rebooting the system. If the err or reoccurs, the device may no t work with this system 43A-USB T ype-C I2C Not Connected Cable is requir ed between I2C on card and USB- C on the system boar d. Install cabl e between I2C on card and USB-C on the system boar d. 43B-More Than One USB type-C Cards Ar e Install ed More than one USB type-C card is instal led. R emove USB type-C card so onl y one is install ed. 500âÂÂBIOS Rec overy A syst em BIOS reco very has occurred. Not applicable. 70x- Wireles s Mode Not Supported The syst em has detected a wir eless modul e install ed in the system that is not sup ported and has been disabled. Replace with a sup ported module. 78 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Contr ol panel message Description Recommended action 800-Keyboar d Error Keyboard fail ure. 1. Reconnect k eyboard with c omputer turned oî«. 2. Check connector for bent or missing pins. 3. Ensure that none of the k eys are depressed. 4. Replace k eyboard. 801-Keyboar d or System Unit Err or Keyboard fail ure. 1. Reconnect the k eyboard with c omputer turned oî«. 2. Ensure that none of the k eys are depressed. 3. Replace the k eyboard. 4. Replace the system boar d. 900-CPU F an Not Detected CPU fan is not c onnected or may hav e malfunctioned. 1. Reseat CPU fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace CPU fan. 901-Chassis, Rear Ch assis, or Front Chas sis Fan not Detect ed Chassis, re ar chassis, or front chas sis fan is not connected or ma y have malfunctioned. 1. Reseat chassis, re ar chassis, or front chassis fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace chassis, r ear chassis, or front chassis fan. 903-Computer C over Has Been Remo ved Since Last Syst em Startup N/ A 904-SA T A Cabling Error One or more SA T A devices ar e improperly attached. For optimal perf ormance, the SA T A 0 and SA T A 1 ports should be used for har d drives befor e other ports. Ensure SA T A connect ors are used in ascending order . For one device, use SA T A 0. For two devices, use SA T A 0 and SA T A 1. For thr ee devices, use SA T A 0, SA T A 1, and SA T A 2. 90B-F an Failur e The system has det ected that a cooling f an is not operating c orrectl y . 1. Reseat fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace fan. 90D-S ystem T emperature Thermal shutdown occurr ed. The system BIOS has detect ed your machine was pre viously shut down to av oid overheating. Ov erheating may occur if the cooling v ents are block ed or the operating t emperature exc eeds the system speciîÂÂcations. The machine should r eturn to normal operation onc e the situation is resolv ed. Mak e sure system has pr oper airî¯ow. 90E-Pow er Supply F an Not detect ed Power suppl y fan is not c onnected or may have malfunctioned. 1. Reseat power suppl y fan. 2. Reseat fan cable . 3. Replace power suppl y fan. 910âÂÂFilt er Warning Airî¯ow îÂÂlter is dirty . R eplace the airî¯ow îÂÂlter. POST err or messages and diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 79
Interpreting system v alidation diagnostic fron t panel LEDs and audible c odes During the system v alidation phase that occurs at sys tem startup, the BIOS validat es the functionality of the fol lowing subsyst ems and conditions: â AC adap ter â Syst em board pow er â Proc essor fail ure â BIOS corrup tion â Memory failur e â Graphics fail ure â Syst em board f ailure â BIOS authentication f ailure If an error is det ected, speciîÂÂc patterns o f long and short blinks, ac companied by l ong and short beeps (where applicable ) are used to iden tif y the error . These p atterns will mak e up a two part code: â Major â the category of the err or â Minor â the speciîÂÂc error within the cat egory NOTE: Single beep /blink codes ar e not used. Number of long beeps/blink s Error category 1 Not used 2 BIOS 3 Har dware 4 Thermal 5 Sys tem board Patt erns of blink/beep codes are det ermined by using the foll owing paramet ers: â 1 second pause oc curs after the last major blink. â 2 second pause oc curs after the last minor blink. â Beep error c ode sequences occur f or the îÂÂrst 5 iterations o f the pattern and then st op. â Blink error c ode sequences c ontinue until the comput er is unplugged or the pow er button is pre ssed. NOTE: Not al l diagnostic lights and audible c odes are avail able on all models. The red LED blinks t o repr esent the major error cat egory (long blinks). The whit e LED blinks to r epresent the minor error cat egory (short blinks). For exampl e, âÂÂ3.5â indicates 3 l ong red blinks and 5 short whit e blinks to communicat e the proce ssor is not detect ed. 80 Chapter 4 Diagnostics and tr oubleshoo ting
Category Major /minor code Description BIOS 2.2 The main area (D XE) of BIOS has become c orrupted and there is no r ecovery binary image availabl e. 2.3 The embedded control ler policy requires the user t o enter a k ey sequence. 2.4 The embedded control ler is checking or rec overing the boot bl ock. Hardwar e 3.2 The embedded contr oller h as timed out waiting for BIOS t o return from memory initialization. 3.3 The embedded control ler has timed out waiting f or BIOS to return fr om graphics initialization. 3.4 The system board dis plays a power fail ure (cr owbar).* 3.5 The proces sor is not detected.* 3.6 The proces sor does not support an enabled f eature. Thermal 4.2 A processor ov er temperatur e condition has been detected.* 4.3 An ambient temperatur e over temper ature condition has been det ected. 4.4 An MXM over temper ature condition has been det ected. Syst em board 5.2 The embedded controll er cannot îÂÂnd valid îÂÂrmware. 5.3 The embedded control ler has timed out waiting f or the BIOS. 5.4 The embedded control ler has timed out waiting f or BIOS to return fr om system boar d initialization. 5.5 The embedded control ler reboo ted the system after a pos sible lock up condition had been det ected through the use o f a System Heal th Timer, Automat ed System Rec overy Timer, or other mechanism. * Indicates har dware trigger ed event; all o ther events are c ontroll ed by the BIOS. Interpr eting system validation diagnos tic front panel LEDs and audibl e codes 81
5 ConîÂÂguring passw ord security and resetting CMO S This chapt er describes how to conîÂÂgure p assword security and to r eset CMOS. Preparing to conîÂÂgure pas swords Comput er Setup (F10) Utility enables y ou to cr eate setup and pow er-on pas swords. There ar e three possibilities f or setting passwor ds: â DeîÂÂne an administrat or passwor d only . Y ou wil l need the passwor d to enter C omputer Setup (F10) Utility, but you wil l not need a passw ord to start the work station. â DeîÂÂne a power -on passwor d only . This passwor d lets y ou start the workstation or ent er the setup utility . â DeîÂÂne both. In this case, the administr ator passw ord lets y ou start the workstation and en ter the setup utility . The power-on pas sword starts the work station but does not l et you en ter the setup utility, After y ou cre ate both pas swords, yo u can use the administrator p assword in plac e of the power -on passw ord as an override t o log int o the comput er (a useful fe ature for a network adminis trator ). NOTE: Y ou can only cl ear the passwor ds with the passwor d jumper . Clearing CMO S does not cle ar the passwor ds. CAUTION: Before pr essing the Cl ear CMOS butt on, back up your c omputer CMOS settings. Pre ssing the Cle ar CMOS button r esets CMOS val ues to fact ory defaults and er ases customiz ed information, including asset numbers and s pecial settings. T o back up the CMOS settings, run C omputer Setup (F10) Utility and select Sa ve to Diskette from the Fil e menu. Resetting the passw ord jumper CAUTION: Stringent security is a mode where ther e is no physical bypas s of the passwor d function. If enabled, r emoving the passw ord jumper will be ignor ed. T o enable this mode, chang e the security setting Clear P assword Jumper in Passw ord Policies t o Ignore. If you l ose or for get the passwor d when in stringent security mode, the system can onl y be reset b y Syst em Management C ommand. This is a way for HP Service and Sup port to provide a secur e method to acc ess the BIOS and command a p assword r eset for a speciîÂÂcally identiîÂÂed unit under the dir ection of the owner . This scenario may no t be cov ered under warr anty . T o prev ent needing a customer servic e event to r estor e acc ess to the syst em, recor d your conîÂÂgured administrat or and power -on passwor ds in a safe place aw ay from y our comput er . T o disable the po wer-on or adminis trator pas sword fe atures, or t o clear the pow er-on or administr ator passwor ds, compl ete the fol lowing st eps: 82 Chapter 5 ConîÂÂguring passw ord security and resetting CMO S
1. Shut down the oper ating system pr operly, then turn oî« the c omputer and any ext ernal device s, and disconnect the pow er cord fr om the power outl et. 2. With the power c ord disconnect ed, press the po wer button again t o drain the syst em of any re sidual power . WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/ or hot surfaces, be sur e to disconnect the pow er cord fr om the wall o utlet, and all ow the intern al system componen ts to cool befor e touching. CAUTION: When the computer is pl ugged in, the power sup ply al ways has vol tage applied t o the system bo ard even when the unit is turned oî«. F ail ure to disc onnect the power cor d can resul t in damage to the sys tem. Static el ectricity can damage the electr onic components of the c omputer or op tional equipment. Befor e beginning these proc edures, ensur e that you ar e discharged o f static electricity by brieî¯y t ouching a grounded metal object. See the Saf ety & Regulatory Inf ormation guide for more in formation. 3. Remo ve the acc ess panel. 4. Locat e the header and jumper . NOTE: The passwor d jumper is green so that it can be e asily identiîÂÂed. 5. Remo ve the jumper from pins 1 and 2. 6. Plac e the jumper on either pin 1 or 2, but not both, so th at it does not get l ost. 7. Replac e the acce ss panel and rec onnect the external equipment. 8. Pl ug in the computer and turn on po wer . All ow the operating syst em to start. This cl ears the current passwor ds and disables the pas sword f eatures. 9. Shut down the c omputer, unplug the po wer, and disconnect the ext ernal equipment. 10. Remov e the acce ss panel. 11. Plac e the jumper on pins 1 and 2. 12. Replac e the acces s panel. 13. Rec onnect the external equipment and pl ug in the comput er . Clearing and re setting the BIOS The CMOS butt on resets BIOS settings t o defaul t, but does not cl ear the passwor ds or aî«ect any of the other Security settings. On Intel syst ems with advanced manag eability featur es, the CMOS butt on will also partiall y unpro vision AMT . Cle aring and resetting the BIOS 83
1. T urn oî« the comput er and any ext ernal devices, and disc onnect the power cor d from the power o utlet. 2. Disconnect the k eyboar d, monitor, and any o ther external equipment c onnected to the c omputer . WARNING! T o reduc e the risk of personal injury from electrical shock and/ or hot surfaces, be sur e to disconnect the pow er cord fr om the wall o utlet, and all ow the intern al system componen ts to cool befor e touching. CAUTION: When the comput er is plugged in, the power sup ply al ways has vol tage applied t o the system bo ard even when the unit is turned oî«. F ail ure to disc onnect the power cor d can resul t in damage to the sys tem. Static el ectricity can damage the electr onic components of the c omputer or op tional equipment. Befor e beginning these proc edures, ensur e that you ar e discharged o f static electricity by brieî¯y t ouching a grounded metal object. See the Saf ety & Regulatory Inf ormation guide for more in formation. 3. Remo ve the acc ess panel. CAUTION: Pushing the CMOS button wil l reset CMO S values t o factory defaul ts. It is important to back up the comput er CMOS settings befor e resetting them in case they ar e needed later . Back up is easil y done through C omputer Setup . See Comput er Setup (F10) Utilities on page 18 for in formation on backing up the CMOS settings. 4. Locat e, press, and hol d the CMOS butt on in for îÂÂve seconds. NO TE: Make sur e you hav e disconnected the A C power cor d from the wal l outlet. The CM OS button wil l not cl ear CMOS if the pow er cord is c onnected. 5. Replac e the acce ss panel. 6. Rec onnect the external devic es. 7. Pl ug in the computer and turn on po wer . NO TE: Y ou will r eceive PO ST error mes sages after cl earing CMOS and r ebooting advising you th at conîÂÂguration changes hav e occurr ed. Use Comput er Setup to reset an y special system setups al ong with the date and time. For instructions on C omputer Setup, see C omputer Setup (F10) Utilities on pag e 18 . 84 Chapter 5 ConîÂÂguring passw ord security and resetting CMO S
A Linux technical note s HP oî«ers a variety of Linux sol utions for HP works tation customers: â HP oî«ers an Ubuntu pr eload on some Z Series W orkstations. â HP certiîÂÂes and supports Ubuntu on some HP work stations. â HP certiîÂÂes and supports Red Hat Ent erprise Linux (RHEL) on HP workstations. â HP certiîÂÂes SUSE Linux Ent erprise Desktop (SLED ) on HP workstations. â HP oî«ers a SLED 11 prel oad on some older Z Series W orkstations. For Linux setup and r estor e procedur es, see the user guide for y our workstation at h ttp://www .hp. com/ support/work station_manuals . â Syst em RAM â Audio â Network cards â Hyper - Threading T echnology â NVIDIA Graphics W orkstations â AMD Graphics W orkstations NO TE: After yo u set up the operating syst em, make sur e that the late st BIOS, drivers, and softwar e updates are instal led. CAUTION: Do not add optional h ardwar e or third-party devices t o the workstation un til the operating system is suc cess full y install ed. Adding hardwar e might cause errors and pr event the oper ating system fr om installing c orrectl y . System RAM HP supports diî«erent amounts of t otal RAM in various HP work stations, based on the number of har dware DIMM slo ts and the capabilities of the syst em. The total memory supported f or each conîÂÂguration is listed in the Hardware Support Matrix for HP Linux W orkstations at http ://www .hp. com/support/ linux_hardw are_matrix . Audio All HP w orkstations come with b uilt -in audio hardwar e. The audio hardw are is supported b y the Advanced Linux Sound Architecture (ALSA) driv ers included with all modern Linux distrib utions. The audio hardw are pro vides basic playback and r ecording f eature s. The ability to simultaneo usly play audio from mul tiple so urces, such as ap plications and CDs, is provided in the ALSA driv er that provide s audio mixing. The performance o f software audio mixing and pl ayback is greatl y impro ved in ALSA version 1.0.13 and lat er . After the driv er is install ed, the optional NVIDIA and AMD graphics car ds that are sup ported in HP worksta tions also provide audio functionality ov er HDMI. The signal can be passed thr ough the DisplayP ort connect or to a monitor with audio capabilitie s. The vendor driver must be instal led. Such a conîÂÂguration might pre sent two audio hardwar e choices. If y ou do not hear so und through the spe akers, one pos sible Syst em RAM 85
re ason is that the graphics card ( defaul t) is select ed for audio output inst ead of the Dis playPort. Check the audio settings (for ex ample, Sound in gnome-c ontrol -center ). In some systems, embedded In tel HD graphics may also pr esent a similar HDMI audio devic e that can be used through the Dis playPort int erface. No pro prietary driver is needed for this devic e, just a suî°ciently recen t k ernel. Network cards All HP w orkstations include one or two in tegrat ed network interface c ontrol lers. Some support optional NICs. Most Linux distributions h ave drivers for the se interface s. Hyper- Thre ading Technology The Z Series Work stations support Hyper- Threading T echnology (HTT), an Intel technol ogy that improve s proc essor performance b y enabling the proc essor to simul taneousl y perform multipl e tasks. The operating system tr eats an HTT -enabled pr ocessor as two virtual pr ocessors and shar es the workl oad between them when possibl e. This featur e can be used only if the oper ating system support mul tiple pr ocessors and is speciîÂÂcally optimiz ed for HTT . T o enable HTT : 1. During startup, pre ss F10 to ent er Computer Setup (F10) Utility . 2. Select Adv anced > Performance Options . 3. Set Intel Hyper- Threading Technol ogy to Enable , and then pre ss F10 to exit the menu. 4. Select Main > Sa ve Changes and Exit . 5. Res tart the system to enabl e HTT . NOTE: On most rec ent Linux distributions (incl uding RHEL 6, SLED 11, and updates t o those streams ), the k ernel automaticall y detects tha t HT T is enabl ed and works corr ectly . NVIDIA Graphics W ork stations Some worksta tion conîÂÂgurations come with NVIDIA Quadro gr aphics hardwar e. HP rec ommends the use of NVIDIA drivers for be st resul ts on Linux systems. HP pro vides recommended v ersions of the drivers with RPM-c ompatible instal lers for RHEL and SLED distributions. These ar e availabl e from the HP Instal ler Kit for Linux and fr om workstation driv er repositorie s on hp. com. When HP instal lers ar e used, their contents and documen tation links are l ocated in the / opt/hp / nvidia fol der . When installing Linux on a w orkstation that c ontains an NVIDIA card, administr ators should sel ect a VESA- compatibl e driver t o avoid the instability that is experienc ed with some open-sourc e versions of the Nouv eau and DRM drivers. Open-sourc e versions of Nouv eau drivers and NVIDIA drivers canno t coexist in the same runtime en vironment because they use the same har dware r esourc es. If administrat ors creat e their own Linux environments using NVIDIA drivers but choose no t to use HP-packag ed versions, HP recommends th at they manuall y append the fol lowing boot l oader paramet ers to properl y suppr ess the Nouve au driver at runtime (grub exampl e belo w): kernel /vmlinuz ... rdblacklist=nouveau nouveau.modeset=0 This action is applied by HP ins tallers but mus t be applied/ rest ored under other cir cumstances. 86 Appendix A Linux technical note s
T o customiz e display char acteristics and re solutions when the comput er is using an NVIDIA driver, ex ecute the fol lowing c ommand: /usr/bin/nvidia-settings T o cre ate and manipulat e the / etc/ X11/ xorg .c onf îÂÂle, execute: /usr/bin/nvidia-xconfig AMD Graphics W ork stations Some worksta tion conîÂÂgurations include AMD graphics har dware. HP r ecommends use of AMD gr aphics drivers for be st resul ts on Linux systems. HP also pro vides recommended v ersions of AMD graphics drivers with RP M-compatibl e install ers for RHEL and SLED distributions. These ar e availabl e from the HP Instal ler Kit for Linux and w orkstation driver support package s on hp. com. The open sour ce RADEON and RADEONHD drivers can conî¯ict with the AMD graphics driv ers by claiming the hardw are earl y in the boot pr ocess. The AMD driv er installation pr ocess usual ly black lists conî¯icting drivers and turns oî« k ernel mode-setting in the initial RAM image. Administra tor customization o f the display char acteristics and many o ther aspects of an AMD graphics driv er environmen t is availabl e through the fol lowing c ommand, which starts the Catalys t Control C enter: /usr/bin/amdcccle Some settings for AMD graphics, incl uding reconîÂÂguration of the / etc/X11/x org. conf îÂÂle, can be ac complished through the man y options pro vided by the fol lowing c ommand: /usr/bin/aticonfig Information can be f ound in these direct ories after the driver is ins talled: /opt/hp/ati /usr/share/ati /usr/share/doc/fglrx If the automatic init scrip t attempts t o rebuil d the kernel modul e, the name of the l og îÂÂle is /var /log/f glrx- buil d.log. AMD Graphics W orkstations 87
B ConîÂÂguring RAID devices This appendix explains how t o conîÂÂgure RAID arrays on your work station. T opics RAID hard drive maximum and as sociated storag e control ler options on page 88 Supported RAID conîÂÂgurations on page 89 ConîÂÂguring Intel SA T A RAID on page 89 Software RAID sol ution on page 90 For additional inf ormation about RAID conîÂÂguration, go to http:// www .hp. com/support/RAID _F AQs . RAID hard drive maximum and associated st orage c ontrol ler options This section lists the maximum number of har d drives support ed on HP workstations ac cording t o RAID conîÂÂguration and stor age contr oller o ptions. NOTE: This section applies to in ternal works tation conîÂÂgurations that do not use add-in car ds and external enclosur es. Maximum hard drives allo wed Hard drives Storage contr ollers SA T A Onboard 8.5 mm (3.5 in) 6.3 mm (2.5 in) RST SFF 2 2 Y es T ower 2 2 Y es 88 Appendix B ConîÂÂguring R AID device s
Supported R AID conîÂÂgurations The fol lowing RAID conîÂÂgurations are support ed: RAID conîÂÂguration details ConîÂÂguration Description Control lers RAID 0 Integra ted striped disk array â Require s a minimum of two drives. â Pro vides improved I/ O performance. â Pro vides no fault t oleranc e. â Loses all da ta if any disk in the array fails. â Increase s disk performance. Intel with RS T RAID 1 Mirror ed disk array â Supports two drives. â Pro vides 100% redundancy: all data from one driv e is duplicated on a sec ond drive. â Reco vers from a single-driv e failure. â Serves as a good entry-le vel redundant syst em. Intel with RS T ConîÂÂguring Intel SA T A RAID This section describes how t o use Intel î Rapid St orage T echnology (RS T) to set up and manage SA T A RAID v olumes. NO TE: These instructions appl y to Windows-based syst ems. They also appl y to Linux distributions tha t incl ude the isci k ernel driver support for the RS T e technol ogy . This driver is incl uded on recent r ele ases of most upstr eam and enterprise distrib utions, and may be availabl e for addition to some pr evious rel eases. If this driver is not a vailable in the dis tribution, or is not applicabl e to the platform ( e. g., the RST c ontrol ler ), the Softwar e RAID solution is recommended. Y ou can creat e a SA T A RAID array that c ontains up to the maximum number o f internal SA T A hard drive s and eS A T A drives (if you use an op tional eSA T A bulkhead cable ) supported on your work station. The Intel SA T A option R OM conîÂÂguration utilities run when yo u select RAID for the SA T A emulation mode. T wo or more har d drives must be attached t o the control ler f or the option ROM t o run. ConîÂÂguring system BIOS T o set up a RAID conîÂÂguration, the emulation mode must be set to RAID in C omputer Setup ( F10) Utility . This is the defaul t setting. If the mode has been changed, f ollo w these steps t o reinstat e it. 1 . During startup, pre ss esc to sel ect a language from the list, and then sel ect Comput er Setup (F10) Utility . 2 . Under Comp uter Setup (F10) Utility, use the arrow k eys t o navigate and sel ect options. 3 . Select Adv anced > System Options , then pres s enter. 4. Select ConîÂÂgure St orage Contr oller for RAID > Enable . 5 . Select Menu > Sa ve Changes and Exit , then press en ter . 6 . Pr ess enter t o accep t the changes. Supported RAID conîÂÂgurations 89
ConîÂÂguring RAID with the Intel utility Fol low these s teps to cr eate RAID vol umes. 1. Pr ess ctrl I when promp ted, to ent er the Intel Rapid S torage T echnology utility (RST). Use the arr ow k eys and the spac e bar to naviga te and select op tions. NO TE: If only one har d drive is attached, the utility does not open. 2. Select Cre ate RAID Volume , and then pr ess ent er . 3. T ype the a name for the RAID vol ume in the Name îÂÂeld, and then press tab. 4. Select a l evel in the RAID Le vel îÂÂeld, and then pres s tab. 5. If three or mor e hard driv es are instal led, compl ete the f ollowing s teps: a. Press en ter to dis play the Select dial og box. b. Select individual ph ysical members of the volume . c. Pr ess ent er to exit the Select dial og box and to r eturn to the Cr eate V olume Menu dial og box. 6. If appr opriate, select a siz e in the Stripe Size îÂÂeld, and then pr ess tab. 7. Enter the de sired vol ume size in the Capacity îÂÂeld, and then pres s tab. 8. Pr ess enter t o initiate vol ume creation. 9. When the warning mes sage appears, pre ss Y to cre ate the vol ume. 10. Select 6 > Exit, then pr ess ent er . 11. Pre ss Y to conîÂÂrm the exit. Softw are R AID solution This section summarizes so ftware RAID considerations th at are speciîÂÂc to the Linux en vironment, and pro vides links to additional conîÂÂguration r esourc es. Software RAID c onsiderations The Linux k ernel software RAID driver ( call ed md, for multiple device) oî«ers int egrated so ftware RAID without the need for additional har dwar e disk control lers or k ernel patche s. Unlike mos t hardwar e RAID solutions, softwar e RAID can be used with all types of disk technol ogies, including SA T A, SCSI, and solid-state driv es. This softwar e solution requir es only minimal setup o f the disks themselv es. Howev er, when compar ed to hardw are-based RAID, softwar e RAID has disadvantages in managing the disks, bre aking up data as necessary, and managing parity data. The CPU mus t assume some extra l oading: disk - intensiv e workl oads resul t in ro ughly doubl e the CPU ov erhead (for ex ample, from 15% t o 30%). For most applications, this ov erhead is easil y handled b y exce ss headroom in the pr ocessors. But f or some applications where disk and CPU perf ormance are v ery well balanc ed and already near bo ttleneck l evels, this additional CPU ov erhead can become tr oublesome . Hardw are RAID oî«ers advantages because o f its large har dware cache and the cap ability for better scheduling of oper ations in parall el. However, so ftware RAID oî«ers more î¯exibility f or disk and disk control ler setup. A dditionall y, hardwar e RAID requires tha t a failed RAID contr oll er must be replac ed with an identical model to av oid data loss, wher eas softwar e RAID imposes no such requirements. Some softwar e RAID schemes oî«er data prot ection through mirr oring (cop ying the data to mul tiple disks in case one disk fails) or parity data ( checksums that al low err or detection and limited r ebuilding o f data in case 90 Appendix B ConîÂÂguring R AID device s
of a fail ure). F or all softwar e RAID solutions on HP workstations, r edundancy can be rest ored onl y after the system is shut do wn so that the fail ed drive can be replac ed. This replac ement require s only a minimum amount of w ork. Performance consider ations Disk I/ O bandwidth is typically limit ed by the system b us speeds, the disk contr oll er, and the disks themselv es. The balance o f these hardw are limitations, as aî«ected by the so ftware conîÂÂguration, determine s the location o f the any bottl eneck is in the system. Sever al RAID levels oî«er impr oved performanc e relativ e to stand-al one disk performance. If disk thr oughput is res tricted because of a singl e disk contr oller, RAID can prob ably do littl e to impro ve performance until another c ontroll er is added. Conv ersely, if raw disk perf ormance is the bottl eneck, a tuned software RAID solution can dr amatically impr ove the thr oughput. The sl ower disk performance is, r elative t o the rest o f the system, the bett er RAID per formanc e will scale, because the sl owes t piece of the performanc e pipeline is being directl y addres sed by moving to RAID . ConîÂÂguring software RAID See the fol lowing sit es for additional inf ormation about conîÂÂguring softwar e R AID: â Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 7âÂÂSee the Storage Administration Guide at https:// acces s.redhat. com/ documentation/ en-US/Red_Hat_En terprise_Linux/7/html /S torage_Adminis tration_Guide/index.html â Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 6âÂÂSee the Storage Administration Guide at http :// docs.r edhat.c om/docs/ en- US/Red_Ha t_Enterprise_Linux/6/html /S torage_A dministration_Guide/index.html â Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 5âÂÂSee the Deployment Guide at http:// docs.redhat. com/docs/ en-US/ Red_Hat_Ent erprise_Linux/5/ html/Deploymen t_Guide/ ch-raid.h tml . â SLED 12âÂÂSee the Deployment Guide at https:// www.suse .com/documen tation/ sled-12/ book_sle_depl oyment/ data/ sec_ yast2_system_r aid.html . â SLED 11âÂÂSee the Deployment Guide at http:// www .suse.c om/documentation/ sled11/ book_sle_depl oyment/?page=/ documentation/ sled11/book_sle_depl oyment/ data/ book_sle_depl oyment.html . â Ubuntu 14.04 L TSâÂÂSee the Server Guide at https://help. ubuntu. com/l ts/ serverguide/ advanc ed- install ation.html or the Community Wiki at https://help .ubuntu. com/c ommunity /Installation/ Softwar eRAID . For mor e information about Open So urce and Linux at HP, go t o http://h10018. www1.hp. com/wwsolutions/ linux/index.html . Softwar e RAID solution 91
C System bo ard designat or s SFF work station system board de signators Designator Silk screen Componen t/Description E15 E15 BBR Crisis rec overy header /jumper E49 E49 PSWD Cl ear password he ader /jumper J9 RJ45/USB LAN/DUAL USB 3.0 J10 J10 USB2/USB3 Quad USB 3.0 J31 J31 X1PCIEXP1 PCIe3 x1 slot (bl ack) J32 J32 X1PCIEXP2 PCIe3 x1 slot (bl ack) J41 J41 X16PCIEXP PCIe3 x16 slot (bl ack) J42 J42 X4PCIEXP PCIe3 x16(4) sl ot (black) J63 J63 DISPLA Y PORT Dual-Mode DisplayPort c onnector J64 J64 DISPLA Y PORT DisplayPort connector J68 PS2 Mouse connect or stacked o ver k eyboard connect or J78 IN/ OUT Audio line in stack ed over audio line out J86 M.2 SSD M.2 connector JZ87/88 J Z87/88 Slo t1/4 PCIe x16 retention clip SW50 SW50 CMOS Clear CM OS switch/push b utton P1 PWR P ower supply, 6-pin ( white) P2 PWRCMD Pow er command, 6-pin (white) P3 PWRCPU Power supply, 4-pin ( white) P5 P5 PB/LED Fr ont power button/LED (black) P6 SPKR Internal s peaker ( white) P8 CPU F AN CPU fan header P23 FRONT AUD Front audio (blue ) P24 FRONT USB F ront I/ O USB ( yell ow) P52 COMB Serial port P124 HLCK Hood l ock solenoid (black) P125 HSENSE Hood sensor P150 Media int-Media (6-pin) P152 SD RDR USB 3.0 Media card r eader 92 Appendix C System boar d designators
Designator Silk screen Componen t/Description P26 FRONT USB3.0 Front I/O USB 3.0 (bl ue) P160 SA T APWR0 HDD power (black) XBT1 XBT1 BA T Battery holder XMM1 - XMM4 XMM1 - XMM4 DIMM1 - DIMM4 Memory slots XU1 XU1 CPU sock et T ower work station system bo ard designat or s Designator Silk screen Component E15 E15 Crisis reco very header /jumper E49 E49 Clear p assword header /jumper J9 J9 RJ/USB LAN/DUAL USB 2.0 J10 J10 QUAD USB Quad USB 3.0 J31 SLO T3 PCIe3 x4 PCIe3 x4 connector J33 SLO T1 PCIe3 x1 PCIe3 x1 connector J41 SLO T2 PCIe3 x16 PCIe3 x16 c onnector J42 SLO T4 PCIe3 x16 (4) PCIe3 x16 (4) connector J63 DP Dual -Mode DisplayPort c onnector J65 DVI DVI-D connector J68 J68 PS2 Stacked k eyboard/mo use connector J78 J78 T riple stack ed audio jacks J86 M.2 SSD M.2 connector J87/88 J87/88 Sl ot2/4 PCIe x16 ret ention clip MT G1-MT G10 N/ A Mounting holes P1 P1 Power suppl y connector (6-pin) P2 PWRCMD Power c ommand, white (6-pin) P3 P3 CPU PWR CPU power connect or (4-pin) P5 P5 Power b utton/HDD LED/P ower LED switch/Side acce ss panel sensor /T emperatur e header P6 SPKR Speak er P8 CPU F AN CPU fan header P11 CHF Fan Rear syst em fan P23 P23 FRONT AUD Fron t audio header P24 P24 FRONT USB Front panel USB header T ower work station system bo ard designat ors 93
Designator Silk screen Component P26 P26 FRONT USB3 Front panel USB3 he ader (blue) P52 CO MB Serial por t header P60-P62 SA T A0-SA T A2 SA T A connectors P63 SA T A3 SA T A/ eSA T A connector P70 EXT ST ONE card connect or P124 P124 HOOD LOCK Side access p anel solenoid lock header P125 HSENSE Hood sensor connector (3 pin) P129 TBT TBT connect or (2x4-pin) P150 Media int-Media connect or (6-pin) P152 Media USB 3.0 Media card reader P160 SA T A PWR0 SA T A Pow er connector (2x3 pin) SW50 SW50 CMOS Clear CM OS switch/push b utton XBT1 XBT1 BA T Battery holder XMM1 - XMM4 XMM1 - XMM4 DIMM1 - DIMM4 Memory slots XU1 XU1 P rimary CPU socket 94 Appendix C System boar d designators
Index A audible c odes 80 B beep codes 80 BIOS cle aring and resetting 83 BIOS RO M 17 booting op tions Ful l Boot 75 Quick Boot 75 C Cable manag ement 45 CMOS 82 components SFF 2 SFF front p anel 2 SFF re ar panel 3 tow er 8 tow er front panel 8 tow er rear panel 9 ConîÂÂguring RAID devices 88 maximum hard driv es all owed 88 SA T A R AID 89 Customer Sel f Repair 65 D Deskt op management 29 Al tiris Client Management Solutions 31 F ailSafe Boot B lock ROM 32 F ault notiîÂÂcation and r ecov ery 39 HP Client Manager So ftware 31 HP SoftPaq Do wnload Manager 32 HPQFlash 32 Initial conîÂÂguration 30 progr ammable power b utton 40 Remot e ROM Flash 32 Remot e system ins tall 30 ROM Flash 32 Syst em Software Man ager 32 Updating softwar e 31 Work station security 33 Diagnostics 60 Diagnostics and tro ubleshoo ting Diagnosis guidelines 61 diagnostics and tro ubleshoo ting locating ID l abels 61 locating w arranty info 61 dimensions, worksta tion 14 DIMM conîÂÂgurations, supported 53 DIMM install ation order SFF worksta tion 54 T ower work station 55 E environmen tal speciîÂÂcations 14 error codes 80 messages 75 Expansion card sl ot identiîÂÂcation SFF Work station 48 T ower W orkstation 50 F î¯ashing LEDs 80 H HP PC Hardw are Diagnostics (UEFI) downl oading 74 L links Contact inf ormation for HP US 63 HP Chat Support 63 HP Customer Sel f Repair 65 M Memory DIMM install ation guidelines 53 N numeric error c odes 75 O Operating syst em setup 85 P Passw ord conîÂÂguration 82 Pow er supply Expansion card conîÂÂguration res trictions 47 power c onsumption 57 resetting 57 speciîÂÂcations 56 Product f eatur es Comput er components 4 ERP complianc e mode 16 Hyper- threading 17 Physical charact eristics 7, 13 SA T A Power Managemen t 17 Syst em board ar chitecture 6, 12 T urbo Boost 17 Product o verview 1 R Replacing c omponents Battery 45 cable manag ement 45 Component l ocations 5, 11 CPU (proc essor ) and CPU heatsink 46 expansion slo ts 47 guidelines 44 hard driv e 51 information and guideline s 41 Memory 53 power suppl y 56 Service consider ations 42 warnings and cautions 41 S SFF components 2 environmen tal speciîÂÂcations 14 front p anel components 2 re ar panel components 3 weights and dimensions 14 Index 95
speciîÂÂcations environmen tal 14 worksta tion 14 support advisories 63 befor e calling 60 calling 60 customer b ulletins 63 customer no tices 63 HP Chat Support 63 HP Support Cent er 63 online 63 security bull etins 63 Syst em board c omponents 5 Syst em board designa tors 92 Syst em management 16 T tow er components 8 environmen tal speciîÂÂcations 14 front p anel components 8 re ar panel components 9 weights and dimensions 14 troubl eshooing Customer Sel f Repair 65 suggestions 64 suggestions, a t startup 64 suggestions, during o peration 64 T roubl eshooting 60 troubl eshooting locating ID l abels 61 locating w arranty info 61 reso urces and t ools 63 U urls Contact inf ormation for HP US 63 HP Chat Support 63 HP Customer Sel f Repair 65 W weights, work station 14 Work station setup Ensuring proper v entilation 15 96 Index